Home

FibeAir Family - Meridian Microwave

1. Wayside Channel Connector Pin Outs SOURCE SEMIL FH FH SENIL BOURCE Petm Tea UE S e ua pri e Taranii Signal Eirect A 15 Taasi Date A Retin fecetved Dain i 15 2 Faced Dain bok DCE L Lee gt E Maquette Se A DTE Natur Maputo Sere 8 1 E DOE Peast p m HE mE T gt E Grd Crann DE Parris a Racari Lew Siyal Deica A DCE Tiin ere e i a 3 Piston Palia rie aE o Arii Signed Deter ants DE Eat mear Semeei Trig 2 a O DE Deere a Benni Tinig p stam DE Tiii 25 e Teaser gral Barani Theby H Fist c W Gear Sand By Fates V 24 RS 232 Pin Out V 24 RS 232 Interface SOURCE SIGNAL FIH PN PIGNAL SOURCE DESIGMATION N 80 DES GAATION OTE Secondary mrema i4 4 mn ai Deia TO SOTE DCE Tigres pral Pemadi Trig 15 diepe FG DE DWE Biois Foodia 16 4 oe amaki aril TE DCE Recdew SqralBemea Ting 17 p isaac bce DTE biral Loepbck LL 1E Daa Sai Ready DSF DCE DTE Geesi Fogi e Send 13 i Eigra Graur i Pein a agen pasta 5 Reoshi Line Signal Detector D0 De Remote Lonotack wi E DCE Finga Fl Pz ae _ OTEWCE Datu Spral Asia Select 23 Umia _ aE Eri Trane Signal Elenan Thing a Baria Rihai Line Bigaa Deisi WE DCE We S Secondary Char lo Send pce X 21 Pin Out X 21 Interface SOURCE SIGNAL FIN Fin SIGMAL SQUARE DESIGNATION NO Wo DESIGNATION i 7 1 Shad aur Lar S Trane ay OTE akis oe n 3 Corbi Aj OTE ae oe 4 Rev
2. Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action your Ceragon distributor MUX NO LINE LOSS Line Issued when a signal is resent to the main OF SIGNAL channel MUX JO MISMATCH SDH The received JO string is different than the expected string To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Sonet alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor MUX NO JO SDH The received JO string is now identical to the MISMATCH expected one MUX RADIO LOSS OF SONET SDH After three consecutive radio channel frame FRAME losses this alarm is issued link RLOF disconnected To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Sonet alarm is still active contact your Ceragon dealer MUX NO RADIO LOSS SONET SDH Issued when a valid frame is recognized OF FRAME following an RLOF state MUX LINE SIGNAL BER Issued when the SDH SONET line BER DEGRADE drops below the defined level for signal degrade SDH Sonet Configuration menu To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe BER alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor MUX NO LINE SIGNAL BER Issued when the SDH SONET line BER DEGRADE returns to a level above the defined level for signal degrade SDH Sonet Configuration menu MUX LINE EXCESSIVE BER Issued when the SDH SONET line BER ERRORS drops below the defined level for excessive errors SDH Sonet Configuration menu To Correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifth
3. Receive Cable Twisted Pairs RX Signals D Type 44 Pin No R RINGO 2 Twisted Pair R TIPO 1 R RING1 17 Twisted Pair R TIP1 16 R RING2 32 Twisted Pair R TIP2 31 R RING3 4 Twisted Pair R TIP3 3 R RING4 19 Twisted Pair R TIP4 18 R RING5 34 Twisted Pair R TIP5 33 R RING6 5 Twisted Pair R TIP6 20 R RING7 21 Twisted Pair R TIP7 35 Shield CGND 1 22 100Base T Fast Ethernet Electrical Connector Shielded RJ 45 Used with UTP Cat 5 Protocols supported Fast Ethernet 100Base T full duplex Timing mode Retimed Range 80m Impedance 100 Q 100Base T LED Indicators LED Indication LINK Normal operation FULL Yellow ON operating at 100 Mbps OFF operating at 10 Mbps RX LAN receiving data TX Yellow LAN transmitting data 8 4 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Line Interfaces Main Channel Interfaces 100Base T Connector Pinout 100BaseFX Fast Ethernet Optical Wavelength 1300 nm Connector SC Used with Multi mode fiber Protocols supported Fast Ethernet FDDI Fiber Channel ATM SONET SDH Maximum output to 62 5 125 fiber 14 dBm Receiver sensitivity 31 dBm Maximum input overload 11 dBm 100BaseFX LED Indicators LED Indication LINK Green Normal operation FULL Yellow ON operating at 100 Mbps OFF operating at 10 Mbps RX LAN receiving data TX Yellow LAN transmi
4. ibu Interface 155 MB s Line Interface Loopback Loop Figure 6 4 Remote Terminal Loop 6 12 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Connection Configuration Troubleshooting Guide Connection Configuration Troubleshooting Guide Problems that occur when trying to connect to the FibeAir system using CeraView may be due to incorrect cable configuration If there is a connection problem in the system CeraView will start but an hour glass will appear when the software is loading to indicate that a problem exists The following steps will help you identify and correct such problems Check the Cables Refer to the figure below for the following procedures 1 For Ethernet connection between FibeAir and a PC network card use a cross cable For Ethernet connection between FibeAir and an Ethernet hub for example connecting to a LAN jack in a wall use a straight cable For serial connection between FibeAir and a PC serial port use a straight cable For serial connection using a dial up modem use a cross cable Tx Tx Tx Tx Rx O Rx Mo i Rx Straight Cable Cross Cable Figure 6 5 Cable Connections Check Read and Write Communities 1 Ping FibeAir If ping succeeds the problem may be with the CeraView software installation or the computer TCP IP stack Check the read and write communities in FibeAir
5. Connected Dead wai EETA hue Figure 4 12 IDC Advanced Configuration 4 16 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P The following screen appears for Drawer Basic Fm Exe Yet Cel reer fee pisl ala aCe E CPO IRUR OFO 3 k nf doped CE I Hain Free ENFERN UNER PLEESIE amp 192160 1 Let Peewee Hazic Coe iyaration Wait Hack Apply 3 Gayo amp Artura Prac Conair il 2 3a aHH mio brii i Fo HN Figure 4 13 Drawer Basic Configuration The following screen appears for Drawer Advanced H FEH UGER Eraser Whe Figure 4 14 Drawer Advanced Configuration 4 To configure a parameter type the number beside the parameter and then type the number of the desired value or enter the value manually in the entry box that appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 17 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P System Status To view system status information 1 Inthe main menu shown in the section Getting Started at the beginning of this chapter select 2 System Status The Status menu appears Fie Edt Wee ol Traore Help oa eg aa srl Flan Mera Hotatun ntert aces FIBESIR CEENOOH HETH rates uit LH taft braver tHisht Brower Cerade 11 M i ante MD Bt KUM Figure 4 15 Status Menu 2 Select the module for which you want view status information by typing the number beside
6. ETSI class 2 3 2 18 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Media Device Antenna Mount Losses Media Device Antenna Mount Losses Installation Type Losses i eaten Devi e Taf iT MENEN STM Directioun Cargon interface Eingi Polarization Ceragan interface es eee ge er a m a e a a a Paii Beton cary STi Projected Diret Singe Polarization Ceragan interfere Secardury tMain ep Seconda Secondary 15 ma e ma Mia See ee eae eee Re Note The numbers above are typical losses per link Item Loss dB 6 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 15 GHz 18 38 GHz Flex twist 0 5 0 5 1 2 1 5 Coupler Main 1 6 1 6 1 6 1 7 Coupler Secondary 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 6 Tube NA 0 2 0 4 0 5 Magic T NA NA NA 3 5 Circulator 0 2 NA NA NA Note The numbers above are typical losses per component FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 19 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Payload Payload 100 622 02 Mbps Main Channel Payload Types SONET OC 3 STS 3 OC 3C STS 3C SDH STM 1 ATM ATM over SONET SDH IP Ethernet TDM E3 DS3 E1 T1 Interface Modules STM 1 OC 3 Electrical CMI BNC Optical SM MM Fast Ethernet 100BaseTx Fx TDM E3 2xE3 DS3 2xDS3 8xE1 8xT1 2xFE Common Interface Combinations Fast Ethernet E3 DS3 2xFast Ethernet Fast Ethernet 8xE1 8xT1 3xE3 DS3 2xE3 D
7. 4 Inthe Trap Options area select Standard traps include serial number if you want trap messages to include the IDU serial number Select Report local traps of far end IDU if you want remote IDU trap messages to be reported locally Select Use different ID for each alarm type if you want each type of alarm to receive a unique ID Select Send clear traps with zero severity if you want a trap with a clear severity instead of the alarm s original severity to be sent to the IP addresses you specified 5 For CLLI Common Language Location Identifier enter up to 18 characters that will represent your system ID when traps are sent 6 For Heartbeat Period a heartbeat signal will be generated every x minutes the number you enter to tell your system that the trap meachnism is working 7 Click Apply to save the settings 8 Click Close NTP Configuration NTP Network Time Protocol configuration is performed when an NTP server is used to synchronize network activity 1 Select Configuration Local Remote Management System NTP The NTP Configuration window appears ETP Configuration ALA Rig E NTP Sar P ach ae 2 0 Tt 5 Od feet mon GHT 0 Hoir Mines Daigh Swing Tine alise E Hours Daite seng mres FO Aulrenticalin Sacre Kay ie pees fe fee ee ss appie Powar come Heo Figure 5 26 NTP Configuration Window 2 Enter the IP of the NTP server FibeAir Family Inst
8. Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 63 Chapter 5 Operation 5 64 Menus Management System IP Configuration 1 Elhan P Adret fi TEE Ji anir Comiigpurston 010 110 169 ena MMS P adress Pima E Bai pate pests Sl Select Configuration Management System IP Configuration The IP Configuration window appears ME E Ethernet iP Mask pas 40 6 Defaut Router P Andress 192160 0 i Figure 5 16 IP Configuration Window 2 In the Ethernet Addresses area specify the Ethernet IP Mask and Default Router IP Address In the Serial NMS area specify the IP Mask Baud Rate and Modem Phone Number Click Apply to save the changes Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Trap Forwarding aa Select Configuration Management System Trap Forwarding or click the Trap Forwarding icon The Trap Forwarding Configuration window appears at in al Tr ap Partaning Coniipur ation C10 a ddareyers P eket Trep Port Sami Trap for Aena wih Seve iy mheaa 201 onha 4 ee i anona aha 4 wa e r T EER mhs acta BE SRE 5 taor EENE afi 060 ae 4 ww rr r Trap Chetan Fend Trep for Aber cd Grn F Standard traps incus peri nureber a a D i Praw wa amp Pe T Report Tepr oi isr eral IDL Hetty FReErr F uita dieren iD ior bach alarn type te ERETT E Fisna Fr FF
9. Make sure that Server assigned name server addresses is selected and Use IP header compression and Use default gateway on remote network are unchecked Whenever you wish to connect to the IDU double click Dial Up Networking and select the number you wish to dial at the Phonebook Entry To verify connectivity ping the IDU s Ethernet IP address and make sure you have a reply Select Start Run and open ping P address Once communication is established run the CeraView management application Connecting Via a Serial Port Using a Dial Up Modem 1 2 Double click My Computer and then double click Dial up Networking Double click Make New Connection Type a name for the new connection Ceragon for example and select the modem you are using to dial Click Configure On the General tab set the maximum speed available and uncheck the Only connect at this speed box On the Connection tab set Data bits 8 Parity none and Stop bits 1 Check the Wait for dial tone box and uncheck the Call if not connected in 90 seconds box Uncheck Disconnect a call if idle for more than seconds FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 13 Chapter 4 System Setup 4 14 Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A 7 Click Port Settings and check Use FIFO Buffers and then click OK 8 Click Advanced and uncheck the Use error control and Use flow control boxes 9 Make sure that Modulation type is set to Standard 10
10. Other features include e Log file e Remote software and firmware download upgrades can be downloaded from local to remote e Performance monitoring Cable Interfaces A single coaxial cable connects the IDU to the ODU This cable carries the following signals e Transmit 350 MHz and receive 140 MHz modulated signals e Transmit 8 MHz and receive 4 MHz control data and communications between the IDU manager and the ODU controller e DC power from the IDU to the ODU 48 VDC 2 4 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Out Door Unit ODU Power Supplies The system automatically issues an alarm if the cable is disconnected and provides protection against shorts Furthermore there is no need to measure and define the length and type of cable used since the system automatically compensates cable parameters The following figure illustrates the signal direction through the coaxial cable ODU TO IDU CONTROL IDU TO ODU CONTROL TX PAYLOAD 155M RX PAYLOAD 155M Figure 2 4 Signal Direction Through the Coaxial Cable The power supply features e Standard Input 48 VDC e DC input range 40 5 VDC to 72 VDC e DC DC converter e Reverse polarity protection e Over voltage and over current protection e Detection of IDU ODU cable alarms i e cable open cable short The ODU receives its DC power from the IDU The PWR LED on the front panel of the IDU con
11. 10 101 10 16H IEN Deanined Configurstsan file 10 00 10 160 ile E Figure 5 6 Upload Download Configuration File Windows 2 Click Browse locate the configuration file you want to use and click Upload or Download FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 49 Chapter 5 Operation Menus After the file is uploaded or downloaded changes will take place only after the unit is reset Software Download This option enables you to download IDU ODU and MUX software updates 1 Select File Software Download A window appears for you to define the software download procedure fad Gott Figure 5 7 Software Download Window 2 Click Browse to choose the software file you want to download al hoose Fila Figure 5 8 Software File Selection Window 3 Select the file you want and click Choose 4 Inthe Software Download window click Apply The software file you chose is downloaded and a progress report appears in the Download Log area 5 50 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus New Session Select this item to log in for a new CeraView session The new session will appear in addition to the current session When you select this item the CeraView login window appears for you to specify the IP address of the FibeAir unit you want to access Exit Select this item to exit the CeraView application You can also ex
12. Groups Admin Full access Observer Read only access The administrator can add new users and groups and modify existing ones but cannot rename or delete the Admin user or group FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation CeraView Security Creating a New User To create a new CeraView user 1 In the main window shown above click Users and select Add User The User Configuration window appears User Condiguratoon xj eer Nera focerig Figure 5 3 CeraView Security Application User Configuration Window 2 Enter the new user s name and password in the fields at the top of the window 3 Inthe Access by Subnet area you can assign different access rights to the new user according to subnet For example you can give the user Administrator rights on one subnet and Observer rights on another Notes You cannot enter the same subnet twice for the same user Tf none of the subnets you entered match an IP the user tries to connect to the user will be denied access to that IP If more than one subnet matches an IP the user tries to connect to the group that belongs to the subnet that matches the IP the closest will be used for the IP access For example you created the user Joe with the following rights 172 24 0 0 Observer and 172 24 30 0 Administrator If Joe requests access to 172 24 30 5 he will be granted Administrator rights for that IP Even though both su
13. IP Configuration 1 Select Configuration Local Remote Management System IP Configuration The IP Configuration window appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 29 Chapter 5 Operation Menus duoon MEE TEE Pssmso0 Figure 5 24 IP Configuration Window 2 Inthe Ethernet Addresses area specify the Ethernet IP Mask and Default Router IP Address 3 In the Serial NMS area specify the IP Mask Baud Rate and Modem Phone Number Click Apply to save the changes Click Close Trap Forwarding 1 Select Configuration Local Remote Management System Trap Forwarding or click the Trap Forwarding icon The Trap Forwarding Configuration window appears cim im im im im i 7 1 B 49s S777 7717041778 ad id ual an am a B R r id a N as re F Figure 5 25 Trap Forwarding Configuration Window 5 30 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus 2 Inthe Managers IP Address area specify the IP addresses of the managers to which you want traps to be sent For each manager IP you specify specify the Trap Port and for Send Trap for Alarms with Severity select the severity filter to determine which types of alarms will be forwarded 3 Inthe Send Trap for Alarms of Group section you determine which alarms will be sent as SNMP traps to each manager In each manager column select the alarm types you want to include for that manager
14. Menus No low order path LP alarms and TU alarms TU LOP and TU AIS will be reported and no PM Performance Monitoring logs will be generated for the channel Map Trail A tributary signal is connected to a specific channel TU in the STM 1 signal For non protected connections the tributary is connected to one of the aggregate ports For protected connections the tributary is connected to two aggregate ports for path protection Note that for protected connections the same channel number must be used for the two aggregates Pass Through Matching channels are connected from one aggregate to the other For advanced trail parameters select a trail and click Advanced The Advanced Parameters window appears Pl Trail AG Oren daana MEE al Mist torestorstme Minuten Figure 5 10 Advanced Trail Table Window In the Advanced Parameters window click in the TX J2 field and enter the transmitted path trace ID string In the RX J2 Expected field enter the expected path trace ID string The RX ID field is read only For protected trails it displays the actual received pattern from both directions For non protected trails it displays the actual received pattern from one direction For Hold off Time use the arrow buttons to set the delay period between fault detection and path switching The value can be from 0 to 10 seconds The default is O seconds For Oscillation Guard Time use the arrow buttons to set t
15. 6 22 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Alarm Log File Messages Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action 2 Ifthe Temperature alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU FAN OK Temperature There was a fault in one of the IDU venting fans but the problem no longer exists IDU LOOPBACK IS ACTIVE Maintenance To correct If not in maintenance test terminate the loopback from the CeraView Loopback window IDU NO LOCAL Maintenance None normal operation LOOPBACK IDU REMOTE Maintenance The remote IDU is now in loopback mode LOOPBACK To correct If not in maintenance test terminate the loopback from the CeraView Loopback window IDU NO REMOTE LOOPBACK Maintenance The remote IDU is running normally after being in Loopback mode IDU LINE LOOPBACK Maintenance To correct If not in maintenance test terminate loopback from the CeraView Loopback window IDU NO LINE Maintenance None normal operation LOOPBACK IDU REMOTE System Fault Communication between the local and COMMUNICATION FAULT remote terminals was disconnected data may still be exchanged with BER To correct 1 Check cable 2 Ifthe System Fault alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU REMOTE System Fault Communication between the local and COMMUNICATION OK remote terminals returned to normal IDU ODU
16. Alignment Verification checking actual receive level When pivoting the antenna 2 in azimuth and elevation during antenna alignment three distinct lobes are probable the two side lobes and the center main lobe To ensure optimum system performance the center lobe of the antenna must be aligned with the center of the opposing antenna in the link The initial alignment procedure explained in the previous section allows you to align the system to the peak of a lobe However it is difficult to make sure that the system is aligned to the center lobe using the tone heard through the headset Therefore following the initial alignment procedure you must perform the final alignment verification explained below in order to make sure that the system is aligned to the center lobe by verifying that the actual received signal level corresponds to the expected receive signal level When the antenna is aligned to a side lobe the expected RSL is at least 25dB less than the calculated unfaded RSL FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 25 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU 3 26 a qi NET EFASE E TERP TEEN Wi MBL i yy w SIDE f LOBES PART ET PART B Figure 3 22 Antenna Alignment Main and Side Lobes 1 Connect a DVM Digital Voltmeter BNC adapter to the ODU 2 Set the DVM to 2 VDC 3 Turn the DVM on The reading on the DVM indicates receive signal level For example if 1 44V is displayed rec
17. Chapter 7 Protection Configuration 6 15 GHz FibeAir System Diversity Protection FibeAir s Hitless System FibeAir s Protected Hitless System consists of two FibeAir 1528 links connected via a protection cable hitless switches and a hitless cable The Hitless system allows fast switching between FibeAir units without corrupting the data delivered to the user The following illustration shows how the system is connected Hitless SC MM 1300 Signals In Cable Cable Signals Out Hitless SC MM 1300 The hitless system offers the following advantages e Maintains data integrity during severe link outages e Frrorless during switching e Supports space and frequency diversity FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 17 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500P Protection The following block diagram shows the protected hitless switch configuration components and how they interact o z _ D e Master Hitless Switch Protection Hitless m Splitter Slave Line Hitless Switch A special proprietary algorithm determines which ODU is transmitting error free data The error free data is then passed on by the master switch in the IDU to the network FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500P Protection FibeAir 1500P Protection FibeAir 1500P protected systems offer hig
18. OH Processing Payload Processing Mapper Tributary Line Interface Clock Unit Auxiliary Channels 2 8 Handles configuration and control of all functional units including trail configurations protection algorithms network management tasks performance monitoring alarms detection generation and diagnostics Performs full STM1 termination including framing and scrambling mechanisms and LOF detection Optical STM1 line interface includes support for different optical transceiver types clock recovery clock synthesis serial to parallel alignment and vice versa and LOS LOF detection Handles insertion and extraction of Section Overhead and Path Overhead bytes including PM bytes B1 B2 B3 management DCCR DCCM Media Specific APS channel bytes K1 K2 trace identifiers JO J1 user channel F1 order wire E1 synchronization status message S1 path signal label C2 path status G1 and others The module also handles AIS and RDI detection and generation Handles insertion and extraction of payload envelopes within VC4 VC3 containers AU pointers H1 H2 H3 processing generation and interpretation accommodation of phase and frequency differences between incoming and outgoing frames via pointer adjustment multi frame alignment TU pointer processing V1 V4 LOP and LOM detection and generation of all traffic control signals Maps PDH signals to VC12 VC11 VC3 virtual containers handles
19. 2 Agent Ethernet IP Mask and enter the IP mask For Serial Communication Slip PPP or Dial up Modem 8 Select 3 Serial Address and enter the serial address 9 Select 4 Serial Mask and enter the serial mask 10 Select 5 Default Gateway Router and enter the router s address 11 Select S Save amp Return to save the settings and return to the Full Configuration menu 12 Restart the IDU Configuring Serial Communication Settings direct or dial up This configuration is required when a dial up modem or a computer is connected to the IDU s serial port To configure the serial communication setings perform the following operations 1 Connect to the Terminal 2 From the Main Configuration menu select Full Configuration 3 From the Full Configuration menu select 3 Serial Configuration 4 From the Serial Configuration menu select 1 Interface Communication The Interface Configuration menu appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 7 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A E Dereon HppeiT ainka Corrarisd 1222 ABEL MESIT ES Figure 4 7 Interface Configuration Menu 5 Select 1 Interface Protocol and then select 2 PPP or 3 SLIP 6 Select 2 Interface Baud rate and then select the desired baud rate Note For a modem connection choose no more than 19 200 For a direct connection to a nearby computer choose 38 400 Make sure that the
20. FibeAir 1500AL FibeAir 1500AL a member of the FibeAir family of products is Ceragon s optical full functionality SDH ADM Add Drop Multiplexer FibeAir 1500AL supports all ADM features such as path protection and synchronization and provides two STM 1 optical aggregates and n x El or STM 1 tributary lines FibeAir 1500AL is managed by CeraView Ceragon s element manager and Poly View Ceragon s network manager Poly View provides end to end trail management for FibeAir 1500AL System Block Diagram The following figure shows the FibeAir 1500AL main modules and components Clock Seances User Chan As shown in the block diagram the FibeAir 1500AL IDU includes the following functions Controller Handles configuration and control of all functional units including trail configurations protection algorithms network management tasks performance monitoring alarms detection generation and diagnostics FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 11 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 2 12 STM1 Line Interface OH Processing Payload Processing Mapper Tributary Line Interface Clock Unit Auxiliary Channels System Block Diagram Optical STM1 line interface includes support for different optical transceiver types clock recovery clock synthesis serial to parallel alignment and vice versa and LOS LOF detection Handles insertion and extraction of Section Overhead and Path Ove
21. LoopBack Clear Timeout Time Radio a gt Eet 3 minutes Lipassed Figure 5 36 Loopback Window Loopback test types depend on the type of interface in use In the example shown above you can click the button on the right side a to select an internal IDU loopback test For each E1 line you can click the up arrow button l to select an internal tributary test or the down arrow button 1 to select an external tributary test Set the LoopBack Clear Timeout scale to the amount of time you want the test to run When a radio or line loopback test is running a pie graph displayed to the right of the timeout scale shows how much time is left for the test as shown in the figure above Click Apply to run the test When you are done with loopback testing click Close to close the window Note that closing the window will not stop the loopback test To stop a test unmark it by clicking on the relevant arrow button and then click Apply Software Reset Select Maintenance Software Reset Local or Remote to reset the IDU agent software for maintenance purposes FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 41 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Clear PM To clear the Performance Monitoring log files select Maintenance Clear PM Local or Remote Force Far End Tx Level To force the remote transmission level to the level you set for the local IDU select Maintenance Force Far End Tx Level Force Far End Mute Off To
22. MH Ar Am HH M078 eK Dake Frequency 1260 Mbt Frequency onina Ti Chara ss Tx Frequency pros Oia Pix Frequency f WH ie Loca Ory f Treier Conligueaiion fecerver Conligunation T Tx Wade C ate Set Tx Leva bo oem Mondored Tx Level E m Figure 5 10 ODU Configuration Window Set Reterence Re Level iO H MertoendAxLevt 99 aa 2 The ODU Parameters area is read only 3 For Tx Channel click the up down arrows to select the frequency channel you want to use 4 For Tx Frequency enter the frequency at which the system will transmit 5 Select the XPIC option if you want to activate the XPIC mechanism With FibeAir 1500P operating in co channel dual polarization CCDP mode using the cross polarization interference canceller XPIC algorithm two STM 1 signals can be transmitted over a single 28 MHz channel using vertical and horizontal polarization This enables double capacity in the same spectrum bandwidth Note Setting XPIC for the right shelf will effect the left shelf as well and vice versa 6 Inthe Transmitter Configuration area select Tx Mute to block transmission to the remote unit By default this option is not selected Select ATPC to activate the Automatic Transmit Power Control feature For Set Tx Level enter or select the designated signal level Possible range is 10 to max power level By default the transmit signal level is set to the maximum power level FibeAir
23. The type can be ST 3E ST 3 or Sec The status can be Unlocked which indicates that the clock source is not locked to the primary or secondary path or Out of Range which indicates that the unit cannot be synchronized with the external clock signal When this occurs an Out of Range alarm is generated To enable disable the SSM mode click the SSM Mode menu and select enable or disable Note that if the SSM mode is not enabled each network element will need to determine the clock quality on its own In the Primary Clock Parameters area for Source click the drop down list and select the clock source which can be one of the following e Internal e External 1 544 MB e Radio e Fiber e Fxternal 2MHz FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus e External 1 and half MB e Tributary 1 16 5 The Quality parameter is used to set the quality level of the clock signal Click the drop down list and select the level which can be one of the following e PRC e SSUT e SSUL e SEC e STU e DNU 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the Secondary Clock Parameters area 7 Select Clock Output Mute if you do not want the internal clock to be used to synchronize other network elements 8 Click Apply to save the settings 9 Click Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 59 Chapter 5 Operation Menus ODU 1 Select Configuration ODU or click the
24. built in Add Drop Multiplexer The built in ADM increases wireless network reliability and reduces overall network cost Using FibeAir 1500A 1528A saves the network planner a substantial cost of installing a stand alone ADM at each site where the add drop capability requirement does not exceed 32 E1s and costs for training and spare parts Until FibeAir 1500A 1528A with its fully integrated ADM was introduced by Ceragon the company provided point to point radio links throughout the world With the introduction of FibeAir 1500A 1528A Ceragon has broadened its scope to that of a wireless network solution provider offering both regenerator and integrated network ADM units tA Podo Pecmnordics FibeAir Radio Evolution ma El B a gt Pm Fi x Radio Add Drop Multipiexer me o e BE Hfi FibeAir 1500A 1528A is a one box solution for 155 Mbps multiplexed data transmission The system provides an OC 3 STM 1 wireless ring operating in the 6 7 8 11 13 15 18 23 26 28 32 and 38 GHz frequency bands The unit is based on the same field proven technology as the FibeAir 1500 with the addition and improvement of ADM specific cards FibeAir 1500A 1528A supports chain and ring topologies It can be used in pure SDH wireless networks or in mixed wired and wireless networks The ability to add drop traffic in each node of the network provides network flexibility and ease of planning Ring topologies provide traffic protection witho
25. is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur Applicable for E1 interfaces only Loss of ADD Clock At the local side if Loss of ADD clock is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur Loss of DROP Clock At the local side if Loss of DROP clock is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur Trib LOS At the local side if Trib LOS is detected by the Master IDU and there is no Trib LOS at the local slave IDU protection switching will occur If however Trib LOS is detected by both the master and slave a report will be generated and sent to the current alarm destination Driver Failure Monitor At the local side if any of the tributary port transmitters is shorted protection switching will occur Applicable for T1 interfaces only Other Switch Criteria Force Switch Local When a Force Switch command is generated protection switching will occur Software Reset Upon software reset by the master IDU protection switching will occur Power Fault If a power failure is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur External Alarm 8 If external alarm 8 is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500A 1528A Traffic Protection FibeAir 1500A 1528A Traffic Protection The protection scheme for FibeAir 1500A 1528A SDH traffic is Path Pr
26. option The Properties window is displayed In the Connect Using section of the Properties window click on Direct Connection and click on the Configure push button The Configure window is displayed Select the General tab The General window is displayed Set the Maximum Speed to 19 200 Click OK The Configure window is closed Connecting to the IDU via Serial Port 3 12 Double click on the icon which was added after performing the steps detailed in Appendix A My Computer gt Dial up Networking The Connect To window appears Figure 3 4 Connect To Window Click Connect The Terminal Screen window appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Figure 3 5 Terminal Screen Window 3 Click Continue The Connected To window appears 4 Select Start gt Programs gt CeraView The CeraView Login window appears Crraticw Release LE Loge Agent Sddress horni a SNMP Community on wesc hie ee Lox _concet Figure 3 6 CeraView Login Window 5 Enter the information and click OK Mark the Save Password box if you want CeraView to remember the password you entered Note that there are two types of passwords each with a different security level for authorized activities Read Only user is permitted to perform monitoring activities only Read Write user is permitted to change system configuration and system administrator paramete
27. 1 25 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation This chapter describes the FibeAir Family system and how it operates The FibeAir design concept is based on universal radio architecture FibeAir 1500 1528 A FibeAir 1500 1528 radio link consists of two FibeAir terminals Each terminal includes three major components IDU ODU and Antenna A single cable carrying communications and DC power connects the IDU to the ODU System Block Diagram The following figure shows the FibeAir 1500 1528 main modules and components In Door Unit Out Door Unit Main Channel 155 Mbps FEC o Cable Cable MUX Bre Combiner Combiner RF T R Pirkka QAM RF Cable ni 2 Mbps i lt lt lt j Manager 4 Power Power gt ODU Module Supply Supply Control Figure 2 1 FibeAir 1500 1528 System Block Diagram FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 1 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation In Door Unit IDU In Door Unit IDU Multiplexer The IDU is a compact 17 wide 1U high unit mount compatible for both ETSI and ANSI standard racks The IDU modulates demodulates the 155 Mbps Sonet SDH payloads manages local and remote units provides I O line alarms and provides interfaces for 1 544 2 048 Mbps Wayside channel 64 Kbps User channel and 64 Kbps Order Wire channel The IDU also interfaces a Local Maintenance Terminal or Network Management Sys
28. Board configuration Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL failure Can t detect HARDWARE FAULT 8 board configuration RAISED CLEARED can t read from E2PROM Mux Board configuration Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL failure Error during HARDWARE FAULT 9 reading board RAISED CLEARED configuration CRC error Modem Board Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL configuration failure HARDWARE FAULT 10 Can t detect board RAISED CLEARED configuration can t read from E2PROM Modem Board Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL configuration failure HARDWARE FAULT 11 Error during reading RAISED CLEARED board configuration CRC error E1 T1 LOS Controlled by Minor Wayside Channel LOS on line H W Loopback on Wayside Minor INTERNAL EXTERNAL channel E1 T1 LOOPBACK ON E1 T1 n RAISED CLEARED 6 28 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages IDC Name LED Default Text Severity Fan IDC Warning IDU FAN FAILURE RAISED CLEARED IDC Configuration IDC Warning User CONFIGURATION MISMATCH in Mismatch drawer n RAISED CLEARED IDC Firmware IDC Warning Firmware configuration mismatch in configuration drawer n RAISED CLEARED mismatch IDC HW IDC Warning Hardware configuration mismatch in configuration drawer n RAISED CLEARED mismatch ODU configuration IDC Warning ODU CONFIGURATION MISMATCH in mismatch drawer n RAISED CLE
29. Chapter 5 Operation 5 108 TSL Menus The TSL Performance Monitoring window displays details about the transmitted signal level measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours 1 Select Performance Radio Left Right TSL The TSL Monitoring graphic window appears tee Let 1S oban COLLIE Pel Tempi i Seno Time aii Lan TS Hariring mal het ae amin ma i al thi oa il ai Te Bee LB ttt Tht fa Hes Le x ee Loe K TA Le x hee Le X TEH a x a E E n DAEA bi oe F3 GiH L a a OE OE BE Be Oe Be ae SeS a a al Figure 5 26 TSL Monitoring Graphic Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes The Threshold Exceeded counter at the top of the window displays the number of seconds the threshold value was exceeded during the current interval Current Min TSL values are the minimum transmitted level measured during the interval Current Max TSL values are the maximum transmitted level measured during the interval TSL Threshold is a value that you can set When a TSL value exceeds the threshold you set the Threshold Exceeded counter at the top of the PM window will register and display the number of seconds the threshold value was exceeded Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The format of the monitoring table i
30. Click Server Type and select PPP or SLIP as Dial up Server Check only TCP IP 11 Make sure that you select the serial interface that was configured in the Hyper Terminal 12 Click TCP IP Settings and specify an IP address The IP address should be on the same sub net as the serial address of the IDU 13 Select Server assigned name server addresses and uncheck the Use IP header compression and Use default gateway on remote network boxes Modem 1 Connect the modem to the serial port of the IDU and to an analog telephone line 2 Make sure that the cable for the modem has the following pin out DB9 DB25 1 20 2 2 3 3 4 8 5 7 7 5 8 4 Isolated shields 3 When using a standard modem the dip switch configuration should be set as follows Switches 3 amp 8 down Display results codes amp Smart mode FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P Setup for FibeAir 1500P The Configuration menu allows you to configure FibeAir 1500P without using the CeraView application To start CeraView see the section Getting Started at the beginning of this chapter The main menu includes the following sections Configuration 1 the main setup section in which you can configure the IDC the right and left drawers protection SNMP management in band routing and other such parameters System Status 2 used to obtain information abo
31. DLL Figure 5 31 Protection Type Window 2 Select one of the following options Protection Disabled to disable protection Internal Protection Dual Drawer to activate internal protection whereby the left drawer will function as the active primary unit and the right drawer will function as the standby secondary unit External Protection Dual Drawer to activate external protection whereby the IDU will be linked for protection purposes to another IDU When this option is used the main window will include tabs at the top showing the active and standby units G Active 192 168 1 51 38 Standby 192 168 1 52 3 Click Apply to save the settings 4 Click Close to close the window Protection Configuration 1 Select Protection Protection Configuration The Protection Configuration appears Protectan LGC LaF Figure 5 32 Protection Configration Window 5 114 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus In the Protection Switch Criteria area select the criteria that will cause a protection switch only if Off is selected for Protection Lockout In the Line Output area select either a single or dual fiber input Click Apply to save the settings Click Close to close the window Diveristy Configuration Select Protection Diversity Diversity Configuration to configure Diversity parameters if the feature was installed The Diversity Configu
32. Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus The Monitored Tx Level field read only displays the system s transmitted power level 7 In the Receiver Configuration area the Reference Rx Level field should be set to the Rx level to which the actual level will be compared The Monitored Rx Level field read only displays the received power level 8 Click Apply to save the settings 9 Click Close Multi Rate Multi Constellation This option allows you to set the modulation and bit rate of the system 1 Select Configuration ODU Left Right Multi Rate Multi Constellation The Multi Rate Multi Constellation window appears Right Multi ake Multi Cometediatioe 00001 Srian Bit Rate and Croup BRAY Configuratan STA in abou Met cass Sb ETS siandard OCSST MI in teu SOSH FOCETS chee 4 M ASTM in about SEMHz class Sb ETS siariad Poet ri inaina Jir cass 4 2x6 Tels ETE standard Figure 5 11 ODU Multi Rate Multi Constellation Window 2 Select a bit rate and an occupied bandwidth The selection you make will determine the modulation 16 128 QAM and the system will be configured accordingly 3 Click Apply Note After you apply the setting the relevant shelf will be reset 4 Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 95 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Interfaces STM1 1 Select Configuration Interfaces Left Right STM1 or click the STM1 area in the physical
33. If that side is down send it back to its origin e Ifthe packet arrived from outside the ring send it to the radio side If that side is down send it to the line side e Ifthe packet belongs to an address outside the ring send it through the Ethernet port Ceragon s FibeAir wireless system provides flexibility in In Band Management implementation The following methods can be used to implement In Band Management in the FibeAir system Transferring DCCr bytes through the radio and the network Transferring DCCr bytes through the radio but not through the network Transferring DCCr bytes through the 10BaseT wayside channel Out of Band Management Out of Band Management refers to a method whereby CeraView management signals are transmitted over Els using FCD IP D routers It is used when several Ceragon sub networks ring and chain are connected to a SONET SDH network that includes other vendor equipment which do not transparently transmit the DCCR DCCM data control channels In such cases Ceragon sub networks employ In Band Management among themselves and Out of Band Management throughout the rest of the network via FCD IP D routers Each Ceragon sub network has a 10BaseT connection to CeraView at the NOC Network Operation Center The connection uses one E1 of the transport network whereby up to 30 sub networks can be managed using a sinlgle E1 connection Management data is protected using the RIP protection meth
34. Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Getting Started Connecting to the HyperTerminal Setting Up the HyperTerminal Connection To set up the HyperTerminal connection perform the following operations 1 Connect the RS232 port of your computer to the Terminal port of the IDU 2 Select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Communication gt HyperTerminal 3 Double click the HyperTerminal application icon 4 Inthe Connection Description box enter the name Terminal and click OK 5 Inthe Connect Using field in the Phone Number box select Direct to Com 1 and click OK 6 Inthe Port Settings tab Com 1 Properties box configure the following settings Bits per second 19 200 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 Flow control Hardware 7 Click OK 8 End the HyperTerminal connection Connecting to the Terminal To connect to the terminal perform the following operations 1 Connect the RS232 port of your computer to the Terminal port of the IDU 2 Select Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt HyperTerminal 3 Double click the Terminal connection icon The HyperTerminal screen opens 4 Enter the password Ceragon and press Enter The Main Configuration Menu appears Note The Terminal screens are depicted here as black text on a white background for ease of reading The original screens are white text on black background FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 3 Chapter 4 Syste
35. It may then be removed for use in future installations FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 17 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU 2 Connect C to D at the approximate elevation needed to face the opposing ODU determined by the bolts fastened to part C Connect C to D Set angle before tightening bolts to determine elevation Tighten after desired elevation angle is set Figure 3 11 Antenna Assembly cont 3 Place the assembly constructed above C and D and U bolt E around the pole on the safety assembly attached in Step 1 and connect the two Before doing this make sure that the elevation spindle F is in hole G and loosen the screws on both sides to grant freedom of movement place around pole above safety collar B and tighten C y A slip F into hole G loosen nuts G around F Figure 3 12 Antenna Assembly cont Following step 3 the assembly should be as illustrated in the follwing figure 3 18 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Step 3 Figure 3 13 Antenna Assembly cont 4 Attach the antenna H to the antenna mount I antenna H attach antenna H attach to to mount I antenna mount I Figure 3 14 Antenna Assembly cont FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 19 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Make sure to install the anten
36. ODU Configuration icon The ODU Configuration window appears te opu E onfagues tian Oey Figure 5 12 ODU Configuration Window 2 The ODU Parameters area is read only 3 For Tx Channel click the up down arrows to select the frequency channel you want to use 4 For Tx Frequency enter the frequency at which the system will transmit In the Transmitter Configuration area select Tx Mute to block transmission to the remote unit By default this option is not selected Select ATPC to activate the Automatic Transmit Power Control feature For Set Tx Level enter or select the designated signal level Possible range is 10 to max power level By default the transmit signal level is set to the maximum power level The Monitored Tx Level field read only displays the system s transmitted power level 6 Inthe Receiver Configuration area the Reference Rx Level field should be set to the Rx level to which the actual level will be compared The Monitored Rx Level field read only displays the received power level 7 Click Apply to save the settings 8 Click Close 5 60 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Interfaces STM1 1 Select Configuration Interfaces STM1 or click the STM1 area in the physical view of the CeraView main window The STM1 Configuration window appears IST Configuration 101010169 SIMI Threshaids Regenerator Serban Trece Mentiter 0 Exesei
37. OpenView and systems in which no NMS is used It provides management functions for Ceragon s FibeAir systems at the network level and individual network element level Poly View also has its own user friendly interface called CeraMap shown in the example below alale ol a p oa eee CHEE ieee Weciretpoeges baw PolyView Management Application FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 21 Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir Family System Overview In Band Management In Band Management refers to a method whereby the network management software sends management packets through the same network it is managing This differs from out band management in which the network management software uses a different network overlay network in order to communicate with the managed elements Ceragon IDUs are capable of forwarding IP packets to Ethernet ports Serial ports SDH lines in the overhead and Radio interfaces in the overhead The general idea of In Band Management is that when a packet arrives at an IDU the software in the IDU checks the IP packet and follows one of two basic scenarios If the destination IP address of the packet is the same as the IP address of the IDU pass the packet to the IP layer for further processing Ifthe destination IP address of the packet is different than the IP address of the IDU e Ifthe packet arrived from within the ring send it to the other side
38. Performance Trail Trail Number East West The Trail Monitoring graphic window appears Trall noeatoring THAN AT Fad A J Ae 177 74 0007 aNg p irig ihe aha EERU Ona Bust E howe am a Tires red Dahi iag co err a EET ees a ERTES ihamie aiid EREET Johi 1a 1600 jiii ort ala aj a a ba fa Figure 5 27 Trail Monitoring Graphic Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above 2 To view historical UAS values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 75 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Maintenance Loopback Select Maintenance Loopback or click the Loopback icon The Loopback window appears opitack 10 10 10 161 AET EOST ii Figure 5 28 Loopback Window 2 Click the upper button on the west side Bi select an external radio loopback test Click the lower button on the west side l to select an internal radio loopback test Click the upper button on the east side l to select an external line loopback test Click the lower button on the east side Bi select an internal line loopback te
39. Q CERAGON network s FibeAir Family FibeAir 1500 1528 FibeAir 1500A 1528A FibeAir 1500S 1528S FibeAir 1500P FibeAir 1500AL With CeraView Java High amp Ultra High Capacity Wireless Network Systems Installation and Operation Manual Part ID BM 0074 7 Doc ID DOC 00006643 REV H April 2005 Notice This document contains information that is proprietary to Ceragon Networks Ltd No part of this publication may be reproduced modified or distributed without prior written authorization of Ceragon Networks Ltd This document is provided as is without warranty of any kind Registered TradeMarks Ceragon Networks is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd FibeAir is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd CeraView is a registered trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders TradeMarks CeraMap ConfigAir PolyView EncryptAir CeraMon EtherAir and MicroWave Fiber are trademarks of Ceragon Networks Ltd Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders Statement of Conditions The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Ceragon Networks Ltd shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this document or equipment
40. RSL Teesi T RSL Treeshok t ihri Ji 19 0 Ahapa Ji Hia ees ji idi Miaa 7 oo Eh r fi alalofal i Pie Oe AE JETE Be ae a aah eae ee Figure 5 24 RSL Current Monitoring Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes The Threshold Exceeded counters at the top of the window display the number of seconds threshold values were exceeded during the current interval Current Min RSL values are the minimum received level measured during the interval Current Max RSL values are the maximum received level measured during the interval Unfaded RSL is the theoretical expected RSL value not the actual value which can be calculated by the user as a function of distance frequency etc The value is used only for reference purposes RSL Threshold 1 and RSL Threshold 2 are values that you can set When an RSL value exceeds the thresholds you set the Threshold Exceeded counters at the top of the PM window will display the number of seconds the threshold values were exceeded FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The monitoring table displays RSL values over the last 24 hours The values are the same as those that appear in the graph only in table format T
41. Relees z Figure 5 1 CeraView Configuration Utility Main Window The CeraView Configuration utility is divided into the following sections e Time and Intervals e Remote Hosts e File Transfer Configuration e Advanced To open a section click on its icon on the left side of the window In each section if you want to restore default values click Restore Defaults Each section is described in the following paragraphs FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 5 Chapter 5 Operation 5 6 D Time amp Intervals Time and Intervals CeraView Configuration In the Time and Intervals section you can configure the following Short Refresh Interval Long Refresh Interval Keep Alive Interval SNMP Timeout SNMP Number of Retries Remote Hosts Remote Hosts The value seconds determines how often windows that require frequent refreshing will be refreshed The value seconds determines how often windows that do not require frequent refreshing will be refreshed The value seconds determines how often the network element will be checked for connectivity The value seconds determines the maximum time the system will wait after an SNMP command before timing out The value determines the maximum number of times a request will be made to an element after a timeout In the Remote Hosts section you can configure the following Logger Host Address Logger Port Number Security S
42. Rx frequencies 1 Select File Configuration Report The Configuration Report window appears 5 48 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus i oniliquration Report 10 10101 169 MIB heme rence Cescriphor Values m n fae pa gm a Borie i D Description Foods GOL agent recone D Conima CE 4 OU Sonwane Version Th ioiei vet oii i RM Shove Verso E E version grelsenOts Eereniber i DL Saris Humber EE g Ap Sariai 1 ODU Serial Pirmi giuagTrannaL re 1 Feet To Lewed jis piiga F regane 1 Fed Tx Freq Number E p ea F reghlanber 4 Real Rx Fea Muriber EE putin aF rogiomber i Min Ta Freq Number Eog prie igina Tara 1 Mar Tx Frangi Hianber Er ou eva 1 Mace Tx Leysi EE ecadurStehus rangni eree 1 Monsiored Ta Lees jig Deus Fieceteel evel 1 Mondos Fix Laya 39 miiu Coa Tia i Ereni mareei we level E CETE UNAL 4 CLETend ohin renet leet ae _ see come tw Figure 5 5 Configuration Report Window 2 Click Save to save the report in a file for later analysis or downloading Configuration File Upload Download This option enables you to upload a configuration file from a FibeAir unit to the management module or download a file from the management module to the FibeAir unit 1 Select File Local Remote Configuration File Upload from Element Download to Element The Upload Configuration File or Download Configuration File window appears Upas onli Bhon Pee
43. Sena tha wi s EEEN Fak Errr Modern Fo a ot cui far Line df let al Hewrtowal Period 1 irate BER fa a Sema KT Mariman FT T T Saia Taa E E e fe Agen Fees cose Hen Figure 5 17 Trap Forwarding Configuration Window 2 In the Managers IP Address area specify the IP addresses of the managers to which you want traps to be sent For each manager IP you specify specify the Trap Port and for Send Trap for Alarms with Severity select the severity filter to determine which types of alarms will be forwarded In the Send Trap for Alarms of Group section you determine which alarms will be sent as SNMP traps to each manager In each manager column select the alarm types you want to include for that manager In the Trap Options area select Standard traps include serial number if you want trap messages to include the IDU serial number Select Report local traps of far end IDU if you want remote IDU trap messages to be reported locally Select Use different ID for each alarm type if you want each type of alarm to receive a unique ID Select Send clear traps with zero severity if you want to receive information concerning clear traps For CLLI Common Language Location Identifier enter up to 18 characters that will represent your system ID when traps are sent For Heartbeat Period a heartbeat signal will be generated every x minutes the number you enter to tell your system that the trap meachnism is
44. Specifications ccccccccceesceceeeeeceaeeeeaeeseeeeeceaeeeseaeeseeeeeseaeeeeaeeeeeeessas 2 13 Chapter 3 Installation wiviisicsscisiciscciisssecscsentecsaierdvanssssdeestertearesendeausueedesseterisanbandes 3 1 Generals nraruiosi arau rae a n eaaa a aaa aapa a aan N Ad 3 1 Unpacking Equipment es aroa eei aniei a iia D ie As Aea AEE AAE A e es 3 1 Site Req irementS isein iine aiita a ai adk idaan aada Hadadi aada iiiad 3 1 Before Installing the ODU siii aaaea aa aa a aa Ea AE Eaa E AE aaaea TaS 3 2 Mediation Device Flange Specifications cesecececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeecaeeeeaaeseeneeseaeeeesaeeseneetaas 3 3 Required Components and Equipment cccccccceceecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeaaeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeeeaees 3 3 Suggested Pole Installation ccceesececeneeeeeeeeeeececeeeeecaeeeeaaeseeeeeceeeeeseaaeseeaeeseeeeesaeeeeaesseneeee 3 5 Flow of Operations a a a hs tn eo ae Pate 3 6 Installing the IDW inca S RACK uies inecedeunsed E eE A E E ba AEEA NR EERENS EEk 3 7 setting Up the IDU ness tied ee tt ae eae tet eee a ae 3 9 Installation Verification mannit iei ii aiaa ia aa aita a iaaii aah 3 29 ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHZ System ssssesseessesinesirssinssirssrnssirnsrnssrnssrnssrnssrnnsrnssrnssnnn 3 31 6 8 GHz Frequency Diversity and 2 0 System Installation cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeneeeeaees 3 39 6 8 GHz 1 1 System Installation cc cee cceeeeeeee cece ee ceaeeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeesaaeeeeeee
45. Symptoms may be constant or intermittent Constant symptoms require immediate troubleshooting attention Intermittent symptoms may require circuit monitoring or robust test procedures prior to troubleshooting Step 2 Isolate the Problem After you have a clear definition of the symptom the malfunction can be isolated using diagnostics loopback testing fault isolation tables flow charts test equipment and manual procedures This step will identify the specific piece of equipment that is failing 6 2 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Steps Although it may be difficult at times to immediately determine which part of a radio link is causing the fault the initial suspicion should be focused on one of the following near end or far end issues Power supplies Fading due to heavy rain new obstacle in path antenna misalignment External equipment SONET SDH ATM FastEthernet etc Indoor Unit IDU Outdoor Unit ODU RF cable between the ODU and IDU Exposure of equipment to severe conditions high temperature etc System configuration Step 3 Understand the Problem Once the fault has been isolated you will need to understand why the fault occurred and what is required to correct it Use the tables provided in the following sections to understand the problem and for suggestions of possible solutions Step 4 Solve the Problem You can use the troubleshooting informat
46. System Fault Communication between the IDU and ODU COMMUNICATION FAULT was disconnected channel data may still be exchanged without BER To correct If the System Fault alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU ODU COMMUNICATION OK System Fault Communications between the IDU and ODU returned to normal FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 23 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6 24 Alarm Log File Messages Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action IDU MUX COMMUNICATION FAULT System Fault Internal IDU failure IDU may require corrective maintenance Main channel data may still be exchanged but loopbacks may not be possible To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe System Fault alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU MUX COMMUNICATION OK System Fault Previous alarm is cleared FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages The following tables list traps issued to the network management and alarm messages that may appear in the FibeAir 1500P alarm log file FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages ODU Name LED Default Text Severity Power Supply ODU Major ODU 5 8 12 12V POWER SUPPLY FAILURE RAISED CLEARED Synthesizer lock ODU Major SYNTHESIZER 1 2 3 UNLOCKED RAISED CLEARED TX out
47. System Setup 7 8 Post Setup Procedure Select Send clear traps with zero severity if you want a trap with a clear severity instead of the alarm s original severity to be sent to the IP addresses you specified For CLLI Common Language Location Identifier enter up to 18 characters that will represent your system ID when traps are sent For Heartbeat Period a heartbeat signal will be generated every x minutes the number you enter to tell your system that the trap meachnism is working Click Apply to save the settings Click Close External Alarms Setup The procedure detailed in this section is required only if alarms generated by external equipment are connected to the IDU or if the IDU alarm outputs are connected to other equipment using the alarms I O connector 1 Select Configuration Local Remote IDU External Alarms or click the Local Remote External Alarms icon The Local Remote Input Output External Alarms window appears faa Local Input Datput Enternal Aarma ioia iniy AmE Erbera Adam igras Aisi ips Aih Enable Tesi Seveny Fein Tipt i p Premam fo l 1 oe 3 po oes Fm E gt e 3 E Erem aeaa Finmag 3 we 4 p Pema ura l eng a 3 ff Fuemaams frie y s E Hj amp fF Pores fea al 7 P Pma je y e p Foma go Fa a a a Hoe J Figure 4 36 Local Input Output External Alarms Window 4 30 Follow the steps below for both the Local and Remote sides Th
48. TU pointers V1 V4 generation and interpretation and TU Overhead V5 J2 N2 K4 termination and processing Handles PDH line termination clock and data recovery decoding encoding and line performance monitoring ADM synchronization module with very accurate internal source clock The module receives different clock sources and re synchronizes network elements It also performs tasks required by hitless switching holdover function jitter and wander attenuation and others User Channel 64 Kbps RS 232 data channel and Order Wire 64 Kbps audio channel FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation FibeAir 1500P FibeAir 1500P FibeAir 1500P is designed to deliver double the capacity using a single 28 MHz channel In addition the system is modular easy to install and a cost effective alternative to fiber With FibeAir 1500P operating in co channel dual polarization CCDP mode using the cross polarization interference canceller XPIC algorithm two STM 1 signals can be transmitted over a single 28 MHz channel using vertical and horizontal polarization This enables double capacity in the same spectrum bandwidth By adding an additional Indoor Unit and two Outdoor Units the FibeAir 1500P SDH ring can be upgraded to transmit at 311 Mbps Since the existing units support the co channel dual polarization CCDP mode once this mode is activated the cross polarization interference
49. The Hot Standby configuration defines one unit as the active Master unit and the other as a standby Slave unit The Master transmits and receives data while the Slave only receives data A single cable connects between the two IDU protection ports and allows for negotiation and data exchange between the units Upon a failure in an active unit the Protection Switch takes effect and the standby unit becomes active Two protection configurations are available for the FibeAir 1500A 1528A the Y Splitter configuration and the H Splitter configuration Y Splitter Configuration The Y Splitter configuration is used if the FibeAir 1500A 1528A protected system is the start or end system in the communication chain The following diagram shows the FibeAir 1500A 1528A Y Splitter configuration i SE4 Cable Connection On Panel 144 Passive Unit Protection Cable Djia P z Ssa i meee peg ea E Figure 7 10 FibeAir 1500A 1528A Protected Configuration using Y Splitter FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 9 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500A 1528A System Protection The FibeAir 1500A 1528A Y Splitter configuration includes the following connection components 8 E1 Cable Four 0 5 meter cables used to connect the 8E1 IDU interface to the Connection Panel Y Splitter Used to split the optical STM 1 line input to the IDUs Note that the optical line includes two fiber lines one for
50. To correct FIFO OVERFLOW 1 Check current alarm status 2 If the Modem alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU DEMODULATOR Modem None normal operation FIFO OK IDU DEMODULATOR Modem To correct PEREALCURE 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Modem alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU DEMODULATOR Modem None normal operation PLL OK IDU DEMODULATOR Modem To correct TIMING LOOP FAILURE 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Modem alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU DEMODULATOR Modem None TIMING LOOP OK IDU DEMODULATOR Modem To correct PRASE LOOPFAILJIRE 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Modem alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU DEMODULATOR Modem None PHASE LOOP OK IDU DEMODULATOR Modem To correct SYMBOL ESTIMATE ERROR 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Modem alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU DEMODULATOR Modem None SYMBOL ESTIMATE OK IDU EXTREME Temperature IDU temperature is either above 50C TEMPERATURE 122 F CONDITIONS To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Temperature alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU NORMAL Temperature IDU temperature was restored to normal TEMPERATURE condition T gt 47 C 116 F CONDITIONS IDU FAN FAILURE Temperature There is a fault in one of the IDU venting fans To correct 1 Check current alarm status
51. Uncheck all options except TCP IP Check Use the following IP Insert IP Address the same subnet as the Indoor Click OK Click OK FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual A 7 Appendix B Connector Pin Outs e Alarm I O Connector for FibeAir 1500 1528 e External Alarms Connector for FibeAir 1500P e Protection Connector for FibeAir 1500P e 8x EI T1 Connector for FibeAir 1500P e User Channel Cable e Modem PPP Cross Cable e Protected System Cables FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A e 8xDS1 100 ohm amp 8xE1 120 ohm Cable e RJ 45 10 Pin Connector for Hitless Systems e Wayside Channel Connectors FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Connector Pin Outs Alarm I O Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500 1528 Alarm I O Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500 1528 Pin Signal Name Signal Description 1 EXT IN1 Input 1 normally open 2 EXT IN3 Input 3 normally open 3 EXT IN5 Input 5 normally open 4 EXT IN7 Input 7 normally open 5 RELAY 1NC Relay Output 1 normally closed contact 6 RELAY 1C Relay Output 1 common contact de RELAY 2NO Relay Output 2 normally open contact 8 RELAY 3NC Relay Output 3 normally closed contact 9 RELAY 3C Relay Output 3 common contact 10 RELAY 4NO Relay Output 4 normally open contact 11 RELAY 5NC Relay Output 5 normally closed contact 12 RELAY 5C Relay Output 5 common c
52. Unit ODU The ODU consists of high sensitivity RF circuitry with half band tuning range for most frequencies An independent controller controls the ODU and its functions and communicates with the IDU This controller provides the IDU precise received levels in dBm and other indications The ODU which is adjacent to the antenna is enclosed in a compact weather proof enclosure and connects to the IDU via a single coaxial cable of up to 300 m 1000 ft ODU major functions Interface between antenna and IDU reception transmission of microwave signals Power transmission control Antenna The high performance antenna is available in the following lengths 1 30 cm 2 60 cm 3 90 cm 4 120 cm or 6 180 cm For low frequencies 6 11 GHz other antenna sizes 8 15 ft are available CeraView Management Application The system is managed either remotely or locally by CeraView Ceragon s SNMP based software running on either Windows 98 2000 NT or UNIX platform with user friendly graphical user interface Ceragon NMS functions are in accordance with ITU T recommendations for TMN 1 20 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir Family System Overview CeraView Management Application PolyView Management Application Poly View is Ceragon s powerful yet user friendly NMS Network Management System that integrates with other NMS platforms currently HP
53. When you are done with loopback testing click Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 143 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Note that closing the window will not stop the loopback test To stop a test unmark it by clicking on the relevant arrow button and then click Apply Software Reset Select Maintenance Software Reset to reset the IDU agent software for maintenance purposes Clear PM Select this item to clear the Performance Monitoring log files 5 144 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Protection Menus 1 1 Protection 1 4 5 Copy Configuration Select Protection 1 1 Protection Protection Configuration to configure the radio protection switch mechanism The Radio Protection configuration window appears Ft Protection 1010 10 46 ss il F Protection Datch Criteria F Line Loe F Exotiaive BEF Alarm E Biemna Alen ei Line uimit i ing Dus amiy Remesn cose Hep Figure 5 23 Radio Protection Configuration Window In the Protection Switch Criteria area select the criteria for which you want protection switching to occur For Line Output select either Single or Dual Click Apply to save the changes Click Close to close the window Select Protection 1 1 Protection Commands Copy Configuration to Mate to copy the configuration of one unit to the other After you select this option click Yes in the confirmati
54. and in the management station configuration If ping fails there may be a network connectivity problem A typical conflict may occur between the IDU configuration shown in the terminal window below and the related CeraView parameter According to the example below the user needs to enter netman in the Write Community field FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 13 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Connection Configuration Troubleshooting Guide meo a lamens De pa s pl paie jie 0 3 c Figure 6 6 Typical Configuration Conflict In addition the Agent Address must be identical to the IDU IP address and the source address must be identical to the computer s address The following figure shows a typical example of IP addresses and network configuration C Management station 192 114 35 11 O eiia Workstation re D IP address Default Router 192 114 35 12 192 114 35 1 z Serial Line 00000000000000 z Default Router SS 00000000000000 a Til aS IP address FibeAir1500 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 1 meret IBM Compatible Remote host 194 12 78 11 Figure 6 7 Typical Network Configuration 6 14 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Connection Configuration Troubleshooting Gui
55. asynchronous mapping of 34 45 Mbit s 044 asynchronous mapping of 34 45 Mbit s or O14 equipped non specific 00 unequipped 00 unequipped The Trail Table maps the VCs Virtual Containers representing the E1 lines Using this table you can set several parameters for each line such as the path name and protected configuration 1 Select Configuration IDU Trail or click the Trail Configuration icon The Trail Configuration window appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus areal Goan comes asl oad Figure 5 8 Trail Table Window The table lists up to 8 E1 tributary lines The VC map section of the table displays 63 VCs entire STM 1 capacity and the status of each represented by different colors Gray represents an unused VC Green represents a VC used by an E1 trail and blue represents a VC designated as pass through passes the relay frame as is Note that VC 3 trails can only be configured as pass through 2 For each trail select or deselect the Enable Port box Deselecting the box will block all traffic on that E1 T1 line 3 Inthe Name column click in the text box and enter the name you want for that E1 T1 line 4 Inthe Main Path column click in the box and select either east or west for the main path 5 The VC and K L M columns are read only The values in those colum
56. cable problem DISCONNECT Repl Hitl ble RAISED eplace Hitless cable HITLESS CABLE SYSTEM ALARM Hitless cable is OK PROBLEM CLEARED FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 33 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500 1528 Protection The FibeAir 1500 1528 Hot Standby 1 1 protection configuration is designed to ensure data link robustness and survivability in case of hardware or software failures and to enable maintenance and repair operations without affecting the live traffic Fast hardware based switching 50 ms allows fast recovery from failures and minimizes the link downtime due to equipment failure ia m eae Using the same hardware for the main and the back up links minimizes inventory y costs and simplifies equipment and operation flexibility Main Channels gt 4 Wayside Channel User Channel k Sk T T oo a Figure 7 1 Hot Standby Protection Physical Configuration The Hot Standby configuration defines one unit on each side of the link as the active Master unit and the other as a standby Slave unit The Master transmits and receives data but the Slave only receives data A single cable connects between the two IDU s protection ports and allows for negotiation and data exchange between the units Upon a failure in an active unit or a command from the remote side the Protection Switch comes into effect and the s
57. cancel the muting of the remote ODU select Maintenance Force Far End Mute Off Protection 1 1 Protection 1 Select Protection Local Remote 1 1 Protection Protection Configuration to configure the 1 1 protection switch mechanism The 1 1 Protection window appears Local 1 1 Protechion ceragong2 ME EG Protection Seen Cries Fadig Lire Lor fF Gocessve BER Alarm fF Etema Aam m bine Duim i Sinaia f Dus ee n coe Figure 5 37 Radio Protection Configuration Window 2 In the Protection Switch Criteria area select the criteria for which you want protection switching to occur 3 For Line Output select either Single or Dual 4 Click Apply to save the changes Click Close to close the window Request Protection Switch Select Protection Local Remote Commands Request Switch if you want to change between the Primary and Secondary links in a 1 1 system 5 42 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Diversity Configuration 1 Select Protection Local Remote Diversity Diversity Configuration to configure Diversity parameters if the feature was installed The Diversity Configuration window appears Laural Diversily Configuration fe iie a he F Enabled Diversity Typa f Space Frenuency Reva F Enebied Hokioni tme 3 Seconds Figure 5 38 Diversity Configuration Window 2 For systems in which the Hitless feature was
58. canceller XPIC allows two STM 1 signals 311 Mbps to be transmitted over the existing single 28 MHz channel In this system both horizontal and vertical polarizations are used simultaneously transmitting a 155 Mbps signal to provide 311 Mbps throughput The XPIC feature ensures an error free connection despite conditions such as rain 28 MHz W Dual Polarization System Block Diagram STM1 2 Daughter Board The following figure shows the FibeAir 1500P main modules and components IDC Drawer uueg p o a E g I 2 S a 38u43 LED interface module XPIC mode I synchronization cable IDC WSC Fans Module 5 3 3 v 481V gt Power Supply M Carrier A STM1 2 Daughter Board To IF channel Modem Board Channel A IF board Channel A mZ gt rvxAO gt D To IF channel1 Modem Board Channel B IF board Channel B 5 3 3 v 48 V Power Supply Carrier Drawers A amp B FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 9 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation System Block Diagram 2 10 As shown in the block diagram the FibeAir 1500P IDU includes the following sections and
59. click Download After the file is uploaded downloaded changes will take place only after the unit is reset AKS Advanced Encryption Standard 5 90 When FibeAir 1500P is configured with encryption data received from the line interface plain text is coded and sent via the radio The remote site will receive the data in its coded form decode it back to plain text and then send it on through the line to the user The encryption process used is the AES Advanced Encryption Standard which specifies a FIPS approved cryptographic algorithm that can be used to protect electronic data The AES algorithm is a symmetric block cipher that can encrypt encipher and decrypt decipher information The user can select the encryption module s mode of operation which may be either Automatic or Manual Manual refers to the manual loading of the Master Key and Automatic refers to the automatic loading of the Master Key To view AES information 1 Select File AES Left Right The AES window appears Figure 5 9 AES Information Window 2 If AES Advanced Encryption Standard is configured for your system this window displays the AES state and mode of operation Both the state and mode are configured via the terminal setup FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus New Session Select this item to log in for a new CeraView session The new session will appear in addition to the current se
60. cm Minimum Pipe 50 mm 65 mm 115 mm 115 mm 115 mm 115 mm Diameter Wind Velocity 200 km h 200 km h 200 km h 200 km h 200 km h 200 km h Fat max N 303 929 2821 6348 11284 17632 Fst max N 150 460 1398 2830 5590 3734 Mr max Nm 47 283 894 2000 4901 8630 After determining the pole size verify that you have the required bolt for the antenna mount as shown in the following table Pipe Diameter mm Bolt size mm 90 115 115 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 5 Chapter 3 Installation Flow of Operations Flow of Operations 3 6 The installation and setup procedure for FibeAir consists of the following operations to be performed in the order listed below CeraView Management Software Installing the Management Software For Ethernet Connection Configuring the PC s IP Address and Mask For Serial Connection Installing PPP SLIP Drivers Win98 and NT and Configuring the Dialer ODU and Antenna Installing the ODU and Antenna Initial Antenna Alignment IDU Installing and Connecting the IDU Turning the IDU on Connecting to the IDU using the Local Craft Terminal Configuring the IP Address and Mask to the IDU Setting Tx and Rx Frequencies Setting Tx Power Link Commissioning Antenna Alignment Checking the Receive Signal Level Connecting to the IDU using the Local Craft Terminal Management Software via Ethernet or Serial Commissioning of Link FibeAir Family Installation and Oper
61. configured select Enabled to activate the feature 3 For systems in which the Hitless feature was configured in the Diversity Type area select either Space or Frequency diversity 4 For Revertive select Enabled if you want normal traffic on the protection path to be switched back to the original path after it recovers from a fault Revertive mode may be required to support specific services whereby the shortest physical route offers better performance If you don t select Revertive no switching to the original fault cleared path will be performed to prevent unnecessary traffic hits and management event reports 5 Ifyou selected Enabled for Hold off Time use the arrow buttons to set the delay period between fault detection and path switching The value can be from 0 to 10 seconds The default is 0 seconds Click Apply to save the settings Click Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 43 Chapter 5 Operation CeraView for FibeAir 1500A 1528A CeraView for FibeAir 1500A 1528A Main Window Title Bar Menu Bar 5 44 The following sections describe the CeraView application for FibeAir 1500A 1528A For information about system requirements and the CeraView installation procedure see the section General at the beginning of this chapter For information about the CeraView Configuration utility see the section CeraView Configuration at the beginning of this chapter For i
62. current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above 5 110 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Maintenance Loopback L R 1 Select Maintenance Loopback Left Right or click the Left Right a S Loopback icon The Loopback window appears aien Loopback 10 00 02 05 Figure 5 29 Loopback Window 2 Click the upper button on the west side Bi select an external radio loopback test Click the lower button on the west side F to select an internal radio loopback test Click the button on the east side al to select an external line loopback test 3 Set the LoopBack Clear Timeout scale to the amount of time you want the test to run When a radio or line loopback test is running a pie display above the timeout scale shows how much time is left for the test see the figure above 4 Click Apply to run the test When you are done with loopback testing click Close to close the window Note that closing the window will not stop the loopback test To stop a test unmark
63. fiez 4 roe ee finn 2 fio 10 1083 2 fisa 4 Preet aa FT fT z Cabia EE FT fs hogs ete e Poe ere apogi m fica z Bisi FECT iio 1 a edie r r g j kojen Frrr Tr opaan Line EJEN Shendied irea kohai sare number SDH fr Tr E Lee aitferent trap iD tor ach ale BER TULF y i Bigs tee FO T Sana haps vih etende alarm irfornaion Stendord Traps E F F i Seiect All EEEE l r With ariy 7 H iittaal Pariza 7 H wenes Se Everi FFEF A PRP PF mrar FEFE Maan FFE F Dika FIREA Select Al EPP Figure 4 35 Trap Forwarding Configuration Window 2 In the Managers IP Address area specify the IP addresses of the managers to which you want traps to be sent For each manager IP you specify specify the Trap Port and for Send Trap for Alarms with Severity select the severity filter to determine which types of alarms will be forwarded 3 Inthe Send Trap for Alarms of Group section you determine which alarms will be sent as SNMP traps to each manager In each manager column select the alarm types you want to include for that manager 4 Inthe Trap Options area select Standard traps include serial number if you want trap messages to include the IDU serial number Select Report local traps of far end IDU if you want remote IDU trap messages to be reported locally Select Use different ID for each alarm type if you want each type of alarm to receive a unique ID FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 29 Chapter 4
64. following information Time The time the alarm was triggered Date The date the alarm was triggered Severity The severity of the alarm You can determine which severity levels will be displayed in the window by selecting the levels at the top of the window Origin The shelf containing the unit that generated the alarm Description A description of the alarm and its status RAISED CLEARED Note You can click on a column title to sort the information in the table accordingly To clear the alarm list in the window click Clear Log To save the current alarm list in a file click Save Continuous Alarm Logging To save alarms in a continuous logging file select Alarms Start Saving Log In the Choose Alarm Log File window that appears select the file you want to save the alarms to and click Save Alarms will be added to the file you selected until you select Stop Saving Log or exit the application If you exit CeraView and the log file is still active you will be notified FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 105 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Performance Menu 5 106 Radio RSL The RSL Performance Monitoring window displays received signal level values measured over the past 24 hours 1 Select Performance Radio Left Right RSL The RSL Monitoring graphic window appears mong IRON Trenes fie sodit Tee fier DW al Iu mu wa Thig u Kho Lo LETH iW Bra Maer Mo essea
65. implemented in hardware to minimize additional end to end delay CKEP Ceragon Key Exchange Protocol CKEK Ceragon Key Encryption Key CESM Ceragon Encryption Synchronization Mechanism FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction EncryptAirTM Ceragon Encryption Automatic Key Management Integrated in the FibeAir 1U IDU the EncryptAir algorithm is completely transparent to the operator functioning automatically without the need for manual key loading or replacement Encryption can be disabled enabled via the CeraView management application Keys are the most important part of the encryption algorithm Knowing the correct key enables the decryption of encrypted information Not knowing the key makes it impossible to decrypt the data Since there are more than 70 000 000 000 000 000 seventy quadrillion possible keys the possibility of discovering a particular key is extremely unlikely when typical eavesdropping techniques are used If the key is changed frequently the risk of its discovery is diminished even further Unique Ceragon protocols were designed to generate secret keys and keep them safe and un discoverable The EncryptAir algorithm consists of random key generation frequent key replacement and a unique set of keys for each link for operation in a dense wireless environment The key consists of 64 binary digits Os or 1s whereby 56 bits are used directly by the encryption algorithm and
66. it The following screen appears for IDC Status gemma gpm eee anita xi Eie Edi View Cal Tisia Hel olaj ais oel a Erat 0 Rabe Dersi i AHi Soo Bea T Hiii Figure 4 16 IDC Status FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P The following screen appears for Drawer Status tite Hyped T pamises algi Eis Got ee Dai imie tjui Die iS SS or hae Te ee bra Drawer Haia Pbewbe Quit tirar Deeb Connected MAZ EE antog Figure 4 17 Drawer Status 3 Select the number beside the information you want to view The following screen is an example of an IDC Inventory status report ite Ape Temna e e almi Eis E Wew Dal Jrorciei Hein Die alg alt ee Hii Aani Hitat rEG Main Eeac 31 0 leweatery PER UWIER be FIBEAIE CERADDH HETWORKE LTD 72 168 4 iZi IE Inventors Tuit I I nunbar nunbar mant Connected iil 7 WAI Tk Figure 4 18 IDC Inventory Status Example FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 19 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P Maintenance To perform maintenance operations 1 Inthe main menu shown in the section Getting Started at the beginning of this chapter select 3 Maintenance The Maintenance menu appears Hain Ben Padcenanaes EUFER SEER Late ape FIBEWDH CERNGOM METI 192 168 0124 Aa Lntanameoe Quis 1 Dt tLaft Drawer hight Dpauer bolecti Con
67. means of checking radio optical connections whenever changes are made The path trace ID can be determined by the user for VC 12 trails in each direction receive transmit separately The user can also display the actual received pattern for maintenance purposes The incoming string is checked against the expected receive string A discrepancy between the strings generates a TIM alarm or an AIS depending on what you decide for Path TIM activation If the trail is protected and you selected the AIS option a switch to the protection path will be performed in the event of TIM since AIS is one of the criteria for switching to protection Explanation of PLM Events The SDH path overhead includes signal label information that indicates the composition of the signal For FibeAir1500A 1528A the signal labels are automatically set according to the traffic on off status as defined in the table below If the received signal label is not as expected a PLM alarm is generated FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 127 Chapter 5 Operation 5 128 Trail fod Signal Label Data Menus VC Level Value Traffic On Traffic Off VC 12 bits 5 7 of V5 Transmit Value Expected Receive Value 010 asynchronous floating 010 asynchronous floating or 001 equipped non specific 000 unequipped 000 unequipped VC 3 C2 byte Transmit Value Expected Receive Value 044
68. routing or connections of your 155 52 Mb s streams Or Change the JO trace message in the equipment transmitting to the FibeAir unit to the JO trace message expected by the unit or Change the FibeAir expected JO trace message to match its received trace message or Disable the Section Trace function of the FibeAir unit set JO Operation to Passthrough in the SDH SONET Configuration window LINE and SIG LEDs 1 Interoperability Try bypassing the FibeAir unit or running the are green but problem loopbacks to locate the source of the problem equipment or connected to FibeAir l e Try disabling the FibeAir SONET SDH features is malfunctioning set Operation to Passthrough mode in the SDH SONET Configuration window Or Consult the documentation provided with the other equipment 2 The fault may be Try bypassing the FibeAir unit or running the caused by the loopbacks to locate the source of the problem other equipment or Consult the documentation provided with the other equipment 6 10 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Fault Isolation Using Loopbacks Fault Isolation Using Loopbacks The loopback function provides a means of testing the link at various points During the procedure the external equipment sends a data pattern and monitors its receipt If the received pattern is identical to the sent pattern the connection between the eq
69. set the quality level of the clock signal Click the drop down list and select the level which can be one of the following e PRC e SSUT e SSUL e SEC e STU e DNU 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the Secondary Clock Parameters area 7 Select Clock Output Mute if you do not want the internal clock to be used to synchronize other network elements 8 Click Apply to save the settings 9 Click Close to close the window Line 1 Direction Used this option to set the direction for Line 1 1 Select Configuration IDU Line 1 Direction The Line 1 Direction window appears Line 21 Direction aj zj Lins Pi Direction fF veer O Bae Figure 5 10 Line 1 Direction Configuration Window 2 Choose the direction you want for the line and click Apply FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 131 Chapter 5 Operation 5 132 Interfaces STM1 1 Menus Select Configuration Interfaces STM1 or click the STM1 area in the physical view of the CeraView main window The STM1 Configuration window appears SI Confiqgarabon 10 00 007 Eutessvecro feoi E EET Signal Degrade fe F T BER Ba Error Rote fet e EEEE Figure 5 11 STM1 Interface Configuration Window 2 a In the STM1 field select Enabled to activate the interface In the Excessive Error field select the level above which an Excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link In the Signa
70. supplied with it Information to User Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the user s authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment Copyright 2005 by Ceragon Networks Ltd All rights reserved O Corporate Headquarters Ceragon Networks Ltd 24 Raoul Wallenberg St Tel Aviv 69719 Israel Tel 972 3 645 5733 Fax 972 3 645 5499 Email info ceragon com ERAGON ne ork s www ceragon com North American Headquarters Ceragon Networks Inc 10 Forest Avenue Paramus NJ 07652 USA Tel 1 201 845 6955 Toll Free 1 877 FIBEAIR Fax 1 201 845 5665 Email infous ceragon com European Headquarters Ceragon Networks UK Ltd 4 Oak Tree Park Burnt Meadow Road North Moons Moat Redditch Worcestershire B98 9NZ UK Tel 44 0 1527 591900 Fax 44 0 1527 591903 Email infoeuro ceragon com APAC Headquarters Ceragon Networks HK Ltd Singapore RO Level 34 Centennial Tower 3 Temasek Avenue Singapore 039190 Tel 65 6549 7886 Fax 65 6549 7011 Safety Precautions The following safety precautions should be observed when working with fiber optic lines A A A gt gt gt Before turning on the equipment make sure that the fiber optic cable is intact and is connected to the transmitter Do not attempt to adjust the laser drive current Do not use broken or unterminated fiber optic cables conn
71. the remaining 8 bits are used for error detection parity Encryption Performance The encryption algorithm and protocols were designed to overcome BER and fades enabling smooth operation over the wireless channel EncryptAir maintains the following system parameters Effective bandwidth Throughput payload rate Delay BER performance System threshold operation distance Supported Products EncryptAir is available upon request in the following FibeAir Family products FibeAir 1500 1528 3100 6200 SDH SONET IP and ATM traffic All frequencies ETSI FCC Supported Standards Federal Information Processing Standards Publications FIPS PUB 46 3 Compatible DES NIST DES compliant certification 152 as published in http csre nist gov cryptval des desval html FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 17 Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir 1500AL FibeAir 1500AL Features Applications FibeAir 1500AL is an optical full functionality SDH ADM Add Drop Multiplexer It supports all ADM features such as path protection and synchronization and provides two STM 1 optical aggregates and n x El or STM 1 tributary lines FibeAir 1500AL supports chain and ring topologies It can be used in pure SDH wireless networks or in mixed wired and wireless networks The ability to add drop traffic in each node of the network provides network flexibility and ease of planning Ring topologies provide
72. the XPIC mechanism The mechanism is used to cancel cross polar interference in a dual polarization system 5 Select the Local Only option By default the Local Remote option is selected However since there is no connection to the remote unit at this time the Local Remote option is not available 6 Click Apply to save the settings 7 Click Close 3 14 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Exiting CeraView 1 In the Main window select File gt Exit to exit the Management software 2 Turn off the IDU The following sections describe the installation procedures for 1 foot and 2 foot antennas which are the most frequently used For procedures on installing other antennas see the Antenna Information appendix Installing the Antenna This section details the 1 ft RFS antenna assembly For other antenna sizes and manufacturers please refer to the antenna assembly instructions provided with each antenna shipped from Ceragon For site requirements and pole installation see the beginning of this chapter General The following figure shows a one foot antenna mounted on a pole Figure 3 8 A Mounted One Foot Antenna FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 15 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Installation Instructions installation instruction Ceragon Networks disclaims any responsibility for It is important to mount the antenna exactly
73. the window 5 68 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Alarm Log 1 Select Alarms Alarm Log or click the Alarm Log icon The Alarm Log window appears fe Alarm Log 10000169 i NOU POWER Gv FAL CLEARED OU POWER 5 FAL CLEARED amp ADU POWER 3 Sy FAL CLEARED jou POWER 54 FAIL CLEARED DU REMOTE COMMUNICATION FAL RAGED OU POWER By FAL CLEARED IDL POWER Se FAL CLEARED IW POWER 3 3v FAM CLEARED __ OU POWER v FAIL CLEARED fi7 Au00 00 17 Aug 03 0541 09 A RDU REMOTE COMMUNICATION FAL RASED a IDU POWER a FAL CLEARED i IDU POWER 5 FAL CLEARED CU POWER 3 3 FAL CLEARED ete IDO POMER 5y FAIL CLEARED CE el see a Figure 5 21 Alarm Log Window The Alarm Log window displays the following information Time The time the alarm was triggered Date The date the alarm was triggered Severity The severity of the alarm You can determine which severity levels will be displayed in the window by selecting the levels at the top of the window Description A description of the alarm and its status RAISED CLEARED To clear the log file click Clear Log To save the log report in the window click Save To close the window click Close Save Alarms to File To save current alarms to a file select Alarms Start Saving Log In the Choose Alarm Log File window that appears select the file you want to save the alarms to and click Save FibeAir Famil
74. this chapter Unpacking Equipment FibeAir is shipped in 5 crates Upon delivery make sure that the following items are included Two indoor units and accessories Two outdoor units Two antennas and pole mounts One CD with CeraView management software if ordered and the User Manual Unpack the contents and check for damaged or missing parts Should there be any parts that are damaged or missing contact your local distributor Site Requirements The first and most important consideration when choosing a prospective site for the ODU is that the point can provide an acceptable line of sight with the opposing ODU A site with a clear unobstructed view is required When considering a site it is important to check for current and future obstacles Possible future obstacles are trees new buildings window cleaners on the roof snow that may accumulate in front of the antenna etc The site should be accessible to certified personnel only As with any type of construction a local permit may be required before installing an antenna It is the owner s responsibility to obtain any and all permits FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 1 Chapter 3 Installation Before Installing the ODU Additional Requirements for North America Restricted Access Area DC powered equipment should only be installed in a Restricted Access Area Installation Codes The equipment must be installed according to country national
75. to configure the radio protection switch mechanism The Radio Protection configuration window appears W Radio Protection 10101016 MEE Figure 5 29 Radio Protection Configuration Window 2 In the Protection Switch Criteria area select the criteria for which you want protection switching to occur 3 For Line Output select either Single or Dual 4 Click Apply to save the changes Click Close to close the window Force Radio Protection Switch Select Protection Radio Force Switch if you want to change between the Primary and Secondary links in a 1 1 system Trail Protection 1 Select Protection Trail to activate the protected path mechanism for the desired ports The Trail Protection window appears 5 78 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus lead Peete A ees AFERAN Figure 5 31 Trail Protection Window for E1 Tributaries In the Protection Switch Criteria area select Switch on Low Path Excessive BER E1 tributaries window only if you want the data to be delivered in the opposite direction when the BER threshold level is exceeded Select Revertive if you want normal traffic on the protection path to be switched back to the original path after it is recovered from a fault Revertive mode may be required to support specific services whereby the shortest physical route offers better performance For example for synchronization of another network using protecte
76. to prevent unnecessary traffic hits and management event reports Traffic Protection Parameters General traffic protection parameters for FibeAir 1500A 1528A include the following Holdoff Period The delay between fault detection and subsequent switching The purpose of this timer is to ensure that protection switching is not overly sensitive to transient variations in signal quality Wait To Restore Time Revertive mode only A fixed period of time between switching to the protection path and back to the main path During this time no switching will occur Oscillation Guard Time A period of time the inactive channel must be free of faults before it can carry traffic FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 15 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration 6 15 GHz FibeAir System Diversity Protection 6 15 GHz FibeAir System Diversity Protection 6 15 GHz systems are affected more by multipath propagation and less by rain than higher frequencies There are two primary types of multipath impairments flat fading and selective fading Flat fading occurs when the entire spectrum of a channel is attenuated Selective fading occurs when notches appear in the channel s spectrum Protecting 6 15 GHz systems from the impairments mentioned above requires diversity and a proper digital equalizer One of the following methods can be used for diversity e Space diversity e Frequency diversity e A combination of space and frequency div
77. via flexible waveguide to the ODU B1 diplexer e Remote connection via flexible waveguide to the antenna Important e The circulator port connected directly to the ODU diplexer ODU A1 in the figure above must also be connected to the corresponding ODU on the remote side which would be for our example A2 e The diplexer connected directly to the circulator must output directly to the antenna in accordance with the arrow symbols that appear on the circulator 3 40 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation 6 8 GHz Frequency Diversity and 2 0 System Installation The following diagram shows two ODUs connected to a single antenna via a circulator FLEXIBLE _ SIRCULATOR WAVEGUIDE The following diagram shows two ODUs connected to a single antenna via two circulators whereby one circulator includes a Short for future system expansion FLEXPSLE WAVEGUIDE oe SHORT OPTION FOR FUTURE EXPANSION FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 41 Chapter 3 Installation 6 8 GHz Frequency Diversity and 2 0 System Installation The following diagram shows three ODUs connected to a single antenna via three circulators whereby one circulator includes a Short for future system expansion ANTENA CIRCULATOR FOR FUTURE xPANSION EXTERNAL DIFLEXER DU Upgrading a Link to Frequency Diversity 2 0 The following sections describe frequency di
78. view of the CeraView main window STM1 Interface Configuration Window ieit THI Confiqueatien icin Ble Errenga Error teat z J Operston Siya geal Cei eii fie 06 PP e a BER Bi Error Pinte lett 5 Foe Stu Woie Transritted J mecan 3120 3 Emecitd i FEEAR ELF E Bend AS on RE TM Figure 5 12 STM1 Interface Configuration Window 2 x STM Interface Configuration Window sgh STH Conliqgarabien 10 UL swe et stn az Fiber STM Single Moe Trece kierie 00 s l Recarei Jt I Erana Tesnamited a0 FESR 1500 EmesweEmo frets Syraitegede fier BER Bi Eror inte fen D Sen WES on PES Thi eeth renean cise Hep Figure 5 13 2 x STMI Interface Configuration Window In the configuration window for 2 x STM1 each interface is configured in a separate section by clicking the tabs at the top of the window 2 Inthe Fiber STM1 Mode field select Enabled if you want the channel to be active with alarm generation If Enabled is not selected the channel will be active but no alarms will be generated 3 In the Excessive Error field select the level above which an Excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link 4 In the Signal Degrade field select the level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link 5 The BER field shows the value above which a BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the ra
79. which types of alarms will be forwarded To select deselect all alarm types in a column click the Select All checkbox at the bottom of the column In the Trap Options area select Standard traps include serial number if you want trap messages to include the IDU serial number Select Report local traps of far end IDU if you want remote IDU trap messages to be reported locally Select Use different ID for each alarm type if you want each type of alarm to receive a unique ID Select Send clear traps with zero severity if you want to receive information concerning clear traps Select Send traps with extended alarm information if you want the Alarm ID origin and unit from the current alarm table to be added to the end of each FibeAir related trap FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus 7 For CLLI Common Language Location Identifier enter up to 18 characters that will represent your system ID when traps are sent 8 For Heartbeat Period a heartbeat signal will be generated every x minutes the number you enter to tell your system that the trap meachnism is working 9 Click Apply to save the settings 10 Click Close In band Configuration In band configuration is performed when you want to work with In band Management In band Management refers to a method whereby the network management software sends management packets through the same network it is managing This differs f
80. 0 dB 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 32 QAM Receiver Sensitivity 73 dBm 73 dBm 73 dBm 72 dBm BER 10 32 QAM All Frequencies Receiver Overload BER 10 Better than 20 dBm Unfaded BER Less than 107 Transmit power must not be set to any value higher than that specified in the tables For LMDS B channel power is 14 dBm and the receiver sensitivity level is 62 dBm FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 17 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Antenna Antenna 6 18 GHz Specification 6 GHz 7 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 1 Ft Gain eS 29 2 dBi 31 9 dBi 33 5 dBi 2 Ft Gain 30 1 dBi 35 5 dBi 36 6 dBi 38 5 dBi 3 Ft Gain ee 37 8 dBi 38 9 dBi 42 dBi 4 6 Ft Gain 39 3 dBi 36 4 40 2 dBi 40 5 43 6 41 5 45 dBi 42 6 46 dBi 44 5 48 dBi dBi 8 Ft Gain 41 9 dBi 42 9 dBi 10 Ft Gain 43 3 dBi 44 8 dBi 12 Ft Gain 45 2 dBi 46 3 dBi 15 Ft Gain 46 9 dBi 48 2 dBi 23 38 GHz Specification 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 32 GHz 38 GHz 1 Ft Gain 35 dBi 36 dBi 36 6 dBi 37 dBi 39 dBi 2 Ft Gain 40 dBi 41 dBi 41 5 dBi 42 dBi 44 dBi 3 Ft Gain 43 5 dBi 44 5 dBi 4 6 Ft Gain 46 49 5 dBi 47 dBi All Frequencies Polarization Vertical or Horizontal Standard Mounting OD Pole 48 mm 114 mm 1 9 4 5 subject to vendor and antenna size High Performance
81. 0 is equipped with a 16 state QAM modem FibeAir 1528 is equipped with a 128 state QAM modem The modem delivers a 155 Mbps payload in 50 56 MHz channel bandwidth for 16 QAM and 27 5 28 MHz for 128 QAM in compliance with FCC ETSI standards The modem is equipped with Digital Signal Processing functions as follows e Digital IF I Q modulator demodulator whose functions are Conversion of the modulated signal to from the IF frequency Automatic level equalization on the signal from ODU Protection against overloads e Timing recovery techniques employing digital tracking loop e FEC ensures unfaded BER lower than 10 The following figure illustrates a measured 16 QAM constellation 1 Q 50 09 2 Q 50 00 1G3 s xY STOP Figure 2 2 16 QAM Constellation The following figure illustrates a measured 128 QAM constellation FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 3 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation In Door Unit IDU 128 QAM Constellation 1000 800 600 400 200 Image 200 400 600 800 1000 i 1000 500 0 500 1000 Real Figure 2 3 128 QAM Constellation Manager Module The Manager module controls and manages all system modules of the local and remote units The Manager module also supports the user interface through Ethernet or PPP SLIP to the management station and an ASCII terminal port A local or dumb terminal can be used for basic configuration and performance monitoring
82. 060 Hr Chantal Spacey 50 He Fx Farge TaD ES Hr Dupin Frequency 700 MHz Taawa fi 3 Ta Frequency pasi aH Foi Frieme WHr Low ony i Trerceniter Coriaria Raras Conligquration F Ti bute M ATE Set Tx Leesi i Je Motion ent Bx Lava fs O Set Reretnee Reke o Mardored For Levai ja n Figure 5 21 ODU Configuration Window 2 The ODU Parameters area is read only 3 In the Frequency Control area select Local Only if you want to set the frequency only for the local side Select Local Remote to set the frequency for both sides of the link The Local Remote option is available only when the link is operational 4 For Tx Channel click the up down arrows to select the frequency channel you want to use For Tx Frequency enter the frequency at which the system will transmit The Rx Frequency field is read only for frequencies above 8 GHz For 7 8 GHz values must be entered in the field 7 Inthe Transmitter Configuration area select Tx Mute to block transmission to the remote unit By default this option is not selected Select ATPC to activate the Automatic Transmit Power Control feature For Set Tx Level enter or select the designated signal level Possible range is 10 to max power level By default the transmit signal level is set to the maximum power level The Monitored Tx Level field read only displays the system s transmitted power level 8 Inthe Receiver Configuration area the Set Re
83. 1528 1500A 1528A should appear as described below to indicate normal operation LED Color Explanation PWR Green Power on STBY Green Normal operation GOGGGO LINE Red No input to main channel High Ber ve Dede Tete Er IDU Green IDU operating and no IDU alarm STEY DU ODU CEL RhIT LOF Red Loss of Frame detected no radio connection ODU Yellow Rx Tx out of range BER Red Excessive bit errors detected CBL Green Cable between IDU and ODU properly connected LBK Green Loopback not operated RMT Red Remote unit not connected The LED display for FibeAir 1500P should appear as described below to indicate normal operation LED Color Explanation DRWR Green Power on ODU Red No communications to ODU CBL Green Cable between IDU and ODU properly connected LPBK Green Loopback not operated RADIO Green Radio connected If the LED display is not as described above refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting amp Diagnostics FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 23 Setting Up the IDU Chapter 3 Installation Initial Antenna Alignment using the Headset Tip Azimuth Alignment Connect the headset BNC adapter to the ODU Connect the headset to the adapter and put it on If a tone is heard your initial alignment is OK Now you can adjust the aim to find the highest tone pitch and proceed to the final alignment below If no tone is heard the initial alignment is not satisfactory It is recommended to use the optical viewfin
84. 3 4 5 10 In the Control Panel window double click Add Remove Programs Click the Windows Setup tab and select Communications Click Details and mark Dial up Networking Click OK and OK again Windows may automatically restart and ask for the Win98 installation CD If this does not happen restart your PC After the PC restarts click Start on the desktop and select Settings Control Panel Network In the Configuration tab make sure that the Dial up Adapter and TCP IP Dial up Adapter components appear in the list If these components are not in the list you need to install them manually To install the components select Add Adapter Add Manufacturer Microsoft Dial up Adapter Then click OK Select TCP IP Dialup adapter Properties Specify an IP address Enter the dialer IP address on the same subnet as the IDU serial address For example 192 168 0 xx when using the default IDU address where xx may be any number between 3 to 255 Enter a Subnet Mask identical to the IDU subnet mask For example 255 255 255 0 when using the default IDU subnet mask Note The subnet mask must be the same as the Indoor Subnet Mask 11 12 Click OK and OK again Resart the PC Adding the SLIP Protocol to the Dial Up Adapter A 2 Se OE Fe 08 Click Start on the desktop and select Programs Windows Explorer In the CD right click the Rnaplus inf file in the Slip98 folder and and select Install If a windo
85. 4 18 GHz EN 300 430 CEPT T R12 03 ITU R F 595 5 23 GHz EN 300 198 BAPT 211 ZV 02 23 MPT 1409 CEPT T R13 02 ITU R REC F 637 2 26 GHz EN 300 431 BAPT 211 ZV 11 26 MPT 1420 CEPT T R13 02 ITU R REC 748 2 28 GHz EN 300 431 CEPT T R13 02 ITU R REC 748 32 GHz EN 300 197 ITU R REC 746 38 GHz EN 300 197 BAPT 211 ZV 12 38 MPT 1714 CEPT T R12 01 ITU R REC 749 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 15 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Radio Radio 155 Mbps 16 128 QAM Single Carrier 6 18 GHz Specification 6 GHz 7 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz Transmit Power 26 dBm 24 dBm 20 dBm 18 dBm 18 dBm 20 17 dBm 16 QAM 128 QAM Tx Attenuation Range 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 30 25 dB 16 QAM 128 QAM Receiver Sensitivity 68 dBm 68 dBm 68 dBm 68 dBm 68 dBm 75 68 dBm BER 10 16 QAM 128 QAM 23 38 GHz Specification 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 32 GHz 38 GHz Transmit Power 20 17 dBm 20 17 dBm 20 17 dBm 17 15 dBm 15 15 dBm 16 QAM 128 QAM Tx Attenuation Range 30 25 dB 30 25 dB 30 25 dB 30 25 dB 30 25 dB 16 QAM 128 QAM Receiver Sensitivity 74 67 dBm 74 67 dBm 74 67 dBm 72 67 dBm 72 66 dBm BER 10 16 QAM 128 QAM All Frequencies P 6 Receiver Overload BER 10 Better than 15 dBm for 16 QAM and 20 dBm for 128 QAM Unfaded BER Less than 10 Transmit power
86. 5 Drawer Diagnostics 3 To perform a diagnostic operation type the number beside the operation and then type the number of the desired value or enter the value manually in the entry box that appears The following screen is an example of the drawer loopback options alpi Ee Eat Yee Ga Jina iiio Dl sig olis a Main Mesma IELHG FDI GLAG sURWH Gonny neral Dear Loophacke SUPRA GH Fl In POUIBRIE Cena T i U2 268 1 22 Geetral Braver Looped ki uit Back OM Lenin peer k Tinahle Teewee Fadie Lonphagk Tigahle Tomma 00 50 51 aE Eshi S NUM Figure 4 26 Drawer Loopback Options Example FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 23 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P Logs To view system log reports 1 Inthe main menu shown in the section Getting Started at the beginning of this chapter select 5 Logs The Logs menu appears O Bie id yew Ga uui jiso olal els aa a Hain Manu Flags BUFER UNEN Intar acai Hone PINERIE GCERASEE HPETUORNE LTE Laga LEC aLaft Drawer Right Drawer Tonei 0 Ai pre HOWGH H Figure 4 27 Logs Menu 2 Select the module for which you want to view log reports by typing the number beside it The following screen appears for IDC aimi Bie Lat yee Ga Jonia Help D sig olis a Fain Mesu bLnogz lb Logz Manm EUPEE GUN lLotepl acn E PUIBRIE CFRADOH HETUORES LTD 172 168 1 7 Figure 4 28 IDC Log Options 4 24 FibeAir Fam
87. 5 Operation Menus 9 Click Apply to save the settings 10 Click Close In band Configuration In band configuration is performed when you want to work with In band Management In band Management refers to a method whereby the network management software sends management packets through the same network it is managing This differs from out of band management in which the network management software uses a different network overlay network in order to communicate with the managed elements 1 Select Configuration Management System In band The In band Configuration window appears in band Configuration LA FA 20 10 10 11 32 BIE EF F in band Mensgement Ensbisd Semen Type Peter memen in band Chanai Lane Fi Lire ET foccr occa Tine To Live TTL Ea 4 Gateway Sing Sirei Address TATIN Network D fi E pty Refresh e ee Figure 5 16 In band Configuration Window 2 Select In band Management Enabled to activate In band management 3 For Element Type click the drop down list and select the desired element Network Element or Gateway 4 For In band Channel click the drop down list and select the channel you want to use 5 For Time To Live TTL use the up down arrows to select the desired value 6 The Gateway Ring Subnet Address and Gateway Ring Subnet Mask fields are read only 7 For Network ID use the arrow buttons to select the desired value 8 Click Apply to save the settings 9 Clic
88. A E Fo Errniaamn Bem 1 of Emam a gt Emim pan E t ft g Figure 5 18 External Alarms Window Follow the steps below for both the Local and Remote sides The microcontroller in the IDU reads alarm inputs dry contact and transmits them to the CeraView management system This allows FibeAir to report external alarms that are not related to its own system For each alarm on the left side of the window do the following 2 Click on the box next to the alarm number to enable disable the alarm If you enable an alarm enter a description of the alarm in the text field 4 Select the alarm s severity level from the drop down list Major Minor Warning or Event 5 FibeAir provides five alarm outputs that can be used by other systems to sense FibeAir alarms The outputs are configured on the right side of the window The alarm outputs are Form C Relays Each output relay provides three pins as follows Normally Open NO Normally Closed NC Common C Output alarms can be defined as Major Minor Warning External Power BER Line Loopback LOF IDU ODU Cable or Remote The default alarm output setting for all relays is Power FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 25 Chapter 5 Operation Menus The relays may be connected to customer specific applications Refer to Appendix B for details concerning the alarm connector pin assignments 6 After you complete the external alarm configurat
89. A 1528A IDUs can be replaced by a combination of FibeAir 1500 Radio SDH Regenerators and external ADMs FibeAir 1500A 1528A can then be used elsewhere in the network FibeAir 1500A 1528A supports chain and ring topologies It can be used in pure SDH wireless networks or in mixed wire and wireless networks The ability to add drop traffic in each node of the network provides network flexibility and ease of planning Ring topologies are important for protected configurations and for redundant traffic loads when protection is not configured System Block Diagram The following figure shows the FibeAir 1500A 1528A main modules and components Clock Sources Clocks Management Radio gt Line Other Cards L Daughter Board J Mother Board E Figure 2 6 FibeAir 1500A 1528A System Block Diagram The FibeAir 1500A 1528A ADM demultiplexes high speed traffic streams to lower speed components so that an additional low speed channel can be added In networks that cannot identify available low speed channels within a high speed bit stream the ADM is required to demux the high speed traffic to lower speed circuits FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 7 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation System Block Diagram As shown in the block diagram the FibeAir Add Drop Multiplexer IDU includes the following functions Controller Modem Interface STM1 Line Interface
90. ABLE G OPEN Augi POT Pay DURENDE UMA TION FAL RASED VF du pE 1 08 amp none Be FAL GEARED Tus COE amp ure ay FAM CLEARED Fd O84 Os amp UPR ea CLEARED 1Ang OS Figa A hoo AFAL CLEARED TF due3 841 08 amp IDU CARE GS OPEN TPA Gita a Duro TOWMUHEATEN FAL RAED hugdi OF OI Pa IDUPE Be Fal CLEARED OG Aue OF oe 3s Pat ores ae Fa GEARED Aus OF OSS amp RPS Jae GEARED Fat ALS OF OR DURA a TAL CLEARED ial ea Sana ia Figure 5 30 Alarm Log Window The Alarm Log window displays the following information Time The time the alarm was triggered Date The date the alarm was triggered Severity The severity of the alarm You can determine which severity levels will be displayed in the window by selecting the levels at the top of the window Description A description of the alarm and its status RAISED CLEARED Note You can click on a column title to sort the information in the table accordingly To clear the alarm list in the window click Clear Log To save the current alarm list in a file click Save To close the window click Close Continuous Alarm Logging To save alarms in a continuous logging file select Alarms Local Remote Start Saving Log In the Choose Alarm Log File window that appears select the file you want to save the alarms to and click Save Alarms will be added to the file you selected until you select Stop Saving Log If you want to exit CeraView and the log file is still ac
91. AL LOOPBACK ON RADIO n RAISED CLEARED Internal communication ODU Warning DRAWER ODU COMMUNICATION FAIL RAISED CLEARED Remote communication RMT Major Remote Communication Fault fault Modem configuration Drawer Major Drawer n modem configuration script not found file not found RAISED CLEARED Drawer ID Mismatch Drawer Major Drawer n ID mismatch RAISED CLEARED LOS on ODU IF cable ODU Major DRAWER n LOS on ODU IF cable IDU Synthesizer lock Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL HARDWARE FAULT 1 RAISED CLEARED XO failure modem Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL board HARDWARE FAULT 2 RAISED CLEARED XO failure mux board Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL HARDWARE FAULT 3 RAISED CLEARED IDU XPIC HW fault Drawer Major only in DRAWER n GENERAL XPIC mode HARDWARE FAULT 4 RAISED CLEARED FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 27 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages Name LED Default Text Severity DAC failure Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL HARDWARE FAILURE 5 RAISED CLEARED FPGA load failure Mux Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL HARDWARE FAILURE 6 RAISED CLEARED FPGA load failure Drawer Major DRAWER n GENERAL Modem HARDWARE FAILURE 7 RAISED CLEARED No power to Mux board Drawer Major No power to Board 1 in DRAWER k Raised Cleared No power to Modem Drawer Major No power to Board 2 board Raised Cleared in DRAWER k Raised Cleared Mux
92. ARED Dual polarization IDC Warning ODU FREQUNCY MISMATCH BETWEEN mode frequency LEFT AND RIGHT DRAWER configuration RAISED CLEARED mismatch only in XPIC mode External Alarm s _ According to According to configuration configuration RAISED CLEARED IDC BIST failed IDC Major IDC built in test failed on test n RAISED CLEARED Ethernet loss of On Major Wayside channel loss of DRAWER on DRAWER Ethernet interface n RAISED CLEARED interface Cable Cable Major Cable IDU ODU swap DRAWER n RAISED CLEARED FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 29 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages Protection Alarms amp Indications in the Alarm Log File Configuration Mismatch Name Default Text Severity Change to Active Major PROTECTION CHANGE TO ACTIVE lt reason gt Change to Standby Major PROTECTION CHANGE TO STANDBY lt reason gt Change Remote Transmit Event PROTECTION CHANGE REMOTE LOF TRANSMIT SENT LOF Change Remote Transmit Event PROTECTION CHANGE REMOTE EXBER TRANSMIT SENT EXBER Cable Major PROTECTION CABLE DISCONNECTED Cable Major PROTECTION COMM ERROR IN CABLE Mate Power Major PROTECTION EXTERNAL MATE NOT EXIST Mate Power Major PROTECTION INTERNAL MATE NOT EXIST Protection Disabled Major PROTECTION DISABLED Lockout Major PROTECTION LOCKOUT Force Switch Major PROTECTION FORCE SWITCH Manual Switch Minor PR
93. Air 1500 1528 CeraView for FibeAir 1500 1528 Main Window Title Bar Active Standby Menu Bar 5 16 The following sections describe the CeraView application for FibeAir 1500 1528 A description of CeraView for other FibeAir products is provided in the relevant section in this chapter The Main window is your starting point for all operations Below is a description of the menus toolbars and other features of the Main window prais Arirasr LEM tuzinn Ling j ALs mano iir ar Zz Figure 5 10 Main Window The Title Bar displays the CeraView version and the IP address of the IDU being accessed The Active Standby tabs appear for protected 1 1 systems You can click on the tabs to configure the respective units The Menu Bar contains menus and menu items used to perform CeraView operations FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Toolbar Physical View Physical View The Toolbar includes several icons that you can click to perform different operations Each icon in the Toolbar is described below Operation System Information used to view and define system information such as contact personnel and system up time Trap Forwarding Configuration used to designate managers to which traps will be forwarded Current Alarms used to view current active alarms Alarm Log used to view hisorical alarm records External Alarms used to configure alarms s
94. Alarm Log window displays the following information Time The time the alarm was triggered Date The date the alarm was triggered Severity The severity of the alarm You can determine which severity levels will be displayed in the window by selecting the levels at the top of the window Description A description of the alarm and its status RAISED CLEARED To clear the log file click Clear Log To save the log report in the window click Save To close the window click Close Save Alarms to File To save alarms in the alarm log to a file and continuously log alarms generated by the unit in the same file select Alarms Start Saving Log In the Choose Alarm Log File window that appears specify the file in which you want to save the alarms and click Save Existing alarms in the log are saved in the file you specified and new alarms are added to the file until you select Stop Saving Log or exit the application FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 139 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Performance Menu Line The Line Performance Monitoring window displays the number of line UAS unavailable seconds measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours 1 Select Performance Line Line 1 Line 2 The Line Monitoring graphic window appears Hering 10 000 op a Of 80 0 a Oe oo oe oe oe oo oe oo aka Th TEAN EO karti BE BO g i i Figure 5 19 Line Monitoring Graphic Window Time Elapsed is the c
95. As a standard ADM it can easily be integrated in the network with other vendor equipment FibeAir s standard in band management capability enables management of external equipment and FibeAir products within the SONET SDH network External synchronization outputs are used to synchronize external equipment with the network FibeAir 1500A 1528A also supports cascaded topologies and enables a highway type network that drops E1s T1s at each node One possibilty for FibeAir 1500A 1528A deployment is as an access network transmission solution Instead of Fiber to Curb Building Office FTTC FTTB FTTO FibeAir 1500A 1528A can be used for Radio to Curb Building Office RTTC RTTB RTTO At rapidly developing sites using relatively old optical infrastructures fiber lines may not reach the customer In such cases the service provider can use FibeAir 1500A 1528A units for inter connection and service distribution In many cases customers obtain required capacity via leased lines FibeAir 1500A 1528A can be used as a cost effective alternative to leased lines and terminal equipment In approximately three years the initial investment in FibeAir 1500A 1528A will be returned whereas use of leased lines over three years will yield much higher cost FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 9 Applications Chapter 1 Introduction The following illustration shows FibeAir 1500A 1528A integrated in a typical wireless wireline n
96. C Recovery Test In order to verify the XPIC operation simulate the faults described below 21 Disconnect the IDU ODU cable for each one of the drawers one at a time and verify that the other link is operating 22 Disconnect the XPIC cable and check that the relevant alarms were raised 23 Power down each one of the drawers and verify that the other link is operating 24 Swap the V and H cables and check that the relevant alarm was raised FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 47 Chapter 3 Installation XPIC Installation and Comissioning 25 Mute and then un mute one ODU at a time and verify that the other link is operating XPIC Link Verification 26 Verify that the link is working in XPIC mode same channel 27 On one IDU connect an SDH analyzer to each of the STM 1 ports with a physical loop on the remote IDU and then run a BER stability test for at least two hours 3 48 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Prerequisites The system setup and configuration follows the system installation initial testing and antenna alignment as described in Chapter 3 The Setup Procedure The FibeAir setup procedure consists of the following operations 1 Defining general settings Setting local device communication parameters Setting SNMP parameters 2 Defining system configuration parameters Setting transmit frequency Setting output power levels 3 Def
97. Dial Up Adapter Note Your computer must be connected to the same subnet as the IDU 17 18 19 20 21 22 Configuring PPP 1 NoD a P 0 10 Unmark Use IP Header Compression and Use Default Gateway or Remote Network Click OK and OK again In the Configure area select the appropriate maximum speed the default is 19200 Bps In the Connection tab unmark Wait for Dial Tone before Dialing and set Cancel the call if not connected within to 1 sec In the Advanced area unmark Use Error Control and Use Flow Control Click OK OK again and OK again Configure the dial up modem by clicking Start on the desktop and selecting Control Panel Modems After you configure the modem in the Control Panel click Add Remove Programs In the Windows Setup tab select Communications Click Details and mark Dial up Networking Select the modem you are using Click Configure set the baud rate to 38 400 and select the COM port Click Connection and configure the connection settings as follows Data bits 8 Parity NONE Stop bit 1 Click OK Click Next and enter the phone number Click Next and then Finish FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual A 3 Appendix A PPP SLIP Driver Installation Installation for Windows 98 11 12 13 14 15 16 In the Properties of the dial up connection that you defined select Server Type In the Type of Dial Up Server list select PPP Un
98. ERTER Radio xx LOCKED Synthesizer is unlocked This can either be a momentary synchronization loss or a hardware failure If alarm does not clear in a short while the ODU needs to be replaced Suggested Check current alarm status ODU IF CONVERTER Radio Previous error is cleared xx UNLOCKED ODU TX LEVEL IS OUT Radio Actual transmitted power differs by more OF RANGE than 3 dB from the required power This can be due to one of the folowing 1 Extreme temperature conditions 2 Hardware failure Note This warning does not always require immediate action the data may still be OK on the radio link To correct 1 Check RSL level at the remote terminal and compare it to the calculated unfaded Rx level If there is a change of more than 3 dB in the Rx level change the Tx power level in the local ODU Configuration window 2 Check if the ODU is operating in extreme temperature conditions Such conditions may cause variations in the Tx output power level FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 17 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6 18 Alarm Log File Messages Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action ODU TX LEVEL IS IN Radio Previous error is cleared RANGE ODU RX LEVEL IS OUT Radio The actual received level after AGC circuits OF RANGE differs from the expected level This may be caused by one of the following 1 The received signal is too weak or
99. F2 1 2 24 20 F Pies Location CUa mis Ceceg TFTP Servet Addresa 172A 306 Du i poU MLC Mao mar Progress for UTP TP dreina Eked 7 Orankad Log Figure 5 7 Software Download Window 2 Click Select to choose the software file you want to download 3 Inthe Software Download window click Apply The software file you chose is downloaded and a progress report appears in the Download Log area New Session Select this item to log in for a new CeraView session The new session will appear in addition to the current session When you select this item the CeraView login window appears for you to specify the IP address of the FibeAir unit you want to access Exit Select this item to exit the CeraView application You can also exit by clicking on the Close icon x in the title bar When you exit CeraView you will be prompted to confirm the exit Click OK to confirm the operation FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 123 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Configuration Menu 5 124 IDU External Alarms The procedure detailed in this section is required only if alarms generated by external equipment are connected to the IDU or if the IDU alarm outputs are connected to other equipment using the alarms I O connector 1 Select Configuration IDU External Alarms or click the External Alarms icon The External Alarms window appears fat imeri Guipa Alar T in ananasni Big Es External alae inp
100. FCC Channel Allocations 128 QAM Frequency Width Separation Tx Range Rx Range 11 GHz Tx Low 10702 5 11417 5 10942 5 11657 5 11 GHz Tx High j 10702 5 11417 5 24 GHz antennas Radio Wave HLP1 26 Andrews VHLP1 240 D 2 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual
101. Hz 10 7 11 7 12 75 14 5 15 35 17 7 19 7 Fequency GHz 6 425 GHz 13 25 GHz GHz GHz Range 7 1 GHz Tx Rx 240 252 04 119 154 500 520 266 MHz 315 420 1010 1560 Spacing 260 266 161 168 530 490 475 728 MHz 340 MHz 182 196 MHz MHz 245 311 32 MHz RF Channel 28 MHz 28 MHz 28 30 40 28 MHz 28 MHz 27 5 40 Spacing MHz MHz 2 14 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual General Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Supported Standards 23 38 GHz Specification 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 32 GHz 38 GHz Standards FCC ETSI ETSI FCC ETSI ETSI ETSI FCC Canada Operating 21 2 23 6 GHz 24 5 26 5 GHz LMDS A1 A2 31 8 33 4 GHz 37 38 4 38 6 Fequency B LMCS ETSI 40 37 39 5 Range GHz Tx Rx 1008 1200 1008 MHz 350 500 1008 812 MHz 700 1260 Spacing 1232 MHz MHz MHz RF Channel 28 50 MHz 28 MHz 28 50 MHz 28 MHz 28 50 MHz Spacing For additional Tx Rx schemes please contact your Ceragon representative All Frequencies Capacity 116 Mbps 100BaseT 8xE1 T1 Modulation Type 32 QAM Frequency Stability 0 001 Frequency Source Synthesizer RF Channel Sel ection Via NMS System Configs Non Protected 1 0 Protected 1 1 Supported Standards Frequency Standards 6 GHz EN 300 234 7 GHz EN 300 234 ITU R 385 8 GHz EN 300 234 ITU R 386 11 GHz EN 300 234 13 GHz EN 300 234 15 GHz EN 300 23
102. IN TIP 8 35 Red Green OUT RING 1 10 Brown Red Twipied Pal OUT TIP 1 25 Red Brown l l OUT RING 2 26 Light Blue Red Twisted Fair OUT TIP 2 40 Red Light Blue OUT RING 3 12 Dark Blue Black Toisied Parr OUT TIP 3 11 Black Dark Blue l OUT RING 4 28 Orange Black TREI FAN OUT TIP 4 27 Black Orange OUT RING 5 42 Green Black DMISIeO Falb OUT TIP 5 41 Black Green OUT RING 6 14 Brown Black Twisted Pair OUT TIP 6 13 Black Brown OUT RING 7 30 Light Blue Black Tuibied Tair OUT TIP 7 29 Black Light Blue OUT RING 8 44 Dark Blue Yellow eel ea kan OUT TIP 8 43 Yellow Dark Blue Shield Shell 1 22 24 Notes 1 Shell is connected to IDU chassis GND 2 The following pins are not connected 6 7 8 9 15 23 36 37 38 39 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Connector Pin Outs RJ 45 10 Pin Connector for Hitless Systems RJ 45 10 Pin Connector for Hitless Systems B 8 For hitless systems the IDUs at each side are connected using an RJ 45 10 pin connector with the following pin out RJ 45 10 Pin Connector Pin Out 1 Sync 2 Not Connected 3 Transmit Data 4 Transmit Data 5 Receive Data 6 GND 7 Receive Data 8 Not Connected 9 Lock 10 Not Connected FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Connector Pin Outs Wayside Channel Connector Pin Outs Wayside Channel Connector Pin Outs This section provides pin outs for Way
103. M Node Swich ji Select Configuration IDU Synchronization or click the Clock area in the CeraView main window FibeAir physical view The Synchronization Configuration window appears Sym hronizalion Configuration Oren 10 01 ME Ea intemal Cct Uri a a am Statue T hoced Ca od Reng Sawios Dise 39 Source firna ounce Tti uiy pre Gamtly n fiee E Eaa ea A Figure 5 9 Synchronization Configuration Window 2 The Internal Clock Unit area displays the current clock unit type state and status The type can be ST 3E ST 3 or Sec The status can be Unlocked which indicates that the clock source is not locked to the primary or secondary path or Out of Range which indicates that the unit cannot be synchronized with the external clock signal When this occurs an Out of Range alarm is generated To enable disable the SSM mode click the SSM Mode menu and select enable or disable Note that if the SSM mode is not enabled each network element will need to determine the clock quality on its own FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus 4 Inthe Primary Clock Parameters area for Source click the drop down list and select the clock source which can be one of the following e Internal e External 2 MB e Line l e Line 2 e Fiber e External 2 MHz e Tributary 1 8 5 The Quality parameter is used to
104. OTECTION MANUAL SWITCH External Alarm Minor PROTECTION EXTERNAL ALARM SWITCH Protection Mismatch Minor Protection Mismatch Protection IDU HW Mismatch Critical Protection IDU HW Mismatch Protection IDU Firmware Critical Protection IDU Firmware Mismatch Mismatch Protection IDU Configuration Critical Protection IDU Configuration Mismatch Mismatch Protection ODU HW Critical Protection ODU HW Mismatch Mismatch Protection ODU Critical Protection ODU Configuration Mismatch 6 30 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages FibeAir 1500A 1528A Alarm Messages The following table lists alarm messages that may appear in the FibeAir 1500A 1528A alarm log file and the severity of each alarm Message Severity Fiber LOS Critical RADIO LOF Critical Fiber LOF Critical RADIO EXBER Major Fiber EXBER Major RADIO SD Minor Fiber SD Minor Fiber TIM Minor Radio TIM Minor Radio MS AIS Critical Fiber MS AIS Critical Radio MS RDI Major Fiber MS RDI Major Radio MS EXBER Major Fiber MS EXBER Major Radio MS SD Minor Fiber MS SD Minor Radio AU LOP Major Fiber AU LOP Major Radio AU AIS Major see note 1 below Fiber AU AIS Major see note 1 below Radio HP UNEQ Warning see note 1 below Relevant only for SONET 3xVC3 where the tributaries are DS3s not only T1s Fiber HP UNEQ War
105. PP Security menu appears Em vew Col Dinike Hen FINSIR LSet CORSO HITHORES LTO The FRE parity Gait faye amp Hotum Bazh Tersia SHEI EDERA TE KIH Figure 4 8 PPP Security Menu 5 Select 1 PPP Authentication Protocol Define the protocol 0 None 1 PAP without encryption 2 CHAP with encryption 6 Select 2 PPP Authentication Mode 2 GUEST The IDU gives the user name and the password to the network manager 3 HOST The IDU receives the use name and the password from the network manager and validates them 4 DYNAMIC When the IDU receives a phone call then it acts as HOST If it initiates a call to the network manager SNMP trap it will act like a GUEST In case of a direct connection without a dialup modem it acts as HOST FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 9 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A 7 Select 3 Access Device Security Identity Enter user name password This will be sent by the IDU when configured for authentication and acts like a GUEST 8 Select 4 External Device Security Identity Enter user name password This will be received and validated by the IDU when configured for authentication and acts like a HOST 9 Select S Save amp Return to save the settings and return to the Full Configuration menu SNMP Configuration To connect to the IDU with SNMP based management you need to define th
106. S3 8xE1 Compatible Standards ITU T G 703 G 707 G 783 G 823 G 957 G 958 ITU T 1 432 ATM Forum ETSI ETS 300 147 ETS 300 417 ANSI T1 105 ANSI T1 102 1993 Bellcore GR 253 core TR NWT 000499 1544 2048 Kbps Wayside Channel Available Interfaces T1 E1 Ethernet bridge 10BaseT V 35 X 21 RS 530 or V 36 The Wayside channel is not available for FibeAir 1500A 1528A ADM FibeAir 1500A 1528A ADM Interfaces Aggregate Interfaces STM 1 Optical Single multi mode SC type RF N type Tributary Interfaces STM 1 optical E1 120 ohm balanced 75 ohm unbalanced using adapter panel to BT 43 BNC ADM Configurations Single Aggregates 1 optical and 1 radio 2 optical Tributaries 1 16xE1 STM 1 Single with Regenerator Aggregates 2 optical or 2 radio Tributaries 1 16xE1 STM 1 Double Aggregates 2 optical or 2 radio Tributaries 1 32xE1 2xSTM 1 ADM Protection Protection Method SNCP ring protection MSP 1 1 for trib STM 1 Synchronization external inputs outputs 2 Mbps 2 MHz Topologies Protected Ring Cascaded Chain User Channel User Channel 64 Kbps RS 232 2 20 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Service Channel Network Management Diagnostics Status and Alarms Engineering Order Wire ADM CVSD audio channel 64 Kbps Note All inter
107. Thresholds area for Excessive Error click the drop down list and select the level above which an Excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus For Signal Degrade select the level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link The BER field is read only and shows the value above which a BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link 3 Inthe Link Parameters area select the direction of the FibeAir radio The direction you select will be indicated in the physical view 4 For Link ID specify the identification number of the link Note When working with an IDU that has the LINK ID feature on one end and an IDU that does not have this feature on the other end set the LINK ID to 1 Click Apply to save the settings 6 Click Close Management System IP Configuration 1 Select Configuration Management System IP Configuration The IP Configuration window appears Detaul Fiouter P address fiszisgo 1 Berini AMS P adiens haimo P ask 255 255 3550 mask ies tz a Eee ea ET Figure 5 17 IP Configuration Window 2 Inthe Ethernet Addresses area specify the Ethernet IP Mask and Default Router IP Address 3 In the Serial NMS area specify the IP Mask Baud Rate and Modem Phone Number 4 Click Apply to save the changes 5 Click Close FibeAir Fa
108. Troubleshooting LED Indications for Hitless Systems For Hitless systems the following table lists the LEDs and their indications LOF LED Panel LOF LED Color Alarm Explanation Yellow Local unit receives LOF from a receive path currently not in use Red Local unit receives LOF from a receive path currently in use LOF Interface Panel ALRM LED Color Alarm Explanation OFF Hitless mode is disabled Red Local unit receives LOF from the mate unit Green Hitless switching can be performed if necessary Local Receiver Interface Panel Rx ACTV LED Color Alarm Explanation OFF Local receiver not in use Green Local receiver in use FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual IDU LED Indicators 6 5 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting General Troubleshooting Guide General Troubleshooting Guide The following table lists general system faults related alarms possible causes and troubleshooting procedures Condition Alarm Indication Probable Cause Corrective Action IDU Line IDU Power Supply PWR LED One or more voltages in Replace IDU Failure the IDU power supply Red are not correct Local IDU Failure IDU LED Modulator failure Check alarms If Red modulator failure Yellow high temperature or cooling fan High temperature Cooling fan Modulator fail replace IDU Check air conditioning in facility Check al
109. Tx and one for Rx Therefore in a standard Hot Standby system 6 optical patches and 2 Y Splitters are used Connection Panel Connects the 8 E1 interfaces of both IDUs for identical data flow It is also used to connect the Impedance Adaptation panel which balances 75 ohm E1 inputs Protection Cable Used to transfer protection switching controls between the units Y Splitter Configuration for Unbalanced E1s When the Els are unbalanced 75 ohm an Impedance Adaptation panel is required to balance them 120 ohm In this case the Hot Standby Connection Panel also connects the Impedance Adaptation panel to the IDUs as shown in the following diagram DCE ntete Rees ir 2 ae mie 959004 STM 1 Optical Impedance Adaptation Panel Connection Sosa e a a bos te it Protection itis Cable Figure 7 11 Protected Y Spiltter Configuration for Unbalanced E1s 7 10 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500A 1528A System Protection H Splitter Configuration The H Splitter configuration is used if the FibeAir 1500A 1528A protected system is linked to another FibeAir 1500A 1528A protected system in the communication chain The following diagram shows the FibeAir 1500A 1528A H Splitter configuration Connection Panel gu ee er Protection Cable Figure 7 12 FibeAir 1500A 1528A Protected Configuration using H Splitter Note that since the optica
110. VC 12s VC 11s and 2 Mbps 1 544 Mbps tributaries only not for VC 3s and 34 45 Mbps tributaries 3 TU_LOM H4 causes pass through TU AIS for TU 12s VC 11s only not for TU 3s FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Hitless System Alarm Messages Hitless System Alarm Messages The following table lists alarm messages that may appear in the FibeAir alarm log file for Hitless systems the trap issued to network management and possible corrective actions Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action LOCAL RECEIVER None Selective fading at the receiver NOT IN USE LOCAL RECEIVER None Normal signal level at the receiver IN USE HITLESS SYSTEM ALARM Hitless cable problem or Hitless FUNCTIONALITY can be mate module problem PROBLEM RAISED HITLESS SYSTEM ALARM Hitless switching can be FUNCTIONALITY performed PROBLEM CLEARED CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ALARM The mate remote unit was MISMATCH MATE configured incorrectly REMOTE HITLESS Check the mate remote unit MODE RAISED configuration CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ALARM The mate and remote units are MISMATCH MATE both configured the same as the REMOTE HITLESS current unit MODE CLEARED HITLESS RADIO SDH ALARM The local radio detected LOF LOF RAISED The problem may be caused by flat fading Check your current alarm status If the alarm appears continuously contact your Ceragon dealer HITLESS CABLE SYSTEM ALARM Hitless
111. Yellow SD unexpected Minor Green OK wee Gray disabled w FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 85 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Menus The following sections describe the CeraView window menus File Menu 5 86 System Information This option allows you to view and define information for the FibeAir system 1 System Indormation 10 100 T0 BE Cursnt ime Description 7128 aged Sev Ver SHA Ver 10 Select File System Information or click the System Information icon The System Information window appears Fudan 16 032009 ST 2004 Dalattine Contig raticn SS O Figure 5 3 System Information Window 2 In the Current Time area click Date Time Configuration and set the date and the time in the format HH MM SS The read only Description field provides information about the FibeAir system Optional In the Name field enter a name for this link By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name Optional In the Contact field enter the name of the person to be contacted when a problem with the system occurs Include information on how to contact the designated person Optional In the Location field enter the actual physical location of the node or agent The Up Time field is read only and shows how long the system has been operating continuously Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapt
112. a or mast assembly comes in contact with a power line call your local power company DO NOT TRY TO REMOVE IT YOURSELF They will remove it safely Make sure that the mast assembly is properly grounded Assembling antennas on windy days can be dangerous Because of the antenna surface even slight winds create strong forces Be prepared to WARNING safely handle these forces at unexpected moments 3 2 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Mediation Device Flange Specifications Mediation Device Flange Specifications The following table lists frequencies the appropriate waveguide standard for each frequency and their corresponding antenna waveguide flange interfaces The table should be consulted when installing the ODU and antenna Frequency WaveGuide Antenna Flange WaveGuide GHz Standard Interface Flange Interface 6 7 WR137 CPR137G CPR137F 7 8 WR112 CPR112G CPR112F 11 WR90 CPR90G CPR90G 13 WR62 UG 541A U UG 419 U 15 WR62 UG 541A U UG 419 U 18 WR42 UG 596A U UG 595 U 23 WR42 UG 596A U UG 595 U 26 WR42 UG 596A U UG 595 U 28 WR28 UG 600A U UG 599 U 38 WR28 UG 600A U UG 599 U The following FibeAir components are needed to install one radio link Required System Components Required Components and Equipment Antenna mount and accessories Antenna ODU Cable Headset BNC headset adaptor BNC DVM adaptor FibeAir Family Install
113. al 4 To check and change the serial address of the PPP SLIP driver double click My Computer 5 Double click Dial up Networking 6 Click the icon that was added after the installation of the PPP SLIP driver and select Properties 7 Verify that the protocol PPP or SLIP and the baud rate match the serial configuration that was set on the HyperTerminal 8 Select Server Type and click TCP IP Setting 4 12 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup 9 10 Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A Select Specify IP Address and enter address on the same sub net as the serial address of the IDU Double click this icon whenever you would like to establish communication with the IDU Windows NT 3 10 11 12 To check and change the serial address of the PPP SLIP driver double click My Computer Double click Dial Up Networking Click More select Edit entry and modem properties On the Basic tab verify that you are dialing using NT Direct Connection Click Configure and verify that the Initial speed bps is as configured on the HyperTerminal Select Server tab and chose PPP or SLIP as your Dial up server type Verify that the protocol PPP or SLIP and is in accordance to the serial configuration that was set on the Hyper Terminal Check only TCP IP then Click TCP IP Settings Select Specify IP Address and enter address on the same sub net as the serial address of the IDU
114. al power level meter if necessary For multi mode interface the input optical power level must be within 14 dBm and 31 dBm For single mode interface the input optical power level must be within 2 dBm and 32 dBm Verify that the input signal is a valid 155 52 Mb s signal with framing LINE LED is red 1 Line LOF Loss of and SIG LED on Frame Main Channel 2 Line EXC Interface is on excessive BER 1 Verify that the source of the 155 52 Mb s signal does not generate errors on the B1 byte e g for maintenance testing purposes 2 Verify that the connectors are connected properly cable ends are in good condition and that no excessive stress is applied to the cables cable ends and connectors bent optical cables may cause communication failures 3 Check the input 155 52 Mb s line for cables in poor condition cables that are too long etc For optical lines verify that the optical input power level is within the allowed range provided in step 1 of the previous troubleshooting procedure FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 9 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Measures LINE LED 1 Line SD Signal Same as for EXC described in step 2 of the illuminates Degrade previous troubleshooting procedure yellow 2 JO mismatch alarm Verify that the input stream is connected to the correct FibeAir unit Check that there are no errors in the
115. al receiver not in use Green Local receiver in use FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 19 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Menus The following sections describe the CeraView window menus File Menu 5 20 System Information This option allows you to view and define information for the FibeAir system 1 Current Tirk Syaa Pirai Select File Local Remote System Information or click the System Information icon The System Information window appears System Information 10 0000 16 ie E3 Tue Sep 02 14 41 33 IDT 2003 DaiaTime Configuration blire aly Ringers Figure 5 12 System Information Window 2 In the Current Time area click Date Time Configuration and set the date and the time in the format HH MM SS The read only Description field provides information about the FibeAir system Optional In the Name field enter a name for this link By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name Optional In the Contact field enter the name of the person to be contacted when a problem with the system occurs Include information on how to contact the designated person Optional In the Location field enter the actual physical location of the node or agent The Up Time field is read only and shows how long the system has been operating continuously Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operati
116. allation and Operation Manual 5 31 Chapter 5 Operation 5 32 9 10 Menus For NTP Update Interval use the up down arrows to select the amount of time minutes between synchronization updates For Offset from GMT use the arrow buttons and the drop down list to select the amount of time required to compensate for offset from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time For Daylight Saving Time Offset click the arrow buttons to set the amount of time required to compensate for daylight saving For Daylight Saving Time Start click Configure to set the beginning of the daylight saving time period For Daylight Saving Time End click Configure to set the end of the daylight saving time period Select Enable NTP Authentication for secure access to the NTP server If you enable NTP enter the Authentication Public Key and the Authentication Secret Key numbers Click Apply to save the settings Click Close to close the window In band Configuration In band configuration is performed when you want to work with In band Management In band Management refers to a method whereby the network management software sends management packets through the same network it is managing This differs from out of band management in which the network management software uses a different network overlay network in order to communicate with the managed elements 1 Select Configuration Local Remote Management System In band The In band Configu
117. ame interface single mode multi mode For multi mode interfaces check that you are using multi mode fibers to connect the unit For The single mode interfaces check that you are using single mode fibers If no problem is detected with any of the items above proceed with the following line interface troubleshooting table 6 8 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Interface Troubleshooting Guide Interface is off Symptom Probable Cause Corrective Measures LINE LED is red 1 No input signal Check that both ends of the Main Channel fiber and SIG LED on or electrical cable are properly connected and Main Channel that the source of the 155 Mb s stream is on enabled and operating 2 Incorrect input signal format Verify that the input signal is a valid 155 52 Mb s signal with framing 3 Tx Rx cables swapped Verify that the line input stream to the FibeAir unit is connected to the Rx connector If necessary swap Rx and Tx cables 4 Incorrect optical power levels or wavelength For optical interfaces 1 Verify that the optical source optical cables connectors and attenuators are compatible with the interface type Typical problems single mode cables are used with multi mode physical interface 850 nm or 1550 nm optical sources are connected to a 1300 nm interface 2 Verify that the optical input power levels are within the allowed range use an optic
118. an select an optional channel for additional data communication 1 Select Configuration IDU Auxiliary Channel The Auxiliary Channel Configuration window appears Figure 5 2 Auxiliary Channel Configuration Window 2 Select the User Channel 64 Kbps if you will be using that channel Click Apply to save the settings 4 Click Close Transport The Transport Configuration window allows you to configure special transmission parameters This is recommended for advanced users only 1 Select Configuration IDU Transport or click the Transport Configuration icon The Transport Configuration window appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 125 Chapter 5 Operation 5 126 Menus Transport Comliquration LA FA H AEE High Pat Trace kleiner 1 Tt Orern Receeved ai Wiest Lire I f Pests erat East Line 1 Trenamiied J Weettineey ACCESSMUK oo Eat guirean accesa oo Expected H Wesi Linea ACCESS Me East line 1 ACCESS MUH Sed Ari hw Sen 415 on High Path PLM a UME Photomed Transporti Protocol fect Aw meen we e Figure 5 3 Transport Configuration Window In the High Path Trace Identifier J1 area select J1 Operation to enable the identifier J1 is used to continuously transmit a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its ongoing connection to the intended transmitter Received J1 displays the identifier t
119. and data rates Forward Error Correction FEC coding for improved performance Special optimization for safe ATM transports Advanced digital signal processing implementing all digital adaptive equalization tracing loops IF modulation demodulation High spectral efficiency due to advanced modulation 16 128 QAM 13 external input and output alarms Local display of far end terminal status Remote software downloads for easy upgrades Loopback control for easy fault isolation In band management implementation Unique SNMP based management with user friendly GUI operating on Windows or UNIX platforms Protected and non protected configurations Hitless errorless diversity protection switching FibeAir 1500 1528 is a natural choice for metropolitan SONET SDH ATM and IP networks The system is used for ring closures ring LAN interconnections and access to remote distribution nodes The system may be used either as a transparent alternative to fiber lines or as a redundant link providing media diversity protection FibeAir s low frequency links 6 15 GHz enable longer operating distances essential for cellular backbones ILEC CLEC backbones and large enterprises Together Ceragon s high and low frequency links provide a comprehensive one vendor wireless communication solution FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Applications The following are typical FibeAir 1500 1528
120. another port if busy Click Configure and set the speed to 19200 bps Then click OK Select Server Type For Type of Dial up server select SLIP INTERNET Select TCP IP setting and enter the IP address This is the computer SLIP interface IP address not the Device IP address SLIP interface IP address 192 168 0 xx where xx may be any number between 3 and 30 Device IP address default is 192 114 37 5 Unmark Force IP header compression and mark Use default gateway or remote network Click OK and OK again Click Close Restart the PC FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A PPP SLIP Driver Installation Installation for Windows 2000 Installation for Windows 2000 SOO AN O ed IN e gt _ _ O 12 Click Start Setting Network and Dialup Make New Connection Click Next Mark Connect directly to another computer Click Next Mark Guest Click Next Select Communication cable between two computers Click Next Select For all user Click Next Type The connection Name Click Finish Configuring PPP OTO TAN O aS eS h A ee ony so Click START Setting Network and Dialup Select The connection Name In the General tab click Configure and set the speed to 38400 Check Enable Hardware flow control Uncheck Modem Error control Modem Compression Select Network tab Select Type PPP Select Internet protocol TCP IP and click Properties
121. applications SONET SDH Networks Cellular Networks MSC to BSC UPSR Ring ATM Networks Corporate Campus Networks LMDS Backhaul SONET SDH Networks FS thet Miran Sore Ferien wpe of Anjorin omani KIHETTOH frg hbi Smiti li a_i i ts ORT sce sewon loo Le X f pim a ae j i a 4 a 4 t fr Lape Compare as AMM Connection TENTEI C ee DED FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual istok Geounbopon nade SONET SDH Network Enhancement FibeAir 1500 1528 is a revolutionary compact wireless solution for metropolitan high capacity SONET SDH networks In access applications the system provides a last mile high bit rate connection to large corporate networks or to remote distribution node carrying data video and voice to multiple subscribers FibeAir includes an internal multiplexer that can provide a combination of OC 3 STM 1 DS3 E3 Ethernet Fast Ethernet T1 E1 interfaces As a SONET SDH network element FibeAir can perform ring closures ring interconnections and carry IP or ATM traffic over SONET SDH Chapter 1 Introduction Applications Cellular Networks MSC to BSC UPSR Ring u 34 y Ke a dn el f etait Cellular Networks MSC to BSC UPSR Ring High speed links allow for expansion of capacity in Cellular systems Especially well suited for creation of dense micro cells Microwave ATM Networks 1 4 ATM was originally designed for transmission over
122. ard the most popular encryption standard which is FIPS PUBS 46 3 Federal Information Processing Standards Publications compliant Encryption keys are the common secret between the source and the target used as an input for the encryption algorithm to encrypt the plain data or decrypt the encrypted data Encryption keys can be either symmetric or asymmetric A symmetric key requires the same secret key for both sides of the link An asymmetric key requires a different secret key for both sides of the link FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Encryption Algorithm Key Exchange Since using the same encryption key for a long period of time will degrade encryption reliability the key is replaced frequently safely securing the encrypted data Encryption Synchronization In order to decrypt the data correctly the decryptor at the receiver side must be synchronized with the encryptor at the transmitter side A synchronization protocol is used to keep both sides synchronized using the same key the same initialization vector and by starting at the same point Wireless Encryption Wireless connections are more complex to encrypt The need to overcome BER and fades in the radio channel while maintaining the radio system performance requires special handling The following figure shows a FibeAir encrypted link i jin Encrypted Data 4 o DPE 2 ri Plain Data FibeAir Encr
123. are Upload Report Example FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 21 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P Diagnostics To perform diagnostic operations 1 Inthe main menu shown in the section Getting Started at the beginning of this chapter select 4 Diagnostics The Diagnostics menu appears cum Hep T onal 7 Bi Ee Edt Yew Cal Torii Heip Dist SiS cli Alain Menu Diagebnt iss EWFER WEK InterFace Hone PIRI CRAMAGOM AT GID Diaqnest des Guilt he theft Drawer Hight Brewer Comers 00 4554 AHS S000 H ALI Figure 4 23 Diagnostics Menu Select the module on which you want to perform diagnostics by typing the number beside it The following screen appears for IDC om HppeiT amaai Edt Yee Cal Tinie lioki Cis mig 5 ol alDl Wade Hemm 3D FE Ee Dispartirs HEFER WEER interfere IDC PLARSIA CE OH HETHOREE LID IDE Dispsarticz ait Back Spply ere otura Lesp Timamt inismter Connecied MEZI BH Bant A Figure 4 24 IDC Diagnostics 4 22 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P The following screen appears for Drawer fie Ek Wer Cal pimai Pete pa a5 cil g j hin Memu DIGG Drarar Diag HIPER UFER lr os FIBEAIR CEF i 192 068 0 422 rawar Diagneastioes Quit Back Spply E Haus amp Return Drawer Lowphacks Sobtwares and bartuere vers ine Figure 4 2
124. arms If High Temp check alarm log file for FAN failure If it exists replace IDU Problem with line input from external equipment LINE LED Red loss of signal from line side loss of frame BER Yellow signal degraded JO mismatch External equipment Physical connection Refer to Interface Troubleshooting procedures later in this chapter 6 6 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting General Troubleshooting Guide in Protected Configuration mode but is currently not transmitting Condition Alarm Indication Probable Cause Corrective Action ODU Radio ODU Problem ODU LED 1 Check RSL level at the remote Red ODU power failure terminal Compare it to the calculated Yellow Tx Rx out of unfaded Rx level If range temperature there is a change of more than 3 dB in The Yellow condition will the Rx level change usually include indications the Tx power level in by the RMT LOF and the Local ODU BER LEDs as shown in the Configuration following figure window 2 Check if the ODU FPWR LIHE LOFEERLFEK is operating in MELT E Dr extreme temperature Epe per per t STEY IDUODUCELRMT conditions Such conditions may cause a variation of the Tx output power level Cable Short or CBL LED Cable Short Check cable Open connection Red Cable Open This stauts of this LED is refreshed every minute Rem
125. as described in this the result of improper or unsafe installation These installation Warnin pA g instructions have been written for qualified skilled personnel Refer to the following figure while performing the installation 2 bolts M8 x 25 2 washers 8 4 225 Bolt M8 x 25 U bolt M10 Bes ae 2 washers 10 5 230 Drain plug a 4 nuts M10 Bolt M8 x 30 Washer 8 4 SL nut M8 1 Bolt M8 x 30 Safety collar U bolt M10 2 washers 10 5 230 4 nuts M10 Bolt M8 x 30 ELEVATION spindle M8 x 145 Sain at AZIMUTH spindle M8 x 145 2 brass nuts M8 2 spherical washers C 8 4 safety collar and azimuth spindle 2 conical seats D 9 6 on request Figure 3 9 Antenna Assembly One Foot Antenna 3 16 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU 1 Place U bolt A and safety collar B around the pole at the desired height connect them and tighten in place at a 90 angle to the opposing site direction qo Safety collar Place around pole desired height and tighten Figure 3 10 Antenna Assembly cont Note The safety collar assembly shown in Figure 3 14 above A and B is used to align and support the antenna mount during installation and antenna alignment Once the mount is in place and alignment is completed all bolted joints of the antenna mount are tightened and there is no further need for the support provided by the safety collar assembly
126. asy installation and best weather immunity mount the ODU so that the connectors are facing down FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 21 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Rubber O ring attach ODU to mount using 4 latches Figure 3 17 Antenna Assembly cont 9 Connect the coaxial cable between the IDU and ODU using the N Type connector on the IDU and the ODU 10 Make sure that the fittings and the coax cable are clean and dry 11 Peel approximately 6 inches of COAX SEAL from the paper backing 12 Wrap isolation tape over the coax cover Start winding from coax cover towards fitting with one half overlap with each winding making sure all joints are well covered Figure 3 18 Steps 1 2 amp 3 13 After entire fitting and coax cable are covered with approximately 3 16 thick layers mold and form COAX SEAL with fingers to make a smooth surface and force out any air 3 22 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Figure 3 19 Step 4 14 If more COAX SEAL is necessary to complete seal simply cut the needed amount and add to existing COAX SEAL molding and press into the other material COAX SEAL adheres to itself with slight pressure Carefully inspect seal to make certain that all joints are covered Tip Connect and disconnect the IDU from the ODU only when power is off 15 Turn the IDU power switch to ON The LED display for FibeAir 1500
127. ation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Installing the IDU in a 19 Rack Installing the IDU in a 19 Rack The IDU can be installed in a 19 rack 1U using the rack mount kit Figure 3 2 Installing the IDU in a 19 Rack To attach the rack mount to the IDU follow these steps 1 Attach mount brackets to each side of the IDU and using the supplied screws attach them to the holes in the IDU side panel 2 Install the IDU unit in the 19 rack as shown in the illustration above 3 To power on the unit connect the WV 0001 0 cable supplied to the DC Input interface on the front of the IDU and connect the other side of the cable to the DC voltage supply White GND Green 48V Brown OV 4 When more than one unit is installed it is recommended to keep a gap of 1U between the units in the rack Important The user power supply GND must be connected to the positive pole in the IDU power supply FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 7 Chapter 3 Installation Installing the IDU in a 19 Rack Important Power Supply Connection Notes When selecting a power source the following must be considered e DC power can be from 40 5 VDC to 72 VDC e Recommended Availability of a UPS Uninterrupted Power Source battery backup and emergency power generator e Whether or not the power source provides constant power i e power is secured on weekends or is shut off frequently and consistently The power supply mu
128. ation Report This option generates a report that includes various parameters and their values such as system description software versions and serial numbers 1 Select File Configuration Report The Configuration Report window appears t P01 169 RE Figure 5 5 Configuration Report Window 2 Click Save to save the report in a file for later analysis or downloading FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 121 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Configuration File Upload Download This option enables you to upload a configuration file from a FibeAir unit to the management module or download a file from the management module to the FibeAir unit 1 Select File Local Remote Configuration File Upload from Element Download to Element The Upload Configuration File or Download Configuration File window appears upina a a A 0 160 k le E i Enter Local File Hans Figure 5 6 Upload Download Configuration File Windows 2 Click Browse locate the configuration file you want to use and click Upload or Download After the file is uploaded or downloaded changes will take place only after the unit is reset Software Download This option enables you to download IDU and MUX software updates 1 Select File Software Download A window appears for you to define the software download procedure 5 122 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Soliware Download a
129. ation and Operation Manual 3 3 Chapter 3 Installation Required Components and Equipment Required Tools and Equipment The following tools and equipment are needed to install an ODU 4 x N type connectors according to cable type Coaxial cable Insulation tape Ratchet wrench 3 8 Drive 10 mm nut driver 13 mm socket 3 8 Drive 13 mm open box end wrench Phillips screwdriver Sharp cutting knife Compass optional Torque wrench Digital voltmeter SDH analyzer PDH analyzer Packet analyzer CeraView PC Requirements 3 4 Before you install the CeraView software verify that your PC has the minimum requirements as follows Processor Memory RAM Operating System Display Monitor Serial Port Keyboard Mouse Pentium 4 1 2 GHz minimum 128 MB minimum Windows 98 2000 ME XP NT 800 x 600 minimum 16 384 colors minimum RS 232 Hyper Terminal FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Suggested Pole Installation Suggested Pole Installation The antenna can be installed on a ground tube roof or wall mount The ground tube or roof wall mount should be assembled and in place before installing the antenna mount Top View Wind Far Mounting Pipe Figure 3 1 Calculating Required Pipe Diameters Use the following table to determine the pipe diameters 30 cm 60 75 cm 120 cm 180 cm 240 cm 300
130. ation is provided in Appendix A Connecting to the Ethernet Port Connect a crossed Ethernet cable from your PC to the Ethernet Port If the connection is to a LAN wall connection use the standard Ethernet cable TX TX TX Tx Rx Rx Rx Rx Straight Cable Cross Cable Figure 3 3 Crossed and Straight Cable 2 Make sure the IP address on your PC is on the same sub net as you defined in the FibeAir indoor unit i e in most cases the first three numbers of the IP address must be identical depending on the sub net mask 3 Run the CeraView software from your computer Connecting to a PPP SLIP Port Remove the IDU cable from the TERMINAL port and connect it to the SERIAL port RS 232 Installing a PPP SLIP Driver Install a PPP SLIP driver in your computer Refer to Appendix A for details of installation in Windows 98 2000 NT The installation of the PPP SLIP driver is needed only for the first time that you operate the computer Setting the Baud Rate for serial connections 1 Double click on the My Computer icon of the Windows Program Manager The My Computer window is displayed 2 Double click on Dial Up Networking FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 11 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU The Dial Up Networking window is displayed On the icon which was added after performing the steps detailed in Appendix A SLIP Driver Installation click the right mouse button and select the Properties
131. ault Revertive mode may be required to support specific services whereby the shortest physical route offers better performance For example for synchronization of another network using protected E1 The main path will generally be shorter and the protection path will be longer If you don t select Revertive no switching to the original fault cleared path will be performed to prevent unnecessary traffic hits and management event reports Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Steps Chapter 6 Troubleshooting General Ceragon designed FibeAir to be highly reliable and relatively maintenance free In the event of a system failure the system will provide detailed indications to assist troubleshooting and fault isolation This chapter explains the alarm indications of the FibeAir system and contains procedures for troubleshooting and fault isolation Maintenance Policy To ensure simple and efficient system maintenance the on site technician will only replace IDU or ODU modules and not repair them Under no circumstance will the technician be permitted to open the equipment in order to repair a module or circuit board Opening equipment will terminate the Ceragon warranty Maintenance procedures the technician can perform include visual inspection cleaning cable connector repair link alignment adjustment and retorquing anten
132. ave is immediately fully initialized and thus has no radio or line frames loss Change Remote Transmitter Conditions The Master will send a Change Remote Transmitter command to the remote side using the SDH overhead in the following circumstances e Both local units detect radio frame loss for 1 msec In this case the CHANGE REMOTE TRANSMITTER message is added to the local Master event list e Ifthe problem persists the command will be sent once a second Change Local Master Conditions The Slave will initiate Change Master command in the following circumstances e The Slave receives a Change Transmitter radio message e The Mate OK indication via the communication cable from the Master is missing while the Slave does not have any errors on its line and radio interfaces and it recognizes a cable connection to its Protected port Initialization Process At the initialization process the first unit that activates will be set as Master e If two units become Masters on the same side before on inter mate cable connection has been made they will negotiate via the inter mate cable which one will take control e If both units are OK or both have LOF the unit with the higher MAC address will be set as the Master If the inter mate cable is disconnected when the units are in the Protected Mode e The Master will stay active and the Slave will stay in stand by Mute mode e The protection
133. ave the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus In band Configuration In band configuration is performed when you want to work with In band Management In band Management refers to a method whereby the network management software sends management packets through the same network it is managing This differs from out of band management in which the network management software uses a different network overlay network in order to communicate with the managed elements 1 Select Configuration Management System In band The In band Configuration window appears in band Configuration 10 10 10 169 PEI V in band Management Enabled Element Type Network element In band Channel Radio Line ecr PPPoE Time To Live TTL B4 4 Gateway Ring Subnet Address 92 168 1 0 Gateway Ring Subnet Mask Network ID Refresh Close Help Figure 5 19 In band Configuration Window Select In band Management Enabled to activate In band management For Element Type click the drop down list and select the desired element Network Element or Gateway For In band Channel click the drop down list and select the channel you want to use For Time To Live TTL use the up down arrows to select the desired value The Gateway Ring Subnet Address and Gateway Ring Subnet Mask fields are read only For Network ID use the arrow
134. bility 16 QAM 0 0005 128 QAM 0 001 Frequency Source Synthesizer RF Channel Selection Via NMS System Configurations Non Protected 1 0 Protected 1 1 Space Diversity Frequency Diversity FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 13 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation 311 Mbps 128 256 QAM Single Carrier 18 38 GHz Specification 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz Standards FCC ETSI FCC ETSI ETSI FCC ETSI ETSI FCC Operating 17 7 19 7 GHz 21 2 23 6 GHz 24 5 26 5 GHz LMDS A1 A2 37 38 4 38 6 Fequency B LMCS ETSI 40 37 39 5 Range GHz Tx Rx 1010 1560 1008 1200 1008 MHz 350 500 1008 700 1260 Spacing MHz 1232 MHz MHz MHz RF Channel 128 QAM 128 QAM 128 QAM 128 QAM 128 QAM Spacing 55 MHz 56 MHz 56 MHz 56 MHz 56 MHz 256 QAM 256 QAM 256 QAM 256 QAM 80 MHz 50 MHz 50 MHz 50 MHz For additional Tx Rx schemes please contact your Ceragon representative All Frequencies Capacity 311 Mbps Modulation Type 128 QAM 256 QAM Frequency Stability 0 001 Frequency Source Synthesizer RF Channel Selection Via NMS System Configurations Non Protected 1 0 Protected 1 1 116 Mbps 32 QAM Single Carrier 6 18 GHz Specification 6 GHz 7 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz Standards FCC ETSI ETSI FCC ETSI ETSI ETSI FCC ETSI Canada FCC Canada Operating 5 925 6 425 7 1 8 5 G
135. bnets you assigned to Joe match the IP he requested the subnet 172 24 30 0 is closer to the IP than the other one In order to obtain default Observer rights for IP addresses that do not match any of the subnets in the list you need to assign the subnet 0 0 0 0 Observer to the user and the subnet mask must also be 0 0 0 0 4 Click OK FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 9 Chapter 5 Operation CeraView Security Working with Users Once you create users you can perform several user related operations To perform a user related operation 1 Inthe main window expand the Users list and click the name of a user you want to work with 2 Inthe Edit menu select Configure User to modify the user configuration The User Configuration window appears shown above in the section Creating a New User 3 Change the user configuration as desired in accordance with the explanation provided in the Creating a New User section above 4 Select Copy User if you want to duplicate the user you selected The Copy User window appears i x Haired Tor Hive Lier Karena Paisg tor haw ie fete Figure 5 4 CeraView Security Application Copy User Window Enter the new user s name and password and click OK A new user will be created with the same access rights as the user you chose to copy 5 Select Delete User if you want to delete the user you selected Note that you cannot delete the Admin user 6 To import us
136. buttons to select the desired value Click Apply to save the settings Click Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 67 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Alarms Menu Current Alarms a a 1 Select Alarms Current Alarms or click the Current Alarms icon The Current Alarms window appears Cirront Alarme AMAT choc OL LS Descrission Et 2 Aleem Indication Signal ar i iat I A TRB Et 3 Alam indication Signal me Erpa Barm indication Skral i A tre me ET E Aleem indication Signal tre Et F T Alam indication Signed Tre EN amp Aleem indication Signal _ Tre Et amp Loss Of A ma JE 10 Lose CH Signal su Low Pama Alor recadon Signa m Lowt 1 Perth aa Arm erm inci son Signs epee Section Unexpected Signal tice Amr pra Arang ben DU Temperature Celsius ODU Temperature Casi E Figure 5 20 Current Alarms Window Each line in the window describes a different alarm The color in the Severity column indicates the severity of the alarm as shown at the bottom of the alarm list The source of the alarm appears in the Source column The Direction column indicates the transmission direction of the unit that generated the alarm The Description column provides information about the alarm In addition to the current alarms the current IDU and ODU temperatures are shown at the bottom of
137. ccccccccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeceaeeeeeaaeeeeneeseaeeesaeeseeeeeaes 7 9 6 15 GHz FibeAir System Diversity Protection ccccccseeeeececeeeeececeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeeseaeeseneeesees 7 16 FibeAir 1500P Protection oeae AEA 7 19 FibeAir 1500P Protected 2 2 Configuration cccccceecceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeneeees 7 21 Chapter 8 Line Interfaces ccissssccnisisnineiracedescwtcnrcninianiasasdeasenianeniucariandaisanendeanviuanadeas 8 1 GONE EE E A E T E E E E E E E E E E 8 1 Main Channel Interfaces ccccceeeseeceeeceeeaeeeeaeeceeeeeeeaaeseeaaesaeeeceaeeseaaesseaeeseeeeesaaeeseeneessaneeses 8 1 Wayside Channel Interfaces ccccccseeceeneeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeseaeeseaeeesaaeseeaaeseeeeeseaeeessaeeeneees 8 7 Order Wire Channel Interface ccecccccccceeeseeeeeeee cee aaiae aanne a aa aiaa ae aa daakini baaa 8 9 Wser Channel Interfaces eiie ierit nian lan ees 8 9 Appendix A SLIP PPP Driver Installation scsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeneees A 1 Installation for Windows 98 seie sien eniai eiten e aaea aeaii aaa ara e ii e aea aaea A 1 Installation for Windows NV aaa Sa r e a a aaea aa aa aaa a aea aa tall aaaea aihe eavedewe ina A 5 Installation for Windows 2000 ssssssssssssseessesessissrsssrsstnnstnnsttnntnutnnstnnstnnstnnsstnnnnuntnnnnnsnnnnnn A 7 Appendix B Connector Pin Outs cccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees B 1 Alarm I O Co
138. ck Close Explanation of TIM Events SDH provides path trace capability on different levels as follows Regenerator Section Trace JO JO is used to continuously transmit a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its ongoing connection to the intended transmitter In the FibeAir radio the JO byte is used for Link ID Path Trace J1 J1 is used to continuously transmit a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its ongoing connection to the intended transmitter Path Trace J2 J2 is used to continuously transmit a Low Order Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its ongoing connection to the intended transmitter J2 allows the user to verify VC 12 paths which is useful as a means of checking radio optical connections whenever changes are made The path trace ID can be determined by the user for VC 12 trails in each direction receive transmit separately The user can also display the actual received pattern for maintenance purposes The incoming string is checked against the expected receive string A discrepancy between the strings generates a TIM alarm or an AIS depending on what you decide for Path TIM activation If the trail is protected and you selected the AIS option a switch to the protection path will be performed in the event of TIM since AIS is one of the criteria for switching to protection Explanation of PLM Even
139. d E1 The main path will generally be shorter and the protection path will be longer If you don t select Revertive no switching to the original fault cleared path will be performed to prevent unnecessary traffic hits and management event reports FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 79 Menus Chapter 5 Operation 5 80 Select Send AIS on Low Path TIM PLM amp UNEQ El tributaries window only if you want Alarm Indication Signals to be sent in the event of TIM PLM and UNEQ see explanation of these events provided in the section Configuration Menu IDU Transport earlier in this chapter In the Trail List area select a row and click Manual Switch Direction if you want to switch the traffic direction of the active path This is a one time operation that will be cleared after the current trail configuration session ends Select Enable Auto Protection if you want the system to automatically switch the traffic direction upon detection of a fault in the current active path To deactivate Auto Protection select the relevant row and click Inhibit Auto Protection Note To select more than one row in the trail list hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation CeraView for FibeAir 1500P CeraView for FibeAir 1500P Main Window Title Bar Menu Bar Protection Icons The following section
140. d E1 T1 signal when E1 T1 Wayside channel is supported in hardware Red LOS in E1 T1 line Gray E1 T1 is not supported or Wayside channel is disabled ETH hardware activated Green or blinking green active Ethernet signal Gray no link or no cable IDC Green IDC OK Yellow configuration firmware mismatch or fan failure Warning Red hardware failure in IDC module Major RMT Red major alarm in one or both of the remote drawers Red local remote communication error Major Green OK Yellow minor alarm in one or both of the remote drawers If there are both minor and major alarms in the remote the LED will be red m indicating the worst alarm Yellow fan failure in the remote Prot Green protection cable OK Red protection cable failure Gray protection disabled Drawer Drawer Green drawer OK Yellow drawer in standby mode Red drawer hardware failure ODU Green ODU OK Red ODU failure CBL Red cable open Red cable short Red cable swap Green OK LPBK Green OK Red loopback in progress FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Physical View Drawer LED Name Indications Severity Radio Green OK wee Red LOF EXC Major Yellow SD Minor Line Red LOS LOF EXC Major
141. d Green nt 9 10 Shell 1 SHIELD Notes e Shell is connected to IDU chassis GND e The following pins are not connected 27 28 B 4 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Connector Pin Outs User Channel Cable Pin Out The following table lists the pin out of the DB9 user channel cable User Channel DB9 Shorted Rx data from radio OUT Tx data to radio IN Not connected Tx clock OUT OLN HPL wWwlLwnyn Rx clock OUT Modem PPP Cross Cable Pin Outs This section provides pin outs for the cross cable installed between the dial up modem and the FibeAir PPP interface DB9 to DB9 Cross Cable DB9 DB9 Male Male TX 2 a anana 2 RX RX 3 e o 3 TX DTR 4 e 1 DCD CTS 8 p 7 RTS RTS 7 A 8 CTS DCD 1 p 4 DTR GND 5 p 5 GND DB9 to DB25 Cross Cable FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual User Channel Cable Pin Out B 5 Appendix B Connector Pin Outs Protected System Cables Protected System Cables FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A Protected System Cable Connection The protected system cable is connected as follows Unit 1 Unit 2 TxD TxD RxD Gao RxD Self OK SS Self OK Mate OK Mate OK Self Master Self Master Mate Master e h Mate Master Echo Out Echo Out Echo In Pe aT Echo In Ground o Ground RJ 45 Cable Pin Out for Protected Systems Use a 20 cm cable with RJ 45 connectors at bo
142. d will cause appropriate alarms to be generated 3 Inthe E1 Ports area select or deselect the boxes to enable or disable the ports Note You can enable disable only ports that were mapped 4 The Line Coding area shows the coding method used for each E1 line Click Apply to save the settings 6 Click Close to close the window 5 62 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Radio 1 Menus Select Configuration Interfaces Radio The Radio Configuration window appears nalia Conhiquratiion 101010 169 Excessive Error fe m Reip Diredion T Aes Ce Eat Signa Degade fis neo Eoo BER Bt Emor Rate fes Fewest ooms rep Figure 5 15 Radio Configuration Window Ze In the Radio Thresholds area for Excessive Error click the drop down list and select the level above which an Excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link For Signal Degrade select the level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link The BER field is read only and shows the value above which a BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link In the Link Parameters area select the direction of the FibeAir radio For Link ID specify the identification number of the link Note When working with an IDU that has the LINK ID feature on one end and an IDU that does not have this feature on the other end set the LINK ID to 1
143. dded to all SNMP traps 8 Select S Save amp Return to save the settings and return to the Full Configuration menu 9 Restart the IDU Connecting to the IDU You can perform the physical connection to the IDU using one of the following methods Connecting via the Ethernet port Connecting via the serial port using PPP SLIP Connecting via the serial port using a dial up modem Connecting Via the Ethernet Port 1 Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port of the IDU If the IDU is connected directly to the computer use a cross cable If the IDU is connected to a LAN wall socket use a standard straight cable 2 Set the Ethernet IP address and mask to the IDU using the HyperTerminal The default Agent Ethernet IP address is 192 168 1 1 and the Agent Ethernet IP mask is 255 255 255 0 3 Make Sure the Ethernet IP address of your PC is on the same sub net as the IDU s Ethernet IP address and that the masks are identical 4 Check and change the Ethernet address of the PC as follows Windows 98 2000 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network Select the TCP IP Ethernet component that was installed on the PC and click Properties On the IP Address tab select Specify an IP Address and enter the appropriate IP address and mask FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 11 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A Windows NT Select Start gt Settings gt C
144. de Check the Serial Connection If the connection is via serial line check the serial line speed in FibeAir and in the Management station configuration In the terminal the serial line speed is specified using the IP Configuration menu Check the Ethernet Connection Verify that the Management station and FibeAir IP interfaces have the same net ID If they should not be included in the same network check the default router address After performing the verifications above if there is still a problem with network connectivity together with the system administrator check for firewalls and routing configuration errors FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 15 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FibeAir 1500 1528 Alarm Messages FibeAir 1500 1528 Alarm Messages The following table lists FibeAir 1500 1528 system alarm messages For messages specific to FibeAir 1500A 1528A or FibeAir 1500P see the relevant sections later in this chapter Message Severity ODU Power Supply status Major Synthesizer lock status Major TX level status Minor RX level status Minor Temperature status Warning IDU Power status Major Cable open status Major Modem Lock status Major Temperature Warning Loopback status Major External alarm 1 status External alarm 2 status External alarm 3 status External alarm 4 status External alarm 5 status Exter
145. der for initial alignment In this case loosen the azimuth bolts adjust azimuth and tighten in the position where the highest tone is heard If this does not help adjust elevation and then azimuth See directions below We recommend that two people perform this installation and alignment procedure one at each ODU site with some method of communications between them Loosen the nuts shown in the following figure and rotate the antenna and mount pointing it to the location of the opposing antenna Slowly sweep the antenna in azimuth using the azimuth adjustment nuts If the desired signal is not found increase or decrease elevation setting and repeat the azimuth sweep Loosen nut Loosen nuts and adjust azimuth Figure 3 20 Adjusting Azimuth One Foot Antenna with safety collar Elevation Alignment 3 24 Loosen elevation adjustment bolts and nuts to adjust elevation refer to the following figure Align pointer or edge of clamp with appropriate mark at the desired elevation reading Make an approximate setting Temporarily tighten elevation bracket nuts FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU IX Bi AA ATIN Loosen bolts Loosen nuts and adjust elevation Figure 3 21 Adjusting Elevation One Foot Antenna 16 Once you attain the highest audible tone disconnect the BNC headset adapter This completes initial alignment of the system
146. dio link 5 96 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation 6 7 8 Menus In the Trace Identifier area select JO Operation to use the JO byte as a trace identifier in the SDH RSOH If you activate JO use the Transmitted JO and Expected JO fields to define the IDU identifier string Select Send AIS on RS TIM if you want Alarm Indication Signals to be sent in the event of RS TIM Trace Identification Mismatch Click Apply to save the settings Click Close Fast Ethernet 1 Select Configuration Interfaces Left Right Fast Ethernet or click the Fast Ethernet interface area in the physical view of the CeraView main window Baji Fost Ftueriet Ceiillgaieatientys ale eel Ft Fast Ethernet Fast Ehara 2 i F Enae I Aula Magatialion 7 10 Bese C 100 Basel Hah Duplex F Full Duges Figure 5 14 Fast Ethernet Interface Configuration Window Note Two Fast Ethernet tabs will appear only if the unit is configured with a 2 x Fast Ethernet port Select Enabled if you want the channel to be active with alarm generation If Enabled is not selected the channel will be active but no alarms will be generated Select Auto Negotiation if you want the unit to determine the Fast Ethernet data transfer protocol automatically and operate accordingly If you did not select Auto Negotiation select either 10BaseT or 100BaseT and either Half Duplex or Full Duplex If the unit is c
147. dret fi TEE Ji anir Comiigpurston 010 110 169 ena MMS P adress Pima E Bai pate pests Sl Select Configuration Management System IP Configuration The IP Configuration window appears ME E Ethernet iP Mask pas 40 6 Defaut Router P Andress 192160 0 i Figure 5 13 IP Configuration Window 2 In the Ethernet Addresses area specify the Ethernet IP Mask and Default Router IP Address In the Serial NMS area specify the IP Mask Baud Rate and Modem Phone Number Click Apply to save the changes Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Trap Forwarding 1 Select Configuration Management System Trap Forwarding or click ah the Trap Forwarding icon The Trap Forwarding Configuration window appears Traps Con iguration LA FA 30 i 10 101 1 40 Managers P Ackdress Trap Port Bene Trap tor Alarma fiazten1 5 Afe 4 lest area a foo00 after lloras FO TF moos afez 4 Tempersture FTE rji iod a ie ps Se f Huen ssy T r sha cic eRwan O oC gt Stendard traps indude sarisi pumber System Faut G a F Use aitferent trap D for esch alarm type asenin x x T Send cher irape wih ters severity sewn Frrr F Send traps wh eotercied alane inair tatio _ En Severny j uk Hnos a Eveni m fe fe fv Hearibeai Period fO Mites cee EP Minor fy fF fF i Maior PFFF Orica Koe e F Saed A Ve h
148. e A DCE ee 5 indieatien Al DCE DOE Fa Tirang Gi f E Biyang DCE 15 r Ground ND Comm FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual B 11 Appendix C Antenna Information This appendix provides the following information e Instructions for mounting and installing antenna assemblies e Radiation pattern envelopes The appendix is provided in a separate booklet Please see the separate booklet provided with the FibeAir Family documentation FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual C 1 Appendix D Frequency Information The following tables list local frequencies and channels for the FibeAir system Please note that the Width and Separation columns represent MHz values FCC Channel Allocations 16 QAM Frequency 18 GHz Tx Low 18 GHz Tx High 23 GHz High Block Tx Low 23 GHz High Block Tx High 23 GHz Low Block Tx Low 23 GHz Low Block Tx High 24 GHz 29 GHz Tx Low 29 GHz Tx High 31 GHz Tx Low 31 GHz Tx High 38 GHz Block A High Tx High 38 GHz Block A High Tx Low 38 GHz Block A Low Tx Low 38 GHz Block A Low Tx High 38 GHz Block B Low Tx Low 38 GHz Block B Low Tx High 38 GHz Block B High Tx Low 38 GHz Block B High Tx High Width Separation Tx Range Rx Range 39650 40000 38950 39300 24 GHz antennas Radio Wave HLP1 26 Andrews VHLP1 240 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual D 1 Appendix D Frequency Tables Channel Allocations
149. e SNMP communities These are passwords that define access rights of different users If these are not identical to the definitions in the network management software CeraView or any other SNMP based software the authentication process will fail and access to the radio link is denied To configure the SNMP communities perform the following operations 1 Connect to the Terminal 2 From the Main Configuration menu select Full Configuration 3 From the Full Configuration menu select 2 SNMP Configuration The SNMP Configuration menu appears Fie Edi Yee Dal Traini bain Dias a5 cli a Connected T28 Gl 13 Figure 4 9 SNMP Configuration Menu 4 Select 1 Read Community and set it to public Users with this community will be allowed to read the link information but will not be allowed to change anything FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A 5 Select 2 Write Community and set it to netman Users with this community will be allowed to read and modify link information 6 Select 3 Trap Community and set it to public This password will be used by the IDU when it reports toa SNMP based manager The same password needs to be included in the manager itself 7 Select 4 Trap Option and set it to Standard Trap 0 In the Standard Trap option serial numbers will be added only to the private MIB traps Otherwise serial numbers will be a
150. e BER alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor MUX NO LINE BER Issued when the SDH SONET line BER EXCESSIVE ERRORS returns to a level above the defined level for excessive errors SDH Sonet Configuration menu MUX RADIO SIGNAL BER Issued when the radio BER drops below the DEGRADE defined level for signal degrade SDH Sonet Configuration menu To correct FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 19 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Alarm Log File Messages Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe BER alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor MUX NO RADIO BER Issued when the radio BER returns to a level SIGNAL DEGRADE above the defined level for signal degrade SDH Sonet Configuration menu MUX RADIO BER Issued when the radio BER drops below the EXCESSIVE ERRORS defined level for excessive errors SDH Sonet Configuration menu To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe BER alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor MUX NO RADIO BER Issued when the radio BER returns to a level EXCESSIVE ERRORS above the defined level for excessive errors SDH Sonet Configuration menu IDU POWER 5V Power Supply Problem in the IDU 5V power supply FAILURE To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Power supply alarm is still active contact your Ceragon di
151. e Source column The color in the Severity column indicates the severity of the alarm as shown at the bottom of the alarm list The unit associated with the alarm is indicated in the Origin column Note You can click on a column title to sort the information in the table accordingly In addition to the current alarms the current IDU and ODU temperatures are shown at the bottom of the window 5 104 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Alarm Log 1 Select Alarms Alarm Log or click the Alarm Log icon The Alarm Log window appears Gel Alarm Log 10 00 10160 RASED LOS ON FRR f FABE LOF ON RADOT i RAED CARR CASLE FEN SLEARED Mii UT FAL RAED Mo BONAL FMO ODL CLEARED MODEM INT F L FAEED ML aT FAL RAGED MODEM LMI FAL RAGED ODU CONH FAL CLEARED ODULCCWM FAL RAKED CARR CABLE OPEN PAGED LOS OHTEERE RAKED LOF OH RADNOF 1 Waa RAKED Mo SOMAL FOH ODU 1hsaa7 CLEAREO MODEM UT FAIL cent EE E line Plana Figure 5 23 Alarm Log Window A 156650 BEET ce ie FEAE yii iaie ee aL 155518 igo 15 S5E18 MELEE 193818 EERE TEET i A k A e amp La a a rielle eire aa t alno a n Sn S a Sh oe om The Alarm Log displays the last 200 alarms that occurred If the number of alarms exceeds 200 the first alarms will be removed Note The alarms in the window are not saved in a file unless you click Save The window displays the
152. e iF Figure 5 14 Trap Forwarding Configuration Window 2 Inthe Managers IP Address area specify the IP addresses of the managers to which you want traps to be sent For each manager IP you specify specify the Trap Port 3 Inthe Send Trap for Alarms of Group section you determine which alarms will be sent as SNMP traps to each manager In each manager column select the alarm types you want to include for that manager 4 For Send Trap for Alarms with Severity select the severity filter to determine which types of alarms will be forwarded 5 Inthe Trap Options area select Standard traps include serial number if you want trap messages to include the IDU serial number Select Use different ID for each alarm type if you want each type of alarm to receive a unique ID Select Send clear traps with zero severity if you want to receive information concerning clear traps Select Send traps with extended alarm information if you want the Alarm ID origin and unit from the current alarm table to be added to the end of each FibeAir related trap 6 For CLLI Common Language Location Identifier enter up to 18 characters that will represent your system ID when traps are sent FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 135 Chapter 5 Operation 5 136 Menus For Heartbeat Period a heartbeat signal will be generated every x minutes the number you enter to tell your system that the
153. e microcontroller in the IDU reads alarm inputs dry contact and transmits them to the CeraView management system This allows FibeAir to report external alarms that are not related to its own system For each alarm on the left side of the window do the following Click on the box next to the alarm number to enable disable the alarm If you enable an alarm enter a description of the alarm in the text field Select the alarm s severity level from the drop down list Major Minor Warning or Event FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup 7 Post Setup Procedure FibeAir provides five alarm outputs three for FibeAir 1500P that can be used by other systems to sense FibeAir alarms The outputs are configured on the right side of the window The alarm outputs are Form C Relays Each output relay provides three pins as follows Normally Open NO Normally Closed NC Common C Output alarms can be defined as any one of the following Major Minor Warning External Power BER Line Loopback LOF IDU ODU Cable Remote The default alarm output setting for each relay is Power The relays may be connected to customer specific applications Refer to Appendix B for details concerning the alarm connector pin assignments After you complete the configuration click Apply to save the settings Click Close Line Interface Connection After configuring the system in accordance with th
154. e power supply is OK this message is issued IDU CABLE IS OPEN Cable A sensor in the IDU detects that the IDU ODU cable is disconnected To correct Verify that the cable is connected properly IDU CABLE IS SHORT Cable A sensor in the IDU detects that the IDU ODU cable is shorted To correct 1 Disassamble the RF connector on both sides 2 Check for shorts in the cable DVM 3 Reassemble the RF connectors IDU CABLE IS OK Cable Previous error is cleared IDU MODULATOR FAILURE Modem Unsynchronized SDH Sonet clock with a large frequency offset this can happen also in loopbacks with external equipment in loop timing slave mode Internal hardware failure To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 If the Modem alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU MODULATOR OK Modem Previous error is cleared IDU DEMODULATOR FAILURE Modem Issued after several consecutive radio channel frame losses link disconnected To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Modem alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU DEMODULATOR OK Modem Previous error is cleared FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 21 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Alarm Log File Messages Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action IDU DEMODULATOR Modem
155. e previous sections the Line Interfaces can be connected to the IDU For a description of all available FibeAir line interfaces see Chapter 8 Note the following interface terminology For connectors or signals labeled TX the signals are sent from FibeAir For connectors or signals labeled RX the signals are sent to FibeAir FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 31 Chapter 5 Operation General This chapter explains how Ceragon s CeraView management software is used to configure and monitor FibeAir systems System Requirements The following are system requirements for the CeraView management software For Windows Specification Minimum Recommended Hardware Type Any type ss _ Processor Pentium 4 1 2 GHz Pentium 4 2 4 GHz or higher Memory RAM 128 MB 256 MB Available Drive Space 200 MB 1 GB Operating System Windows 98 NT 2000 ME XP Display Monitor 800x600 1024x768 16 384 colors True Color Serial Port RS 232 J HyperTerminal Ethernet Ports Po ES For UNIX Specification Minimum Recommended Hardware Type Blade 100 Ultra 5 Ultra 10 Memory RAM 256 MB 512 MB Available Drive Space 200 MB 1 GB Operating System Solaris 2 7 or higher Solaris 2 8 or higher Display Monitor 800x600 16 384 colors 1024x768 True Color Ethernet Ports 1 FibeAir Family Installation and Op
156. e to humans and or equipment Note The adapter plate can be connected to the mounting bracket facing down for Tx Low or up for Tx High The three nuts and bolts are fastened in three different holes depending on the direction you choose See the Installation Notes at the end of the procedure In both cases Tx Low or High the ODU N type connector must be faced down 2 Connect the gasket end of the flexible waveguide to the diplexer using the 8 screws provided with the kit Figure 3 33 Gasket End of Waveguide 3 34 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System Note The figure above shows the gasket end of the waveguide without the gasket A gasket must be inserted in the groove with silicon paste for proper sealing Figure 3 34 Diplexer Connected to Flexible Waveguide 3 Connect the ODU to the adapter plate using 4 latches no screws as shown in the following figure Latches Figure 3 35 ODU Connected to Adapter Plate 4 Before connecting the diplexer to the ODU apply silicon paste around the diplexer gasket Silicon paste is provided with the installation kit 5 Insert the diplexer into the adapter plate and ODU carefully making sure that the gasket has settled well in the ODU cavity 6 Tighten the diplexer with the waveguide to the adapter plate using 3 screws as shown in the figure below FibeAir Family Installation and Operat
157. e to the circulator FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 43 Chapter 3 Installation 6 8 GHz 1 1 System Installation 6 8 GHz 1 1 System Installation In a 1 1 Hot Standby system two ODUs are connected to a single antenna via a 6 dB directional coupler The coupler divides the incoming signal between the two ODUs whereby one ODU the primary actively processes the signal and the other ODU the secondary remains idle until a protection switch is executed The following diagram shows how the coupler operates Out 2 Secondary ODU In from antenna Out 1 Primary ODU Directional Coupler Note that in a 1 1 system one ODU must be defined as the primary master and the other as the secondary slave 3 44 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation 6 8 GHz 1 1 System Installation The following diagram shows two ODUs connected to a single antenna via a coupler TENNA COUPLER FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE EXTERNAL PIP LEER SUPPORT ODL FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 45 Chapter 3 Installation XPIC Installation and Comissioning XPIC Installation and Comissioning This section describes the installation and commissioning procedure for a FibeAir 1500 system in which the XPIC feature is installed in a Co Channel Dual Polarization configuration Antenna and ODU Installation 1 Install the dual polarization antenna and point it in the di
158. ectors or look straight at the laser beam ATTENTION The laser beam is invisible The use of optical devices with the equipment will increase eye hazard Use of controls adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure When working with FibeAir 1500P note the following risk of electric shock and energy hazard Diconnecting one power supply disconnects only one power supply module To isolate the unit completely disconnect all power supplies Contents Chapter 1 Introduction wiiceissscicecccccseesssesscaceeecseeeserassacasecueecsdvevensnnestancenesssearveasbaauee 1 1 FibeAir 1500 1528 iss ani a a aa a a caine 1 1 Fibes 1500A 528A gana e a e e a taaan 1 8 FibeAir T500 Pires csc caus cakes bees ea a a r a inca a a teeny a a aa aiai 1 12 FibeAir 15005 1528 Szr naana a e EE 1 14 FibeAr TS OOAL Tea aean a aae ra eeaeee eaa aa Tea AEE easter ee ae 1 18 FibeAir Family System Overview cccccceecceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeceaeeeeeaeeseneeesaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeeeaeeseneeee 1 19 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation cccccccceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeneees 2 1 FIDCAI 1500 1528 oa ite tena a a teat ten ee cert eoee tee onan 2 1 Fibes T5OQAM 528A triana enaa a Aaa e a aa Ta ete g aap cea at ey ai DEE iE 2 7 FIDGAI A500 P r a a S aa aaa a ae te ae a ae eal ett 2 9 FbeA OOA E Ta a ar a Aa ear aa Anaa eana ee aaa raran aaia aei 2 11 FibeAir Family System
159. ed for advanced users only 1 Select Configuration IDU Transport or click the Transport Configuration icon The Transport Configuration window appears F itr anata t aallgairalion Lot E High Path Taca kinti 711 F M Opersion fecemd J eat Line j 20GESS HUHI Waai Line acces wun 7 Essi Fato ACCESS MUX 2 F Semi d on High Path PLM E AEG Projo Tranipari Probios Ein Figure 5 3 Transport Configuration Window 2 Inthe High Path Trace Identifier J1 area select JI Operation to enable the identifier J1 is used to continuously transmit a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its ongoing connection to the intended transmitter Received J1 displays the identifier that is receieved for verification For Transmitted J1 specify the West and East J1 identifier that will be transmitted to the receiver For Expected J1 specify the identifier for West and East that you expect to receive Select Send AIS on High Path TIM if you want Alarm Indication Signals to be sent in the event of TIM Trace Identification Mismatch Select Send AIS on High Path PLM amp UNEQ if you want Alarm Indication Signals to be sent in the event of PLM Path Label Mismatch or UNEQ FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 53 Chapter 5 Operation 5 54 Menus 3 For Protocol select the protocol your radio is using 4 Click Apply to save the settings 5 Cli
160. egi m x H m w m o m m r S z a y a v x TASES Leo Edam LLA ki i aaria ji ah i Figure 5 20 Tributary Monitoring Graphic Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the Line UAS table described above 2 To view historical UAS values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 141 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Trail The Trail Performance Monitoring window displays trail signal levels measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours 1 Select Performance Trail Trail Number East West The Trail Monitoring graphic window appears Trail mman THAN AT ffeil FA JHF 01 OB 00 p irig 1 ahis arm Ona a 1045 1130 Bust Ehi Am ieee 14 ebb ithe 1 Se Mi beef 4 jia 1000 ee ee idee 1A 00 Viale bit eo jiii tarot aja a fa fa a ba fa Figure 5 21 Trail Monitoring Graphic Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minu
161. either side of the link operate at different frequencies and the FibeAir Hitless Switch described below determines which receiver is receiving the best quality data Frequency diversity allows the system to automatically select a frequency for which the channel performance is better than the other frequency Frequency diversity systems with a single antenna require a circulator to combine the systems The circulator is a three port waveguide junction whereby waves fed into the n port are outputed at the corresponding n 1 port 2 0 systems combine two FibeAir links on a single antenna using a circulator whereby each link operates at a different frequency The installation instructions in this section apply for both frequency diversity and 2 0 systems The following photo shows a closeup of a circulator installed in a frequency diversity 2 0 system Circulator FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 39 Chapter 3 Installation 6 8 GHz Frequency Diversity and 2 0 System Installation Connecting the Circulator The circulator is connected directly to one ODU diplexer and to the other ODU via flexible waveguide The following figure shows the three circulator ports ODU A1 Direct Connection to Diplexer Antenna ODU B1 via flexible via flexible waveguide waveguide As shown in the figure above the circulator connections are as follows e Direct connection to the ODU A1 diplexer e Remote connection
162. eive signal level is 44 dBm 4 Compare the value displayed on the DVM to the expected value 5 If the received signal level is within 4 dB of the expected calculated level tighten all bolted joints and remove the safety assembly It is important to verify that the antenna is aligned to the center lobe peak Proper alignment reduces the sensitivity to antenna movement Important which can be due to strong winds or any other forces FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Final Check Setting Up the IDU When the antenna is installed make sure that all aspects of the installation instructions have been followed Check that all bolted joints are tightly locked and connect and cover the coax cable connector as follows 1 5 Connect the coaxial cable between the IDU and ODU using the N Type connector on the IDU and the ODU Make sure that the fittings and the coax cable are clean and dry Peel approximately 6 inches of COAX SEAL from the paper backing Wrap isolation tape over the coax cover Start winding from coax cover towards fitting with one half overlap with each winding making sure all joints are well covered Figure 3 23 Steps 1 2 and 3 After entire fitting and coax cable are covered with approximately 3 16 thick layers mold and form COAX SEAL with fingers to make a smooth surface and force out any air Figure 3 24 Step 4 If more COAX SEAL is necessary to compl
163. el view in the main window Online Help used to view the online help file FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Physical View Physical View A physical view of the FibeAir unit is displayed in the Main window The view provides a virtual display of the IDU front panel Foes alee a Qa Figure 5 2 Physical View in Main Window The LEDs that appear on the left side in the physical view indicate the actual status of the LEDs on the front panel of the IDU The LEDcolors are as follows Green indicates proper operation Yellow indicates a warning Red indicates a major alarm or severe malfunction Notes e When changes occur in the LEDs of the actual units LEDs in the physical view in CeraView will be updated after a slight delay e When a hot swap occurs a front panel shelf is replaced while the FibeAir unit is operating the physical view in CeraView will be updated and continue its display e The physical view in CeraView includes several areas that you can click to open relevant configuration windows The areas include Serial Management Alarms In Out Radio Protection East West and the Interface FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 83 Chapter 5 Operation 5 84 The following table lists the front panel LEDs and their functions Physical View Drawer LED Name Indications Severity IDC E1 T1 hardware activated Green vali
164. electrical codes For North America equipment must be installed in accordance to the US National Electrical Code Articles 110 16 110 17 and 110 18 and the Canadian Electrical Code Section 12 Overcurrent Protection A readily accessible Listed branch circuit overcurrent protective device rated 15 A must be incorporated in the building wiring CAUTION This equipment is designed to permit connection between the earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor at the equipment Grounded Supply System The equipment shall be connected to a properly grounded supply system All equipment in the immediate vicinity shall be grounded the same way and shall not be grounded elsewhere Local Supply System The DC supply system is to be local i e within the same premises as the equipment Disconnect Device A disconnect device is not allowed in the grounded circuit between the DC supply source and the frame grounded circuit connection Before Installing the ODU IN WATCH FOR WIRES Installation of this product near power lines is dangerous For your own safety follow these important safety rules DANGER SSS Perform as many assembly functions as possible on the ground Watch out for overhead power lines Check the distance to the power lines before starting installation Do not use metal ladders If you start to drop the antenna or mast assembly move away from it and let it fall If any part of the antenn
165. elength Connector Used with Protocols supported Timing mode Coding method Maximum output to 9 125 fiber Receiver sensitivity Maximum input overload 1300 nm ST Single mode fiber STS 3c STM 1 OC 3 STS 1 FDDI TAXI and Fast Ethernet Retimed 4B 5B NRZ 8 dBm 31 dBm 8 dBm FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Line Interfaces FibeAir 1500P Electrical CX BNC Main Channel Interfaces Electrical 155 Mbps Connector Connector Used with Protocols supported Line coding Timing mode Range calculation Impedance DS 3 E3 Connector Used with Protocols supported Line coding Timing mode Range calculation Impedance 8xE1 T1 Connector Used with Protocols supported Timing mode Range Impedance FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual BNC Coax cable STS 3c STM 1 OC 3 CMI Retimed 12 7 dB at 78 MHz according to square root of frequency law 150 m is attainable using RG 59 B U cables cable length varies in accordance with type 75 QO BNC Coax cable DS 3 E3 DS 3 B3ZS E3 HDB3 Retimed 12 7 dB at 78 MHz according to square root of frequency law 150 mis attainable using RG 59 B U cables cable length varies in accordance with type 75 0 DB 44 Twisted Pair E1 T1 Retimed 100 m 120 0 100 Q 8 3 Chapter 8 Line Interfaces Main Channel Interfaces
166. ent has two ports and therefore splitters are not required Main Channel __ _ Wayside Channel __ ak User Channel _ ly a F 1 e eres ee ee Figure 7 9 Splitter Connection Turn the remaining two units one on each side By now you should have all four units working and the slave units should have yellow STBY LEDs lit 8 Connect management interface to each one of the IDU s If Ethernet port is used a small hub is required to connect the two IDU s If the remote side is managed via the user channel of the radio link as described in figure 7 4 connect both User Channel and Ethernet ports on both sides of the link to respective hub One of the hubs will be connected to a PC LAN to provide management access FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500A 1528A System Protection FibeAir 1500A 1528A System Protection The FibeAir 1500A 1528A Hot Standby 1 1 protection configuration is designed to ensure data link robustness and survivability in case of hardware or software failures and to enable maintenance and repair operations without affecting the live traffic Fast hardware based switching 50 ms allows fast recovery from failures and minimizes the link downtime due to equipment failure Using the same hardware for the main and backup links minimizes inventory costs and simplifies equipment and operation flexibility
167. ent to from external sources ie kele i i i i gi ODU Configuration used to configure the ODU Loopback used to configure and run loopbacks for testing and troubleshooting Online Help used to view the online help file Ebi Physical views of the FibeAir local and remote units are displayed in the Main window The views provide a real time virtual display of the IDU front panel Figure 5 11 Physical View in Main Window The LEDs that appear in the physical view indicate the actual real time status of the LEDs on the front panel of the IDU LED changes on the actual front panels of the units will be updated in the physical views after a slight delay The LEDcolors are as follows Green indicates proper operation FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 17 Chapter 5 Operation Yellow indicates a warning Physical View Red indicates a major alarm or severe malfunction The following table lists the LEDs and their indications LED Color Description Red Yellow Green Power X X Red power supply problem system not functional Line X X X Red no input to main channel High BER Yellow JO mismatch BER LOF Loss X X Red radio did not recognize information of Frame frame radio link problem radio LOF BER Bit X X X Red radio BER higher than radio Error Ratio excessive error threshold definition see Sonet SDH configuration
168. er 5 Operation Menus Versions The Versions window displays current software versions and relevant serial numbers It also displays software versions that will take effect after the unit is reset 1 Select File System Versions The Versions window appears Sottwere Herniora cereal hnanters Durat pirhe Veron be Ea O a G er Lal Sije iph See Fameg fareas a fa Corgaation Mecen in g 1 Configuration Moder ren_eig _1 4 Figure 5 4 Versions Window 2 Click the Serial Numbers tab for a list of current component serial numbers Sa riers mec 8 Ler Sime gt Sake ee in aT ai ET aa Tim ou zm om e Figure 5 5 Serial Numbers Window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 87 Chapter 5 Operation 5 88 Menus Software Download This option enables you to download the latest software versions 1 Select File System Software Download The Software Download window appears talt ware Draenio 00a Fina Localon DEWA Vaice ae ierk TFTP Server P Aiesa 1010 19 37 oc idr en arm in zert eer Fran aae freee re Sed j a Femara AK a gz o a o Fimme Moen rorem zetia Si e Codigurmbon Modan mam da anem Saisi a oer faze Peto O00 inismalaoenioad to D Lenan T Rigor Bon D Reset 0 acter Deretioad even all ioei Programs aor Drrenicad Log sit owran socty cove _ vow Figure 5 6 Software Download Window 2 T
169. er the last 30 days FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 73 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Tributaries The Tributaries Performance Monitoring window displays the UAS number of Unavailable Seconds per interval measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours on the E1 T1 interface 1 Select Performance Tributaries E1 The Tributary Monitoring graphic window appears Leial Ei Motion cere Lb het ba ne BM Oo oe ok ME AO GM hegty Lal y kii y cA m mi Gd x y wi y mi asad nah Figure 5 26 Tributary Monitoring Graphic Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above 2 To view historical UAS values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days 5 74 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Trail The Trail Performance Monitoring window displays trail signal levels measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours 1 Select
170. eration Manual 5 1 Chapter 5 Operation Installation Installation CeraView installation is a simple plug and play process that takes just a few minutes This section provides CeraView installation procedures for different platforms Installation for HP OpenView To install CeraView for HP OpenView 1 Run the CeraView installation program provided with the CeraView software The NMS platform selection window appears E Fiia Wah Kiikii Bir sinire ce ein Care ares he Ee meager ath 2 Select HP OpenView and click Next The HP OpenView directory location window appears Heme Chace the folder wee HH gener i ind 3 Click Choose and select the directory in which HP OpenView was installed If you want to restore the system selected default directory click Restore Default Folder 5 2 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Installation 4 Click Next CeraView integration files are installed in the HP OpenView directory Installation for SNMPc To install CeraView for SNMPc 1 Run the CeraView installation program provided with the CeraView software The NMS platform selection window appears Chere the Hehe Moregenesd you wari Cente ia be PErau i T BAB PAP penis Mariia 2 Select SNMPc and click Next The SNMPc directory location window appears aeen rheme ihe iiris emer SHRP a odie cA l 3 Click Choose and select the directory i
171. ere malfunction The following table lists the LEDs and their indications LED Color Description Red Yellow Green Power X X Red power supply problem system not functional Line X X X Red no input to main channel High BER Yellow JO mismatch LOF Loss X X Red radio did not recognize information of Frame frame radio link problem radio LOF BER Bit X X X Red radio BER higher than radio Error Ratio excessive error threshold definition see Sonet SDH configuration window Yellow radio BER higher than radio signal degrade threshold definition see Sonet SDH configuration window LPBK X X Red loopback is active Loopback STBY X X Yellow Protected configuration The unit Standby is currently passive or Tx mute is operating IDU X X X Red modem unlocked Yellow high temperature fan problem CBL Cable X X Red RF cable open RF cable short RMT X X X Red no link remote unit problem red Remote LED is lit in the remote unit Hiit Yellow warning in remote unit yellow LED is lit in the remote unit 8xE1 T1 x Green Connected E1 T1 tributary FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 119 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Menus The following sections describe the CeraView window menus File Menu 5 120 System Information This option allows you to view and define information for the FibeAir system 1 fe Syste
172. error free channels e g fibers Radio transmission is challenged by ATM and ATM s basic and simple error correction mechanism needs to be strengthened for transmission over actual radio links Ceragon has chosen an ATM design solution one that significantly improves the important cell transfer parameters Furthermore Ceragon s approach is optimized for ATM transport but is also suitable for high performance transmission of other payloads e g SONET SDH Packet over SONET No special configuration via management is required for any payload type The FibeAir system is optimally designed for microwave ATM transmission Advanced algorithms minimize cell loss CLR and cell miss insertion CMR and together with error correction mechanisms ensure fiber like quality transmission The system can be integrated with ATM NTUs Network Termination Units and ATM access concentrators offering a wide variety of access solutions in capacities ranging from DS3 E3 to 155 Mbps FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Applications Fiber 155 622 Mops Wy m m 2 iti Gets e ATM Saith Prete ary SSR ssa72 vem a er pa fia TLEN ea Tei Notari 5 ma apan PAGE E hel Microwave ATM Networks FibeAir 1500 1528 supports various services CBR VBR and ATM UNI at the customer premises Designed for the most demanding data applications FibeAir 1500 1528 meets the most stringent QoS requ
173. ers from an external file to your current CeraView session in the main window select File Import Users To export users from your current CeraView session to a different CeraView session in the main window select File Export Users Creating a New User Group User groups can be assigned collective rights to different CeraView components To create a new group of users 1 In the main window click Groups and in the Edit menu select Add read only Group or Add read write Group If you select Read Only Group initially the group will only have read only access rights If you select Read Write Group initially the group will have read write access rights 2 Enter the name of the group in the window that appears and click OK 5 10 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation CeraView Security Working with Groups Once you create groups you can perform several group related operations To perform a group related operation 1 In the main window expand the Groups list and click the name of the group you want to work with In the Edit menu select Configure Group if you want to rename the group Note that you cannot rename the Admin group Select Copy Group if you want to duplicate the group you selected In the Copy Group window that appears enter the group s name and click OK A new group will be created with the same access rights as the group you chose to copy Select Delete Gr
174. ersity Space Diversity The Space Diversity method uses two FibeAir links with one active transmitter and two active receivers on each side of the link Each receiver is connected to a different antenna and the two antennas are vertically separated from each other When more than one path from transmitter to receiver exists due to atmospheric and surface conditions time delays may result in degraded signal levels Vertical separation reduces the probability that the receivers will receive the same signal degradation level caused by multipath conditions When two different paths are used for transmission the best of the two can be selected for data transfer at any given time The FibeAir Hitless Switch described below determines which path is delivering the best quality data An important advantage of the Space Diversity method is that it uses only one frequency channel Frequency Diversity The Frequency Diversity method uses two FibeAir links with two active transmitters and receivers on each side of the link connected to one or two antennas The two transmitters on either side of the link operate at different frequencies and the FibeAir Hitless Switch described below determines which receiver is receiving the best quality data Frequency diversity allows the system to automatically select a frequency for which the channel performance is better than the other frequency 7 16 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual
175. erver Host Address Security Server Port Number The IP or host name of the logger server If left blank logging will be disabled The number of the port from which the logger will receive data CeraView s Security Server IP or host name Leave this field blank if CeraView security is run locally The number of the port from which the Security Server will receive data FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation CeraView Configuration File Transfer File Transfer Configuration In the File Transfer Configuration section you can configure the following TFTP Server Address TFTP Files Location TFTP Timeout TFTP Retries Use Internal TFTP Server 3 Advanced Advanced Configuration Trivial File Transfer Protocol server IP You must enter an IP associated with your PC The directory in which the network element software files are located If you installed Poly View make sure the same location is specified in the Poly View configuration The value seconds determines when the TFTP server will time out after a request The value seconds determines the maximum number of times a TFTP request will be made to an element after a timeout Select True if you are using an intrenal TFTP server Select False if you are using an external TFTP server If you installed Poly View on this PC select False since Poly View uses its own TFTP server In the Advanced Configuration sec
176. eseaeeeseaeeeeeeeseeeesiaeeesaeeseaes 5 16 CeraView for FibeAir 1500A 1528A oe eceececeeeceenee seer ee ceaeeeeeaeeseeeeseaeeeseaeeeeaeeseeeeeesaeeseaeeeeaes 5 44 CeraView for FibeAir 1500P cccceeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeceaeeeeeeeseeeeesaaeeesaaeeseeeeseaeesseaeeseaeeeeaes 5 81 CeraView for FibeAir 1500AL cceeececceeceeeneeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeeceaeseeaaeseeeeeseaeessaeeseneeee 5 117 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting sssssssnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 6 1 Generaler esin E E S E E E E tha ast E S 6 1 Maintenance Foly ea r AAA AE sens Rdneiamneand Abseity 6 1 ViStal INSPECTION mo e a fey a A a AO A 6 2 THOUBDISS MOON G rirnan taer aiaa AE E A tas ee AEE ast nan Fat pe nea eens EA 6 2 FibeAir 1500 1528 Alarm MeSSQQ6S ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeaaeeeeseaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeneaas 6 16 Alarm Log File Messages ys gi scecisceseceiseesdebhscetechecentacensnecerebedeebaghedencacensnecacebeskineeeseebechbdencdevebed 6 17 FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages e iae aa e E a a E a ER 6 25 Hitless System Alarm M SSaQES ccccecceeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeaeeeeaaeeseeeeeceaeeesaaesseneeseaeeesaaeeseneeseaees 6 33 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration cccccccesseesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 7 1 FibeAir 1500 1528 Protection 0 cccceesceceeeeeseeeeeesaeeceeeeeteaeeeeaaeeseeeeceaeeeeaaaesseeeeseaeeeeaesseaeeesaes 7 1 FibeAir 1500A 1528A System Protection
177. ess is 192 114 35 12 11000000 01110010 00100011 00001100 and the IP mask is 255 255 255 0 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 the netid is 192 114 35 and the hostid is 12 An IP interface can only communicate with hosts that are on the same net have the same netid In the example above the interface can communicate only with hosts that have netid 192 114 35 for 1 to 255 If FibeAir has a frame to send to a host that is not on the Ethernet IP netid or the serial IP netid the frame sould be sent to an intelligent device usually a gateway on the network Such a device known as a default router will know how to send the frame over the internet The default gateway should be a host on one of the FibeAir interface netids The following figure shows how FibeAir is integrated in the local network Management station 192 114 35 11 Default Router 192 114 35 1 IP address 192 114 35 12 SOGC9UOGOb900G005 COGO9DNG 06900600090 Laptop computer FibeAir1500 Laptop IP address 192 168 0 2 192 168 0 1 IBM Compatible Remote host 194 12 78 11 3 10 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Installing CeraView Management Software 1 Insert the CeraView CD in the CD drive 2 Via Windows Explorer or the File Manager double click the setup exe file The installation program begins installation 3 Follow the instructions displayed SLIP PPP driver install
178. et Figure 7 4 Single Side Management FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration Protection Switch Triggers Shared Antenna In the shared antenna configuration two ODUs share one antenna as shown in the following figure Flexible Wave Guide 7 RF Combiner splitter Two identical ODUs 4 Latches easily connect each ODU to mount IF Cables RG 8 or RG 223 155Mbps Protected Mode Main Channel Interface Connection Splitter Box Optional Figure 7 5 Shared Antenna Configuration Master and Slave Port Status The slave RS232 and Ethernet SLIP management interfaces are active and the traffic interfaces main channel user channel and wayside channel are in receive only mode This configuration does not allow the slave to transmit any data The master management and traffic interfaces are all active the unit receives and transmits data 7 4 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration Initialization Process Protection Switch Triggers The following triggers cause protection switching e LOF line e LOF radio e ODU cable disconnection e Manual command via SNMP e Power off in on line system e Excessive BER radio not line threshold passed configurable between 10 to 10 e External alarm input 8 present after config The master switch is only activated if the Slave is fully operational When operational the Sl
179. ete seal simply cut the needed amount and add to existing COAX SEAL molding and press into the other material COAX SEAL adheres to itself with slight pressure Carefully inspect seal to make certain that all joints are covered FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 27 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Safety and Grounding The pole antenna mount assembly and feed cables must be grounded in accordance with current national and local electric codes to protect from surges due to nearby lightning strikes The following figure illustrates a typical grounding method Clamps that provide a solid connection between ground wire and ground source should be used Figure 3 25 Grounding the ODU Assembly The ODU installation and initial alignment is now complete Repeat this procedure for the opposing ODU 3 28 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Installation Verification Installation Verification Using the Headset and Buzzer Connect a headset to the headset connector on the IDU both sides verify communications and test the buzzer also on IDU front panel Note that to use the headset the Engineering Order Wire option must be set to active The Engineering Order Wire is an audio connection between the two indoor units Verifying Activation of Engineering Order Wire EOW To verify that the Engineering Order Wire EOW option is activated follow these steps 1 Select C
180. etwork A 4 me k e tie Lal ome mi om tty Getigii FibeAir 1500A 1528A Integrated in a Wireless Wireline Network The following illustrations show FibeAir 1500A 1528A wireless network possibilities FibeAir 1500A 1528A Integrated in a Wireless SDH Access Ring FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Applications Typical UMTS Network Topology Level O Mational network Diii amp SDH Level 1 Regional network DWDM amp SDH Level 2 Local network SDH Radic amp fibre Level 3 Access network SDH PDH Radio Generic UMTS Network Topology FibeAir 1500A 1528A with its integrated ADM can provide the basis for the Level 1 and Level 2 rings shown in the illustration above FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 11 Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir 1500P FibeAir 1500P Feaures FibeAir 1500P is Ceragon s modular ultra high capacity network connectivity solution designed to meet growing market demands for increased spectral efficient systems FibeAir 1500P is designed to deliver double the capacity using a single 28 MHz channel In addition the system is modular easy to install and a cost effective alternative to fiber With FibeAir 1500P operating in co channel dual polarization CCDP mode using the cross polarization interference canceller XPIC algorithm two STM 1 signals can be transmitted over a single 28 MHz channel using vertical and h
181. faces are available as modular plug in interface units Protection Protection Methods 1 1 HSB space frequency diversity hitless errorless switching 2 2 HSB Network Management Diagnostics Status and Alarms Type SNMP in compliance with RFC 1213 RFC 1595 SONET MIB Local or Remote PolyView CeraView with advanced GUI for Windows 98 2000 XP NT or UNIX NMS Station integrated with HP OpenView NMS Interface Ethernet bridge 10Base T RS 232 PPP SLIP built in Ethernet hub Local Configuration and Monitoring Standard ASCII terminal serial RS 232 In Band Uses standard embedded communications channel dual port built in Ethernet hub Management TMN Ceragon NMS functions are in accordance with ITU T recommendations for TMN External Alarms FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A 8 Inputs TTL level or contact closure to ground 5 outputs Form C contacts software configurable FibeAir 1500P 5 Inputs TTL level or contact closure to ground 3 outputs Form C contacts software configurable RSL Indication Accurate power reading dBm available at IDU ODU and NMS Performance Monitoring Integral with onboard memory per ITU TG 826 The voltage at the BNC port is not accurate and should be used only as an aid Environment Operating Temperature Guaranteed Performance ODU 35 C to 55 C IDU 5 C to 45 C Relative Humidity ODU up to 100 all weat
182. ference Rx Level field should be set to the desired Rx level in ATPC mode The Monitored Rx Level field read only displays the received power level FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 27 Chapter 5 Operation 5 28 Menus 9 Click Apply to save the settings 10 Click Close to close the window Interfaces STM 1 Note Different interfaces are configured in different windows Select the interface you want in accordance with the procedure below and configure it as desired Below are two examples of interface configuration 1 Select Configuration Local Remote Interfaces STM 1 The STM 1 Configuration window appears W Local STM Canfigurstion 10 10 10 100 ME Ei Fiber STHA Thresholds Regenerator Section Trace kiertinier J0 ExcessiveEror fieco F sO Operanon BER Et Error Rata fle t3 Recevea a RBEARTSOG Transrated ao REEARI D0 Expected BEAR S00 F Gand AG on FS TM Ay aen cme Hee Figure 5 22 STM 1 Interface Configuration Window 2 In the Excessive Error field select the level above which a line Excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link 3 In the Signal Degrade field select the level above which a line Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link 4 The BER field is read only In the Local Fiber STM1 field select Enabled to activate the interface with alarm generation If Enabled is not selected
183. figuration IDU AuxiliaryChannel The Auxiliary Channel Configuration window appears Suiniliary Channel LA 9 1 ni k Dus Ei Veyi Charra Era Lett D Ermbie Right Mety Fire coe Helo Figure 5 2 Auxiliary Channel Configuration Window 2 Select EOW Cascade Enabled and the Right Left channel to activate the EOW Engineer Order Wire channel 3 Select Enable Right Left to activate the Wayside channel The window above shows E1 Wayside channels Different channels may appear such as T1 or RJ 45 bridge according to the system configuration 4 Click Apply to save the settings Click Close Transport The Transport Configuration window allows you to configure the communication protocol 1 Select Configuration IDU Transport The Transport Configuration window appears iat Treeport carl hur stinn Proocal Transport Protocat era er aeren cee e Figure 5 3 Transport Configuration Window CIO 2 Click the drop down list and select the protocol your radio is using 3 Click Apply to save the settings 4 Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 93 Chapter 5 Operation Menus 5 94 ODU L R 1 Select Configuration ODU Left Right ODU Configuration or click the K w Left Right ODU Configuration icon The ODU Configuration window appears mert ODU Comiiquration 10 1012 43 ODU Panamneters ikRanes JES S705 Hr Ghamai Spacing 20
184. functions IDC Drawer The drawer on the left side of the IDU front panel Includes IDC IDU Controller Wayside channel optional and replaceable fan unit Carrier Drawers The drawers to the right of the IDC Drawer Include multiplexers modem interfaces line interfaces and power supply units IDC IDU Controller Handles configuration and control of all functional units including trail configurations protection algorithms network management tasks performance monitoring alarms detection generation and diagnostics Multiplexer Receives data delivered via different communication protocols such as DS 3 Ethernet etc and converts it to a standard SDH framework for transmission through the air On the receiving end this module separates the SDH payload and overhead and reconstructs the original data that was converted Power Supply The ODU receives its DC power from the IDU The PWR LED on the front panel of the IDU continuously lights to indicate the existence of input voltage The DC input range is 40 5 VDC to 72 VDC Modem Upon transmission performs data conversion from the baseband frequency to the IF frequency Upon receiving performs data conversion from the IF frequency to the baseband frequency It also performs AGC Automatic Gain Control Line Interface Performs data framing and scrambling and LOF detection FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation FibeAir 1500AL
185. guration File or Download Configuration File window appears f 4 Lipo Config Hon Pile 00 10 18 60 sees Figure 5 15 Upload Download Configuration File Windows Click Browse locate the configuration file you want to use and click Upload or Download FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus After the file is uploaded or downloaded changes will take place only after the unit is reset Software Download This option enables you to download IDU ODU and MUX software updates 1 Select File Local Remote Software Download A window appears for you to define the software download procedure Sotware Download ADM clock 100 E Filet Locator D icara ay cara irea TFT Serrar iP Addresa 10101137 ou ioo a nel mux Maende Seet cew E a e Reset After Doariosd hen all suceeded Figure 5 16 Software Download Window The Files Location field shows the directory in which the software files are located The TFTP Server IP Address field shows the IP of the TFTP server used to download the software 2 Click Select to choose the software file you want to download jara omu liia 50u 45500 1456_D ACW las7_ opu liasa Duu ic cy Figure 5 17 Software File Selection Window 3 Select the file you want and click Choose FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 23 Chapter 5 Operation Menus 4 Select Reset After Download if you want the
186. h quality data transfer integrity and simple connectivity Protected systems supported by FibeAir 1500P include the following e STM 1 1 1 internal e 2xSTM 1 1 1 311 Mbps over 28 MHz using XPIC external protection with 2 IDUs e 311 Mbps 1 1 over 56 MHz internal Internal Protection FibeAir 1500P protected systems offer high quality data transfer integrity and simple connectivity Since the internal protection mechanism is implemented within the IDUs no additional cabling is required The internal protection is valid for 155 Mbps and 311 Mbps carriers since FibeAir 1500P can include two front panel IDMs In Door Modules Note that for internal FibeAir 1500P protection both IDMs must be configured with the same carrier External Protection FibeAir 1500P systems working with the internal XPIC mechanism can be protected externally using 2 IDUs with an additional cable connecting between the 2 IDCs IDU Controllers In externally protected FibeAir 1500P systems IDU units are connected via an internal RJ 45 8 pin protection cable with the following pinout Pin Function GND Self_Actv_Stby Self_Priority SCC_Tx Self_Cable_Exist Mate_Priority Mate_Actv_Stby SCC_Rx Mate_Cable_Exist GND CO NI IO Oa FR oO rm Switch Time The entire switching mechanism time is less than 50 ms FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 19 Chapter 7 Protection Conf
187. hat is receieved for verification For Transmitted J1 specify the West and East J1 identifier that will be transmitted to the receiver For Expected J1 specify the identifier for West and East that you expect to receive Select Send AIS on High Path TIM if you want Alarm Indication Signals to be sent in the event of TIM Trace Identification Mismatch Select Send AIS on High Path PLM amp UNEQ if you want Alarm Indication Signals to be sent in the event of PLM Path Label Mismatch or UNEQ For Protocol select the protocol your radio is using Click Apply to save the settings Click Close Explanation of TIM Events SDH provides path trace capability on different levels as follows Regenerator Section Trace JO JO is used to continuously transmit a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its ongoing connection to the intended transmitter In FibeAir the JO byte is used for Link ID FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Path Trace J1 J1 is used to continuously transmit a Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its ongoing connection to the intended transmitter Path Trace J2 J2 is used to continuously transmit a Low Order Path Access Point Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its ongoing connection to the intended transmitter J2 allows the user to verify VC 12 paths which is useful as a
188. he Files Location field shows the directory in which the software files are located The TFTP Server IP Address field shows the IP of the TFTP server used to download the software Click Select to choose the software file you want to download from a list that opens in a separate window Select an option for Perform ODC Internal Download if you want an internal ODC download for the right drawer left drawer or both drawers If you select an option the download will occur automatically after the ODC download is completed Select Reset IDC after Download if you want the unit to reset after the files are downloaded successfully In the Software Download window click Apply The Progress bar in the Software Download window shows how the download process is progressing To terminate the process click Abort Results of the operation appear in the Download Log area FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Configuration Report This option generates a report that includes various parameters and their values such as system description software versions and Tx Rx frequencies 1 Select File Configuration Report The Configuration Report window appears rt 10 L i ALLUS trer H Ee npin Finir 3129 mari ayeloniact H Eiez Tm pinea or iiD i DU Sorleare Version Thi rotenone le i HE Sodware ersion qneahene Version 1 E eron Sarees De a
189. he Min RSL column shows the minimum received level measured during the interval The Max RSL column shows the maximum received level measured during the interval The Integrity column indicates whether or not the values received at that time and date are reliable A red x icon in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure event that occurred at that time This column corresponds to the Doubtful indication in the graphic window Click Advanced for the additional Threshold 1 Exceeded and Threshold 2 Exceeded columns which list the number of times RSL thresholds specified in the main RSL Monitoring window were exceeded 2 To view daily RSL values over a one month period click History Day Hivbery Lical 1S Menor cerapan aF Re Sarees chee bor corre cee cae fea winrar a hee Mane Maw AEL Tertanceh Exceeded Tiam Exceed Ob dete E ail E UE dunt i3 i ia ai Meyi i5 a i i ies 4 i Tj Cbs fa T 1 a i r Bed 15 mi I E Pi ii i uz same mn cman tp Figure 5 25 RSL Monitoring History Window The values shown in the window are values that were received over the last 30 days Note Since the current day s data is not complete until the end of the day its partial data is presented above the main table area Click Save to save current values in the table to a file FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 107
190. he period of time the inactive channel must be free of faults before it can carry traffic again The value can be from 0 to 60 seconds The default is 0 seconds For Wait to Restore Time use the arrow buttons to set the period of time from switching to the protection path back to the main path This parameter is only relevant when the Revertive mode is active The value can be from 5 to 12 minutes The default is 5 minutes Click Apply to save the changes FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 57 Chapter 5 Operation 5 58 Menus 18 Click Close to close the window and return to the Trail Table window 19 In the Trail Table window click Apply to save the changes 20 Click Close to close the window Synchronization Synchronization configuration enables you to set values for the network s clock synchronization 1 SSM Mode Swit id Skio issie Primery Glock Porometers r Secondary Cock Porometers 7 Spurbe pric ial Toues F Quaity Prc Gamay su Select Configuration IDU Synchronization or click the Clock area in the CeraView main window FibeAir physical view The Synchronization Configuration window appears Sym hronizalion Configuration Oren 10 0 ME Ea intemal Cock Lind wa Et am Statue T hoced D Cam of Rage Figure 5 11 Synchronization Configuration Window 2 The Internal Clock Unit area displays the current clock unit type state and status
191. her operation IDU up to 95 non condensing Altitude Up to 4 500 m 15 000 ft Power Input Standard Input 48 VDC DC Input range 40 5 to 72 VDC up to 57 VDC for USA market Optional Input 110 220 VAC FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 21 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Power Consumption Power Consumption Maximum ODU Power For 1 0 40W Consumption For 1 1 63W Maximum IDU Power FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A Consumption For 1 0 66W For 1 1 130W FibeAir 1500P For 1 0 25W For 1 1 2 0 40W Mechanical ODU 25 cm diameter x 23 cm depth 10 diameter x 9 depth Weight 8 kg IDU 4 3 cm height x 43 2 cm width x 24 cm depth 1 7 x 17 x 9 4 Weight 3 kg IDU ODU Coaxial Cable RG 223 100 m 300 ft Belden 9914 RG 8 300 m 1000 ft or equivalent N type connectors male Double shielded cable is recommended to avoid IF interference from external transmission systems 2 22 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation General This chapter explains how to install and set up the FibeAir Family system For best results perform all operations in the sequence in which they are presented in this chapter Note Instructions regarding ODU installation for a 6 7 or 8 GHz FibeAir system are provided in the section ODU Installation for FibeAir 6 7 8 GHz at the end of
192. iguration FibeAir 1500P Protected 2 2 Configuration Switching Criteria The FibeAir 1500P Protection mechanism will perform a switch from a main unit to a secondary unit based on a Priority Table The Priority Table below lists all the events that can trigger a protection switch in order of their importance Priority State 1 Lockout Force Switch Chng_Rmt_Radio_LOF Radio_EXCB Chng_Rmt_Radio_EXCB Manual Switch NIIAJ AJOJN External Alarm Lockout user configurable no switching is allowed on the local side Force Switch a switch performed by the user Radio_EXCB Excessive BER 10 107 from the radio The BER will be calculated in the IDC and an indication will be sent to the protection Manual Switch a switch request from the user applicable when all other priorities are cleared External Alarm an alarm generated by an external source LED Indications LED indications on the FibeAir 1500P front panel relevant to protected systems include the following Drawer LED Possible Indications Severity Carrier Shelf Green active Yellow standby 3 Red protection related MUX Modem Major hardware failure or Protection mismatch IDC Prot Green protection cable OK Red protection cable failure no cable SCC communication failure Gray no protection Software Configuration For information on how to configu
193. ilicon paste for proper sealing Diplexer connection between the common port and the antenna is implemented using a flexible waveguide shown in the figure below 3 32 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System Figure 3 30 Flexible Waveguide Note that it s important to know the required waveguide flange type Ceragon s default flange is CPR112F However depending on the client s equipment the diplexer can be provided with a different flange type In addition see the section Flange Mating at the end of this chapter for information about compatible flange types The diplexer is connected to the ODU via an adapter plate The plate is then connected to the pole using a mounting bracket shown in the figure below Figure 3 31 Diplexer Adapter Plate In the figure above the diplexer adapter plate is connected to the pole using a mounting bracket FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 33 Chapter 3 Installation ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System Installation Procedure To install the 6 7 8 GHz FibeAir ODU with diplexer 1 Connect the adapter plate to the pole via the mounting bracket using three nuts and bolts provided with the assembly kit Figure 3 32 Mounting Bracket Connected to Pole Warning Make sure the nuts and bolts are tightened properly and the washers are in place A loosely installed ODU may fall and cause damag
194. ily Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P The following screen appears for Drawer algi j l FIBEALH GERY c L 2 168 21 121 farrier Lege Mane gEinn Log Eolecti Connected DURE 2 jaksi Tan O CAPE Bd ru ma act Figure 4 29 Drawer Log Options 3 Select the number beside the log report you want to view The following screen is an example of a drawer alarm log eon Appel ermal Fe Ei ew Col Dimai Helo z Harder PRUbALR C eee ee eee ee Alarm Lag HPVERITT AnH ii a I ji i FA ion LEF i PF AT LOH F I E iE LE E a a LE E Q Quit H Hami i Jero LllaFt R Figure 4 30 Drawer Alarm Log Example FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 25 Post Setup Procedure After you configure the system via the terminal you should start CeraView and perform the initial management operations described in the following sections For a more detailed description of configuration using CeraView see Chapter 5 Operation Logging In To perform management operations start the management software as follows 1 Select Start gt Programs gt CeraView The Login window appears Terai Relegee 1O Ligii Figure 4 31 Login Window 2 Enter the IP address of the IDU you want to log in to the SNMP community for SNMP protocol access your user name and password and click OK The default password for the system administrator is ceragon but it can be cha
195. ince the current day s data is not complete until the end of the day its partial data is presented above the main table area Click Save to save current values in the table to a file FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 37 Chapter 5 Operation 5 38 Menus The TSL Performance Monitoring window displays details about the transmitted signal level measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours Select Performance Local Remote Radio TSL The TSL Monitoring window appears TERT Tal Garcons t aor Coretta er amena e teera fp toca TE Mraig Tue Ba me wia ag Wia Mira Bi iii T shaki of ata at bat bat Fat Fa Hi 4 oan ral al i a Tea a LE A ay Figure 5 33 TSL Monitoring Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes The Threshold Exceeded counter at the top of the window displays the number of seconds the threshold value was exceeded during the current interval Current Min TSL values are the minimum transmitted level measured during the interval Current Max TSL values are the maximum transmitted level measured during the interval TSL Threshold is a value that you can set When a TSL value exceeds the threshold you set the Threshold Exceeded counter at the top of the PM window will register and display the number of seconds the threshold value was exceeded Doubtful values are values that were not generated during norma
196. ing Conigurestion Reeser LE Parmeter r Spacio bo Holis petici ENWP Agent Adresi pona SENP agai Pih fan af Figure 5 7 Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility Nokia NetAct Parameters Window In the SNMP Agent Address field enter the NetAct agent IP address In the SNMP Agent Port Number field enter the NetAct agent port FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 13 Chapter 5 Operation 5 14 Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility To reset the parameters to their original vaues click Restore Defaults Advanced Click the Advanced Trap Configuration icon to set advanced trap forwarding parameters y irap iorwarding Configuretion Release 1 01 diners UO Racor Trap Diena E Heartbest interval fo y Himpe Hranei Mores Port hen of 2 Figure 5 8 Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility Advanced Parameters Window In the Log Received Traps field select Enable to log received traps in a file or Disable to de activate the logger Note that enabling this option may result in slower trap processing and even the loss of some traps The option should be only be used for short periods generally for system debugging In the Heartbeat Interval field if you specify a value a heartbeat trap will be generated every x minutes the number you enter in the field to tell your system that the trap mechanism is working The value 0 means that a heartbeat trap will never be sent In the Ma
197. ining system information Date Time Name Contacts Location 4 Defining SONET SDH configuration parameters 5 Defining management setup parameters Defining manager list Defining alarm groups Setting external alarm inputs Setting alarm outputs FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 1 Chapter 4 System Setup Getting Started Getting Started To start the FibeAir radio link configuration you first need to set up the Ethernet and PPP SLIP IP addresses Once you have defined these addresses you will be able to configure the system To set the addresses perform the following operations 1 Connect the RS 232 port of your computer to the RS 232 9 PIN port on the indoor unit front panel This port is labeled Terminal and is located near the front panel LEDs 2 Connect to the standard Windows HyperTerminal at 19 200 bits per second see the following section Connecting to the HyperTerminal 3 After you connect to the terminal press Enter The login menu appears E zigi zj Fie pi ps Col jess E Da ala cii g FIHERIE CEryeliH HETHIRRE LTI iT ICA FIBREAIR CEG WEAR Lei E T an Figure 4 1 FibeAir Terminal Login Screen 4 Type ceragon as the password The main menu appears LL i E pi s Di Des jp Dice alg ciil i sHiin Hira EHPER EZER Larsi ace Hass PIHERIE Cerf HEPES LTH Cami Ei Lii AHA Figure 4 2 FibeAir Terminal Main Menu 4 2 FibeAir Family
198. ion click Apply to save the settings 7 Click Close Transport The Transport Configuration window allows you to select the communication protocol for the link This is recommended for advanced users only 1 Select Configuration Local Remote IDU Transport The Transport Configuration window appears fat Goal Tramspenrt Cont ipii at lin Figure 5 19 Transport Configuration Window 2 The Transport Protocol field displays the current data transfer protocol To change the protocol click the drop down list and select either SDH SONET or SONET C Click Apply to save the settings 4 Click Close Auxiliary Channel The Auxiliary Channel window allows you to select an additional channel for secondary communication across the link 1 Select Configuration Local Remote IDU Auxiliary Channel The Auxiliary Channel Configuration window appears Aumihery hannel LAB m i LM Auniiery Channa F BOY Liner Channel fe iya Chantal Figure 5 20 Auxiliary Channel Configuration Window 2 Select the Wayside EOW or User Channel if you will be using those channels EOW Engineering Order Wire User Channel 64 Kbps 5 26 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus ODU 1 Select Configuration Local Remote ODU or click the ODU Ww Configuration icon The ODU Configuration window appears F Lint al EH analipia alien 0 Ly DDU Panareiers Ti S600 S
199. ion Manual 3 35 Chapter 3 Installation ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System Screw 1 Screw 2 Screw 3 Figure 3 36 Diplexer with Waveguide Connected to Adapter Plate Screw fastening order Fasten screw 1 without tightening it Fasten screws 2 and 3 without tightening them Tighten screw 1 Tighten screws 2 and 3 Caution The Tx Rx connectors in the diplexer and the ODU are sensitive Insert the diplexer in the adapter plate carefully Note The figure above shows the diplexer in the Low position for Tx Low For Tx High the diplexer and adapter plate are installed in the opposite direction See the Installation Notes at the end of the procedure The following figure shows the completed ODU with diplexer assembly 3 36 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System Figure 3 37 ODU with Diplexer Assembly Installation Notes e Each ODU on either side of the link can be configured for Tx high or Tx low according to the diplexer direction e A low diplexer direction means that the Tx frequency channel is lower than the Rx A high diplexer direction means that the Tx frequency channel is higher than the Rx Each link requires one diplexer installed in the low direction and one installed in the high direction as shown in the following figures e Low diplexer direction ODUs must be installed with the handle facing up and the IF connecto
200. ion Manual 4 27 Chapter 4 System Setup Post Setup Procedure Local Remote Transport Configuration Optional The Local Remote Transport Configuration window allows you to change threshold levels for the radio and alarms and to configure special transmission parameters This is recommended for advanced users only Note You will need to restart CeraView if you change the transport protocol 1 Select Configuration Local Remote IDU Transport The Local Remote Transport Configuration window appears Local Transport Configuration e x Protocol Transport Protocol Apply Refresh Close Help Figure 4 34 Local Transport Configuration Window 2 The Protocol field displays the current data transfer protocol To change the protocol click the drop down list and select SDH SONET or SONET C Click Apply to save the settings 4 Click Close 4 28 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Post Setup Procedure Trap Forwarding Configuration This section explains how to set up a trap forwarding plan If your application does not require trap forwarding you can skip the following procedure 1 Select Configuration Local Remote Management System Traps ah Configuration or click the Traps Configuration icon The Trap Forwarding Configuration window appears Traps Conheguration PITIT 4 ald Ei Managers F Adiess i frag Port Send trap tor Ales foitino 3 i
201. ion in this chapter to help solve the problem FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 3 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting IDU LED Indicators IDU LED Indicators The following table lists the LEDs on the IDU panel and their functions LED Color Description Red Yello Green w PWR X X Red power supply problem Power LINE X X X Red no input to main channel high BER Yellow JO mismatch LOF Loss X X Red radio did not recognize information of Frame frame radio link problem radio LOF BER Bit X X X Red radio BER higher than radio Error Ratio excessive error threshold definition see Sonet SDH configuration window Yellow radio BER higher than radio signal degrade threshold definition see Sonet SDH configuration window LPBK X X Red loopback is active Loopback STBY X X Yellow Protected configuration The unit Standby is currently passive or Tx mute is operating IDU X X X Red modem unlocked Yellow high temperature fan problem ODU X X xX Red no link ODU power ODU unlocked Yellow radio interference high temperature Rx Tx out of range CBL Cable X X Red RF cable open RF cable short RMT X X X Red no link remote unit problem red Remote LED is lit in the remote unit Unit Yellow warning in remote unit yellow LED is lit in the remote unit FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6
202. ir system is different due to the use of an external diplexer The diplexer includes Tx Rx filters and a common port which connects to the antenna The 6 7 8 GHz ODU consists of an ODU chassis transceiver ODC power supply IF RF circuits and an external diplexer Required Components The following items are required for FibeAir 6 7 8 GHz ODU installation e ODU e ODU Adapter Plate e Diplexer e Flexible Waveguide e Antenna Note Before installation determine whether the Tx frequency at each end is Tx High or Tx Low System Description The following figure illustrates a typical 6 7 8 GHz ODU installation with a diplexer Antenna Flexible ODU Waveguide 1m Waveguide Flange Coaxial Cable to IDU Figure 3 28 Typical 6 7 8 GHz ODU Installation with Diplexer FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 31 Chapter 3 Installation ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System 6 7 8 GHz FibeAir systems use larger antennas than higher frequency systems up to 15 ft Signals are routed from the antenna via a flexible waveguide to the diplexer installed on the ODU From the ODU the signals are routed to the IDU via coaxial cable The following figures show the diplexer Gasket Waveguide Common Port Tx Rx Connectors Figure 3 29 Diplexer Note The figure above shows the Tx Rx connector end of the diplexer without a gasket A gasket must be installed around the connector area with s
203. irements Corporate Campus Networks The FibeAir 1500 1528 system is a flexible cost effective solution for corporate networks and campus environment presenting a point to point end to end broadband wireless alternative to expensive leased fiber lines The FibeAir system provides a one box solution by integrating services such as Fast Ethernet data video and voice For pure Ethernet applications FibeAir 1528 can be used to create virtual networks for LAN users VLANs FibeAir 1500 1528 provides two Fast Ethernet 100Base TX connections over 155 Mbps In addition the FibeAir 1000 Digital Radio system offers LAN to LAN and PBX connectivity for campus networks large enterprises and metro last mile access The system provides full throughput up to 116 Mbps Fast Ethernet connectivity together with up to 8 E1 T1 ports for TDM based information Fibe gp 155 622 Mbps A y p m i Tari Etien inr binli TEF PARE 1OBAL2 T l x DENEI L ie iJ 1OBASE T PARE E ES AR H a Corporate Campus Networks FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 5 Chapter 1 Introduction Applications Integral Multiplexer In the Telecom and Datacom environment different interfaces are used The FibeAir integral multiplexer supports both Telecom and Datacom interfaces by mapping the different data streams into the SONET SDH payload The following applications using the FibeAir 1500 1528 system are available Fast E
204. it by clicking on the Close icon x in the title bar When you exit CeraView you will be prompted to confirm the exit Click OK to confirm the operation Configuration Menu IDU External Alarms The procedure detailed in this section is required only if alarms generated by external equipment are connected to the IDU or if the IDU alarm outputs are connected to other equipment using the alarms I O connector 1 Select Configuration IDU External Alarms or click the External BSS Alarms icon The External Alarms window appears a Guipa f Alar EE an 40 40 408 Ei Ea External alarm inputs Alam mips ieee Ena Teel Savery l Aay Seavey 1 fet Evai l 1 eer 2 fF Fema ro ll 2 2 FF fpr 2a fer O fet eel 6 pee amp F LEX Evert x s fee T pee vert a MRE e BPE mm Figure 5 1 Input Output External Alarms Window The microcontroller in the IDU reads alarm inputs dry contact and transmits them to the CeraView management system This allows FibeAir to report external alarms that are not related to its own system For each alarm on the left side of the window do the following 2 Click on the box next to the alarm number to enable disable the alarm 3 Ifyou enable an alarm enter a description of the alarm in the text field FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 51 Chapter 5 Operation 5 52 6 7 Menus Select the alarm s severity level from the drop down list Major Minor Warni
205. it by clicking on the relevant arrow button and then click Apply FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 111 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Neighbors The Neighbors window displays a table of all STM 1 interfaces radio line trib and their remote connections 1 Select Maintenance Neighbors The Neighbors window appears Sandip Mahar igi ii 17 E heipsan Tahia Lors itarimas Theia berks E ne Maghha Type fer from a u Rytu m 234 sie Feed Tena TE SSE ESE el oe Figure 5 30 Neighbors Window 2 Select Manual in the Detect Mode column to enter the unit s IP address manually When you enter an IP address CeraView will try to connect to the unit and learn the Neighbor Type and Interface If the IP address you entered is not configured or not able to be reached the Neighbor Type field will display Unknown and the Neighbor Interface field will list all available options than can be configured Software Reset Select Maintenance Software Reset to reset the software for maintenance purposes as follows IDC Performs a software reset for the Indoor Unit Controller Left ODC Performs a software reset for the Left Outdoor Unit Controller Right ODC Performs a software reset for the Right Outdoor Unit Controller Hardware Reset Select Maintenance Hardware Reset to reset the hardware for maintenance purposes as follows IDC Performs a hardware reset of the Indoor Unit Cont
206. k Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 137 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Alarms Menu Current Alarms Ey 1 Select Alarms Current Alarms or click the Current Alarms icon The Current Alarms window appears Figure 5 17 Current Alarms Window Each line in the window describes a different alarm The color in the Severity column indicates the severity of the alarm as shown at the bottom of the alarm list The source of the alarm appears in the Unit column The Direction column indicates the transmission direction of the unit that generated the alarm The Description column provides information about the alarm In addition to the current alarms the current IDU temperature is shown at the bottom of the window 5 138 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Alarm Log 1 Select Alarms Alarm Log or click the Alarm Log icon The Alarm Log window appears fe Alarm Log 10000169 DU POWER Sy FAL CLEARED ADL POWER Sr FAL CLEARED ID POWER 3 FAM CLEARED IDU POWER 5y FAIL CLEARED GU CABLE IS GPEN IDU REMOTE COMMUNICATION FAL RASED mu POWER Sy FAL CLEARED Di UPOWER Se FAL CLEARED h IDU POWER 33 FAL CLEARED PAER FAL CLEARED DU REMOTE COMMUNCATON FAL RASED ry IDI POWER a FAL CLEARED e DU POWER Sy FAL CLEARED CL POWER 3 3 FM CLEARED sa aa a se Figure 5 18 Alarm Log Window The
207. l Degrade field select the level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link The BER field is read only and shows the above which a BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link In the Trace Identifier area select JO Operation to use the JO byte as a trace identifier in the SDH RSOH If you activate JO use the Transmitted JO and Expected JO fields to define the IDU identifier string Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation El Menus Select Configuration Interfaces E1 or click the 8xE1 area in the CeraView main window FibeAir physical view The E1 Ports Configuration window aurea att congore i ET at ire LS 10 10 464 Freer eer Peer eee Figure 5 12 E1 Ports Configuration Window In the For Low Path Thresholds and Trib Thresholds areas click the drop down lists and select the values which if exceeded will cause appropriate alarms to be generated In the E1 Ports area select or deselect the boxes to enable or disable the ports Note You can enable disable only ports that were mapped The Line Coding area shows the coding method used for each E1 line Click Apply to save the settings Click Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 133 Chapter 5 Operation 5 134 Menus Management System IP Configuration 1 Elhan P A
208. l line includes Tx and Rx fibers this configuration will consist of eight optical patches and two H Splitters Protection Switch Triggers This section specifies the triggers that cause FibeAir 1500A 1528A protection switching Note that no switching will occur upon individual E1 line failure in order not to interrupt the STM 1 stream in the protected chain STM 1 Fiber Fault Fiber LOS LOF At the local side if STM 1 fiber LOS LOF is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur Remote Optical Transmitter Fault If a remote optical transmitter fault occurs a proprietary message with a switching command is sent to the remote slave Protection switching will then occur Fiber EXBER At the local side if STM 1 Fiber EXBER is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur STM 1 Radio Fault Radio LOF At the local side if STM 1 Radio LOF is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur Master amp Slave Radio LOF At the local side if STM 1 Radio LOF is detected by the master IDU and slave IDU at the same time protection switching will occur Radio EXBER At the local side if STM 1 Radio EXBER is detected by the master IDU protection switching will occur FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 11 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500A 1528A Traffic Protection CLU Fault Tributary Fault Interface Card LOC At the local side if LOC Loss of Clock
209. l system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The format of the monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above To view daily TSL values over a one month period click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus SDH The SDH Performance Monitoring window displays the number of radio UAS unavailable seconds measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours 1 Select Performance Local Remote Radio SDH The SDH Monitoring window appears ILE iR ea nna NE w ww me Oe IKI IAM wa Ks a a aa x ihre iii am a ORNE wa ae hus 1L oe ma af ibis iL Bie bial a Akki Ji iia w y TECE E F DEAF Fi ti Ea x pE ae ee ee Figure 5 34 SDH Monitoring Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes Current UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above 2 To view historical SDH values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days Tributaries Local The Tributaries Performance Monitoring window displays the UAS number of Unavailable Seconds per interval
210. line Major BER EXC ON Drawer n FIBER k interface LED RAISED CLEARED Unexpected Online Warning Unexpected signal on Drawer n Fiber k signal interface FE 8xE1 MUX Name LED Default Text Severity Loss of CARRIER Online Major Loss of CARRIER on interface n on in Ethernet interface LED drawer k RAISED CLEARED interface FE 8xE1 LOS on E1 Online Major LOS on E1 T1 interface n on drawer K interface RAISED CLEARED E1 T1 SD Online Minor BER SD ON Drawer n INTERFACE k interface RAISED CLEARED E1 T1 EXC Online Minor BER EXC ON Drawer n INTERFACE interface k RAISED CLEARED Unexpected Online Warning Unexpected signal on Drawer signal interface n Fiber k Loopback on LPBK Major INTERNAL EXTERNAL LOOPBACK ON E1 T1 line E1 T1 n RAISED CLEARED 6 26 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages Drawer Name LED Default Text Severity Link ID Drawer Critical DRAWER n LINK ID MISMATCH RAISED CLEARED Power supply Drawer Major DRAWER n POWER SUPPLY FAILURE RAISED CLEARED Cable Cable Major DRAWER n IDU ODU CABLE open short RAISED CLEARED Cable Cable Major Cable IDU ODU swap DRAWER n RAISED CLEARED EXTEREME TEMP Drawer Warning DRAWER n EXTEREME TEMP CONDITIONS RAISED CLEARED LOOPBACK of Fiber LOOPBACK Major INTERNAL EXTERNAL LOOPBACK ON FIBER n RAISED CLEARED LOOPBACK of Radio LOOPBACK Major INTERNAL EXTERN
211. llocations 16 QAM ccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecesecesecececeeeeeeeeeeeseseseseeeeeees D 1 FCC Channel Allocations 128 QAM cccccccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeececeeeeececeseeeeeeeseseeeseseeeeeeeees D 2 ETSI Channel Allocations 16 QAM 0 c0cccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseseeeees D 3 ETSI Channel Allocations 128 QAM cccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeseeeseseeeeeeeess D 4 Deutsch Telecom Channel Allocations 128 QAM ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees D 8 Japan Channel Allocations 16 QAM 0 ccccccccssccecesesneceeeeseeececaeeeescaaeeeeseaaaeeeesssaeesensaeeeeseaas D 9 China Channel Allocations 16 QAM cccccccccccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeneeeneeenecusacacusecueaeueusueanaeass D 9 Argentina Channel Allocations 16 QAM cccccccsssseceessseeeeceeseeeceeaaeeesscaeeeeseaeeeesenaeeeeeeaas D 9 Argentina Channel Allocations 128 QAM cccccccssccecesseeceeessneeeeesseeeeesaeeesessneeeeesseeeeess D 10 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual ili Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir 1500 1528 FibeAir 1500 1528 is a member of the Ceragon Networks new generation of Digital Radio Relay Systems DRRS FibeAir is a compact flexible easy to deploy and cost effective product designed to support high capacity voice data and video applications in Wide Area Networks WANs a
212. m Online Help used to view the online help file Physical View A physical view of the FibeAir unit is displayed in the Main window The view provides a real time virtual display of the IDU front panel Genan Fae soon ee Figure 5 2 Physical View in Main Window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 45 Chapter 5 Operation 5 46 The LEDs that appear on the left side in the physical view indicate the actual real time status of the LEDs on the front panel of the IDU LED changes on the actual front panels of the units will be updated in the physical views after a slight delay The LEDcolors are as follows Physical View Green indicates proper operation Yellow indicates a warning Red indicates a major alarm or severe malfunction The following table lists the LEDs and their indications LED Color Description Red Yellow Green Power X X Red power supply problem system not functional Line X X X Red no input to main channel High BER Yellow JO mismatch LOF Loss X X Red radio did not recognize information of Frame frame radio link problem radio LOF BER Bit X X X Red radio BER higher than radio Error Ratio excessive error threshold definition see Sonet SDH configuration window Yellow radio BER higher than radio signal degrade threshold definition see Sonet SDH configuration window LPBK X X Red loopback is active Lo
213. m Information 00 1010 169 Select File System Information or click the System Information icon The System Information window appears Current Time Figure 5 3 System Information Window 2 In the Current Time area click Date Time Configuration and set the date and the time in the format HH MM SS The read only Description field provides information about the FibeAir system Optional In the Name field enter a name for this link By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name Optional In the Contact field enter the name of the person to be contacted when a problem with the system occurs Include information on how to contact the designated person Optional In the Location field enter the actual physical location of the node or agent The Up Time field is read only and shows how long the system has been operating continuously Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Versions The Versions window displays current software versions and relevant serial numbers It also displays software versions that will take effect after the unit is reset 1 Select File System Versions The Versions window appears Versions 192 168 1 110 jal Eq verons 192061100 Pee fe E A A i est F Figure 5 4 Versions Window 2 Click the Serial Numbers tab for a list of component serial numbers Configur
214. m Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A The Configuration menu allows you to fully configure the FibeAir system without the CeraView application Ceiaggon Hypo merenal AmE Ek Ei Wes D Dimis Hae Connected 13S AH ESTL Figure 4 3 Configuration Menu Selecting the relevant options from the Configuration menu will guide you to the desired menu The relevant operations are listed in each menu Setting the Frequency Channel To set the frequency channel perform the following operations 1 Connect to the Terminal 2 From the Configuration menu select Full Configuration 3 From the Full Configuration menu select 5 Frequency Plan The Frequency Plan menu appears 4 4 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A ago Hipis Tein Ed Yer Col Dumie Help Bile alz 2S cl Connected 12145 BHE TEH Figure 4 4 Frequency Plan Menu 4 From the Frequency Plan menu select 1 Transmit Frequency 5 Enter the desired channel frequency For frequencies of 8 GHz or lower the Rx frequency should be manually entered as well 6 Select S Save amp Return to save the settings and return to the Full Configuration menu Setting the Transmit Power Level To set the transmitter power perform the following operations 1 Connect to the Terminal 2 From the Main Configuration menu select Full Config
215. mark Log on to network Require data encryption and Record a log file for this connection Unmark NetBEUI and IPX SPX Mark TCP IP In TCP IP settings mark Specify IP Address and enter the IP address of the PC dial up connection Note The IP address of the serial line on the IDU should be different but should have the same subnet 17 18 Click OK and OK again To connect double click the desired dial up connection FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A PPP SLIP Driver Installation Installation for Windows NT Installation for Windows NT Before you install the PPP SLIP driver for Windows NT make sure that TCP IP and DIAL UP NETWORKING are installed PPP SLIP driver installation for Windows NT requires the CeraView installation CD The installation procedure involves the following steps 7 Installing the nullmdm file a Configuring the TCP dial up adapter Insert your CeraView CD in the CD drive and perform the procedures described in the following sections Installing nullmdm 1 Click Start on the desktop and select Settings Control Panel Modems 2 Click Add 3 Mark Don t detect my modem 4 Click Next 5 Click Have disk and in the CeraViewCD SLIPNT folder select nullmdm inf 6 Click OK The message NT Direct Connection appears 7 Click Next Select Communication port COM1 or COM2 and click Next The message You will need to restart the system before you can use
216. mation about the FibeAir system Optional In the Name field enter a name for this link By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name Optional In the Contact field enter the name of the person to be contacted when a problem with the system occurs Include information on how to contact the designated person Optional In the Location field enter the actual physical location of the node or agent The Up Time field is read only and shows how long the system has been operating continuously Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 47 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Versions The Versions window displays current software versions and relevant serial numbers It also displays software versions that will take effect after the unit is reset 1 Select File System Versions The Versions window appears Versions 192 168 1 110 Mial 9 Versione azimia MEE Software versions Serial Numbers Current Software Versions DC jss2 l OOK MUX M4200035 l Post Reset Software Versions IDC ja 82 MUX fu 20qdD35 Refresh cose Hep utrean coe Figure 5 4 Versions Window 2 Click the Serial Numbers tab for a list of component serial numbers Configuration Report This option generates a report that includes various parameters and their values such as system description software versions and Tx
217. measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours on the E1 T1 interface 1 Select Performance Local Remote Tributaries E1 The Tributary Monitoring window appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 39 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Leiti ab Honiana Legenda A EH a ofa armia oll este aaa ee FE EE m Re AI ne oe oS mi QE Mu E MI PA a Buses iii Thiri li 5 oe hisdun 3e di Kite aram ia Tara TER E E J amp a AHAB Comm t 7 i i t Rrburh Figure 5 35 Tributary Monitoring Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above 2 To view Historical UAS values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days 5 40 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Maintenance Loopback 1 Menus Select Maintenance Local Remote Loopback or click the Loopback icon The Loopback window appears W Local LoopBack System 10 10 10 162 iia Ee
218. mily Installation and Operation Manual 5 99 Chapter 5 Operation 5 100 Menus Trap Forwarding Used to configure traps sent from a Network Element to the NMS system To configure traps sent from Ceragon s NMS to other NMS systems see Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility at the beginning of this chapter 1 2 mirzam 7001011 mihana Trap Opie 1 ercer iepa muda gana ear b Lee dinen tap D ier ash semiiypa BF Ged aes evi a a e Select Configuration Management System Trap Forwarding or click the Trap Forwarding icon The Traps Configuration window appears raps Conlipura iam Fa 2 81 117 24 J0 H1 Pieps IF rains Sere Trap for Airas T Group oe iS w Remit hri it far a D Sand tiar frip ih pend e Hau Ros n N aunou tnuntN t Witt tT Vi Titi ITI TE a MALU BPs Hauerfrant Parod b rates meman i te Figure 5 18 Traps Configuration Window In the Managers IP Address area specify the IP addresses of the managers to which you want traps to be sent For each manager IP you specify specify the Trap Port In the Send Trap for Alarms area for of Group you determine which alarms will be sent as SNMP traps to each manager In each manager column select the alarm types you want to include for that manager To select deselect all traps in a column click the Select All checkbox at the bottom of the column For with Severity select the severity filter to determine
219. mmunity enter the community name for read write access For Trap Community enter the community name for trap forwarding 3 Click Apply to save the settings 4 Click Close to close the window Note Changes to community settings will take effect only after the unit is reset FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 33 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Alarms Menu Current Alarms 7 A 1 Select Alarms Local Remote Current Alarms or click the Current Alarms icon The Current Alarms window appears wi eal Current Alana 1000 10 i00 DU Tergensture Crisium l ODU Temperaire Ceat me o e Figure 5 29 Current Alarms Window Each line in the window describes a different alarm The source of the alarm appears in the Source column The color in the Severity column indicates the severity of the alarm as shown in the window at the bottom of the alarm list In addition to the current alarms the current IDU and ODU temperatures are shown at the bottom of the window The ODU temperature will not appear if the ODU is disconnected 5 34 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Alarm Log 1 Select Alarms Local Remote Alarm Log or click the Alarm Log icon The Alarm Log window appears Lisi Aisha F h 7 idol Fated A DUGER hFa EARED E TEN EE y Bees iFa GEARED Hiii POE amp DUPER a Fat CLEARED Thai Ve a Pay ure ay FAL CLEARED Sul tii P Bug
220. must not be set to any value higher than that specified in the tables For LMDS B channel power is 14 dBm and the receiver sensitivity level is 62 dBm 311 Mbps 128 256 QAM Single Carrier 18 38 GHz Specification 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz Transmit Power 17 dBm 17 17 dBm 17 dBm 17 17 dBm 17 15 dBm 128 QAM 256 QAM Tx Attenuation Range 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 25 dB 128 256 QAM Receiver Sensitivity 65 dBm 64 61 dBm 64 dBm 64 61 dBm 63 60 dBm BER 10 128 QAM 256 QAM All Frequencies Receiver Overload BER 10 Better than 20 dBm Unfaded BER Less than 10 2 16 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Radio Transmit power must not be set to any value higher than that specified in the tables For LMDS B channel power is 14 dBm and the receiver sensitivity level is 62 dBm 116 Mbps 32 QAM Single Carrier 6 18 GHz Specification 6 GHz 7 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz Transmit Power 26 dBm 26 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 32 QAM Tx Attenuation Range 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 30 dB 32 QAM Receiver Sensitivity 74 dBm 74 dBm 74 dBm 74 dBm 74 dBm 74 dBm BER 10 32 QAM 23 38 GHz Specification 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 32 GHz 38 GHz Transmit Power 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 15 dBm 32 QAM Tx Attenuation Range 30 dB 3
221. n RSL value exceeds the thresholds you set the Threshold Exceeded counters at the top of the PM window will display the number of seconds the threshold values were exceeded 5 36 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The monitoring table displays RSL values over the last 24 hours The values are the same as those that appear in the graph only in table format The Min RSL column shows the minimum received level measured during the interval The Max RSL column shows the maximum received level measured during the interval The Integrity column indicates whether or not the values received at that time and date are reliable A red x icon in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure event that occurred at that time This column corresponds to the Doubtful indication in the graphic window Click Advanced for the additional Threshold 1 Exceeded and Threshold 2 Exceeded columns which list the number of times RSL thresholds specified in the main RSL Monitoring window were exceeded 2 To view daily RSL values over a one month period click History Figure 5 32 RSL History Window The values shown in the window are values that were received over the last 30 days Note S
222. n which SNMPc was installed If you want to restore the system selected default directory click Restore Default Folder 4 Click Next CeraView integration files are installed in the SNMPc directory FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 3 Chapter 5 Operation Installation Installation for Standalone To install CeraView as a standalone platform 1 2 5 4 Run the CeraView installation program provided with the CeraView software The NMS platform selection window appears Chaine Lhe Mekerk Barer pou wan C na bo be megar ach Select Standalone and click Next The Standalone directory location window appears Whe Wauki Yan lis w imisi Eran Fre Click Choose and select the directory in which you want to install the CeraView software If you want to restore the system selected directory click Restore Default Folder Click Next CeraView files are installed in the directory you specified FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation CeraView Configuration CeraView Configuration Before you run CeraView you can configure the way CeraView will operate and to which servers it will connect CeraView configuration is performed using the CeraView Configuration utility as follows Click Start on the desktop and select Programs CeraView CeraView Config The CeraView Configuration utility main window appears L Lerate Lement Maneger Configuration
223. na mount bolts FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 1 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Steps Visual Inspection The following table lists the suggested preventive maintenance procedures which include visual inspection of the equipment and verification of operational parameters It is recommended to perform the procedures as often as local environmental conditions require It is recommended to notify the end customer prior to performing any preventive maintenance procedures that could affect service on the circuit What to check Check for Comments IDU alarm LEDs All Green If not perform troubleshooting Coax cable connection Tight no corrosion or Clean repair as required moisture Coax cable No cracks or kinks Replace as required All equipment Dust or dirt Clean as required Receive level voltage in Per installation Align adjust as required IDU ODU or using records management Torque on antenna Tight mount Adjust as required mount bolts Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Steps Corrective maintenance consists of the steps described in the following sections The steps provide a logical sequential method for diagnosing and resolving system problems Step 1 Define the Symptom This step is generally peformed by the customer s field technician or supervisor Examples of symptoms include IDU alarm is red complete loss of service and excessive errors
224. na with the drain plug side up as shown in the following figure Drain plug Drain hole at the bottom of the reflector Figure 3 15 Correct Orientation of Antenna 5 Mount the optical viewfinder on the antenna optional Locate the opposite site through the viewfinder and loosely tighten the bolts 6 Roughly align the antenna with the opposing site This can be done using compass bearings or visually Tip It is sometimes difficult to identify the opposing site For this reason it is sometimes helpful to have someone at the opposing site use a reflecting device such as a hand held mirror to reflect sunshine towards you The optical viewfinder can help in initial antenna alignment 3 20 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU 7 Insert the azimuth spindle J into hole K and tighten in place Bolts M8 x 30 Washers 8 4 SI nuts M8 Azimuth spindle M8 x 145 Figure 3 16 Antenna Assembly cont 8 Attach the ODU to the mount assembly using the four latches on the ODU L See the following figure N To verify proper sealing confirm existence of a rubber O ring on the Warning antenna as shown in the following figure Setting Polarization Polarization is determined by the orientation of the ODU If the handle of the ODU is facing up or down then the polarity is vertical If the handle of the ODU is to the side then the polarization is horizontal Tip For e
225. nagement Alarms Port field specify the internal port used to send management alarms to the trap forwarding mechanism To reset the parameters to their original values click Restore Defaults FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Logging in to CeraView Logging in to CeraView Note For Windows 2000 XP the user on the local PC must be defined as an Administrator which can be done as follows 1 Inthe Control Panel double click Users and Passwords Click Add Click Browse and select the user from the list Click Next Select Other and Administrators Click Finish Oy a Re be There are different ways to log in to CeraView depending on how you set up access to the program during the installation procedure If you chose to add CeraView to the Start menu on the desktop use the following method To log in to CeraView 1 Select Start Programs CeraView CeraView The Login window appears Cerais Melese 184 Lajim Augend Address fog 37 Figure 5 9 CeraView Login Window 2 Enter the relevant information in the fields The default Administrator login is User Name admin Password ceragon The default Viewer login is User Name viewer Password viewer Mark the Save Password box if you want CeraView to remember the user name and password you entered 3 Click OK FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 15 Chapter 5 Operation CeraView for Fibe
226. nal alarm 6 status External alarm 7 status External alarm 8 status Remote connectivy status Major Inner communication status Minor RST Line loss of frame status Major Radio loss of frame status Major Line EXC status Major Radio EXC status Major Line SD status Minor Radio SD status Minor Loss of signal status Major JO mismatch Minor FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Alarm Log File Messages Alarm Log File Messages The following table lists alarm messages that may appear in FibeAir alarm log files the traps issued to network management and possible corrective actions Remember to check active alarms to verify which faults are still active and require attention Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action ODU POWER xx Power supply Problem in one of the power supplies in the FAILURE ODU except the 5v To correct Check current alarm status ODU POWER xx OK Power supply 1 Power supplies are checked periodically If there was a failure or during unit power up the power supply is OK this message is issued ODU XBAND Radio Synthesizer is unlocked This can either be a SYNTHESIZER IS momentary synchronization loss or a UNLOCKED hardware failure If this alarm does not clear in ashort while the ODU needs to be replaced ODU XBAND Radio Previous error is cleared SYNTHESIZER IS Toorat LOCKED Check current alarm status ODU IF CONV
227. nd Metropolitan Area Networks MANS FibeAir System FibeAir systems operate in the 6 to 38 GHz frequency bands and carry medium and high capacity payloads in accordance with ETSI and ITU T standards for worldwide operation FibeAir provides operators with a wireless based network solution offering fiber like quality of service The system s all digital design provides superior radio performance resulting in an extremely low residual BER and consequently an extremely low cost alternative to metropolitan fiber lines FibeAir is designed especially for SDH SONET and IP based networks as well as microwave ATM ensuring safe routing of ATM cells FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 1 Chapter 1 Introduction Features Applications Features As a software oriented system FibeAir deploys state of the art digital technology Together with its integrated SNMP agent FibeAir can be controlled either by the company s management software or interfaced to the Telecommunication Management Network TMN of the service provider CeraView Ceragon s SNMP based GUI element manager and PolyView Ceragon s open interface network management software run on Windows 98 2000 NT and over HP OpenView Windows or UNIX Compact and easy to install All system setups and configurations are software determined including operating frequency channel Internal multiplexer supports most relevant physical interfaces
228. neched DALT AKI Tama i HU i i Figure 4 19 Maintenance Menu 2 Select the module on which you want to perform maintenance operations by typing the number beside it The following screen appears for IDC ET yy alpi Fle Em View Da imiu Hep oial alsi ces el sHain Aenu gt Aalnt IPC Aadntenance EUFER WEER Interfece ID FIEEAIH CERNGOM HETWOR Th Aatintenance Blt kh Bave amp Retarn Bn Aetion Figurat jaa Ho Action Connsched 0009 AKSI 1330 H1 Foo FD RUN Figure 4 20 IDC Maintenance 4 20 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P The following screen appears for Drawer i xj Fie Ed view p Deae Heb Dl ala cla gel a Haint irawmr Matr i 192 168 1005 Deever Painters dt Hack 3 fave riure TT i Le paf iiguro ina bet ion i Le sells ples Comeacted 00 4651 para fa biH I hua Figure 4 21 Drawer Maintenance 3 To perform a maintenance operation type the number beside the operation and then type the number of the desired value or enter the value manually in the entry box that appears The following screen is an example of an ODU Software Upload report ET inj j Eie Lat yew Gal Jonia jian Dle Sig ola d Pain Mamu Maint OW Maint gt foftware Upinads RUFEN OSH Lote PINDALA CERO ETS ii eee en ae Pon ODM Eoftivare Sploada uit appl i Heturn Dh Ti Pbes F Connect 20 23 00 TH mmeit feo mS MN Figure 4 22 ODU Softw
229. network FibeAir 1500AL also supports cascaded topologies and enables a highway type network that drops Els at each node FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir Family System Overview FibeAir Family System Overview General The Ceragon FibeAir Family is available in 6 38 GHz frequency bands to meet user requirements The FibeAir system consists of an Indoor Unit IDU an Outdoor Unit ODU and a high performance antenna FibeAir 1500AL does not include an ODU and antenna FibeAir Main Modules Indoor Unit IDU A compact 17 wide 1U high unit mount compatible for both ETSI and ANSI standard racks The IDU includes physical line interfaces a full function SONET SDH regenerator internal multiplexer an advanced modem and a main manager card The IDU can also include optional encryption modules for secure data transfer l 5 6 p e Ia PEL i Indoor Unit IDU IDU major functions Modulate demodulate the 155 Mbps SONET SDH payloads Local and remote system management and control IDU ODU Provide interfaces for 2 Mbps wayside channel 64 Kbps user channel and 64 Kbps Order Wire channel Provide I O line alarms Integral multiplexer enables Datacom and Telecom applications convergence FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 19 Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir Family System Overview Outdoor Unit ODU ODU Antenna Outdoor
230. nformation about logging in to CeraView see the section Logging in to CeraView at the beginning of this chapter After you log in to CeraView the Main window appears The Main window is your starting point for all operations Below is a description of the menus toolbars and other features of the Main window Figure 5 1 CeraView for FibeAir 1500A 1528A Main Window The Title Bar displays the CeraView version and the IP address of the IDU being accessed The Menu Bar contains menus and menu items used to perform CeraView operations FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Physical View Toolbar The Toolbar includes several icons that you can click to perform different operations Each icon in the Toolbar is described in the table below Icon Operation System Information used to view and define system information such as contact personnel and system up time Trap Forwarding Configuration used to designate managers to which traps will be forwarded a Current Alarms used to view current active alarms Alarm Log used to view hisorical alarm records External Alarms used to configure alarms sent to from A external sources ODU Configuration used to configure the ODU Transport Configuration used to configure the communication protocol Loopback used to configure and run loopbacks for testing S and troubleshooting p Trail Configuration used to configure the tributaries
231. ng or Event FibeAir provides five alarm outputs that can be used by other systems to sense FibeAir alarms The outputs are configured on the right side of the window The alarm outputs are Form C Relays Each output relay provides three pins as follows Normally Open NO Normally Closed NC Common C Output alarms can be defined as Major Minor Warning External Power BER Line Loopback LOF IDU ODU Cable or Remote The default alarm output setting for all relays is Power The relays may be connected to customer specific applications Refer to Appendix B for details concerning the alarm connector pin assignments Click Apply to save the settings Click Close Auxiliary Channel In the Auxiliary Channel window you can select an optional channel for additional data communication 1 Select Configuration IDU Auxiliary Channel The Auxiliary Channel Configuration window appears finiiary Channel LAN Ei TAA nie Cheated f Bow F Uer chnal sooty Refresh cose Hep Figure 5 2 Auxiliary Channel Configuration Window Select the EOW or User Channel if you will be using those channels EOW Engineering Order Wire User Channel 64 Kbps Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Transport The Transport Configuration window allows you to configure special transmission parameters This is recommend
232. ng is based on a uniformly routed bi directional self healing path protection mechanism as shown in the following figures FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 13 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration Q B Fii RING STM 1 Line amp 3 1 i Rie FibeAir 1500A 1528A Traffic Protection 3 gt EES 4 16 E1 FibeAir 1500A 1528A 3 2 a INOUE protection With poisko ier probo thon Uniformly Routed Self Healing Path Protection Ring Traffic in Traffic out Main Protection Normal Operation Traffic in Traffic out Protection Protection After Switching to Protection Trail Protection Mechanism 7 14 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration 6 15 GHz FibeAir System Diversity Protection Revertive and Non Revertive Switching Path protection switching can be configured as Revertive the default or Non Revertive In the Revertive mode normal traffic on the protection path is switched back to the original path after it is recovered from the fault Revertive mode may be required to support specific services whereby the shortest physical route offers better performance For example for synchronization of another network using protected E1 The main path will generally be shorter and the protection path will be longer In the Non Revertive mode no switching to the original fault cleared path is performed
233. ng parameters specific to Nokia s NetAct application Eesen Used to set advanced trap forwarding parameters such as receive trap logger disable enable and others 5 12 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility General Click the General Trap Forwarding Configuration icon The General section of the Trap Forwarding Configuration window appears shown above In the Trap Forwarding Mode field select one of the following options Off Disables trap forwarding Regular Forwards the trap exactly as it was received Nokia Translates the trap for Nokia s NetAct application In the Trap Listening Port Number field select the trap listening port The standard port is 162 Change this number if it is already being used by another SNMP service In addition remember to configure the network elements to send traps to the correct port In the Local Host Address field enter the IP address or name of the local host Leave the value 0 0 0 0 to bind all IP addresses In the Forward Traps to Hosts field enter a list of host names and port numbers to which traps will be forwarded Use the format lt host IP gt lt port gt To reset the parameters to their original vaues click Restore Defaults Nokia NetAct MOK LA mem ee bes Click the Nokia NetAct Trap Configuration icon to set NetAct related trap forwarding parameters LT Trap Foewend
234. nged later After you log in the Main CeraView window appears Sf Ceraview Helease LA 10 001 1 397 idiot ar WAG aT Figure 4 32 Main CeraView Window 4 26 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Post Setup Procedure Setting System Information To define system information 1 Select File Local Remote System Information or click the System Information icon j Syst E Information T 10 00 1065 El EJ Darei Time Tue Sep 02144033107 2003 Deere Confieretion a z ma asiron r 1400 agent hans Ta Rogart Contact im Geary Localo it pme Fenaaa w Pewee cwo ree Figure 4 33 System Information Window 2 In the Current Time area click Date Time Configuration and set the date and time in the format HH MM SS The read only Description field provides information about the FibeAir system Optional In the Name field enter a name for this link By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name Optional In the Contact field enter the name of the person to be contacted when a problem with the system occurs Include information on how to contact the designated person Optional In the Location field enter the actual physical location of the node or agent The Up Time field Software Versions area and Serial Numbers area are read only Click Apply The settings are saved Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operat
235. ning see note 1 below Relevant only for SONET 3xVC3 where the tributaries are DS3s not only T1s Radio HP RDI Major see note 1 below Fiber HP RDI Major see note 1 below Radio HP TIM 1 Minor Fiber HP TIM 1 Minor Radio HP PLM 1 Minor see note 1 below Fiber HP PLM 1 Minor FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 31 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6 32 FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages Message Severity Radio HP EXBER Major Fiber HP EXBER Major Radio HP SD Minor Fiber HP SD Minor Radio TU LOP Minor Fiber TU LOP Minor Radio TU AIS Minor Fiber TU AIS Minor Radio TU LOM 2 3 Minor Fiber TU LOM 2 3 Minor Radio LP UNEQ Warning Fiber LP UNEQ Warning Radio LP RDI Minor Fiber LP RDI Minor Radio LP TIM Minor Fiber LP TIM Minor Radio LP PLM Minor Fiber LP PLM Minor Radio LP EXBER Minor 4 Fiber LP EXBER 4 Minor Radio LP SD Warning see note 1 below Fiber LP SD Warning see note 1 below Tribs LOS Major Tribs UNEXP Signal Warning see note 1 below Tribs AIS Major Tribs EXBER Minor Tribs SD Warning Unlock Major see note 1 below OOR Major see note 1 below Notes 1 HP TIM HP PLM LP TIM and LP PLM can be configured to prevent consequent actions 2 TU_LOM H4 causes LP RDI tributary AIS and path protection switching for
236. nnector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500 1528 oo eececeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeesaeeneneees B 2 External Alarms Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500P 0 ceccceceeeeeseeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes B 3 Protection Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500P e ce eeceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeaeeeseeeesaeeneneeesaes B 4 8 x E1 T1 Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500P cece ceeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeseaeeneaeeees B 4 User Channel Cable Pin Out c cecccesesceceeceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseaeeeeaaesgeneeceaeeeeaaesegeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeenaes B 5 Modem PPP Cross Cable Pin OUuts 0 ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaeeeeaeeseeeeesaeeenaeeneneeee B 5 Protected System Cables ccccccccccssceeeececeeeceeaeeeeeeeeceaeeseaaeseeaeeeaeeecsaesseaaesseeeseaaesseaaeeseeeesaaes B 6 Impedance Cable Pin Out cccccccsceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseeeeesaeeesaaeseeaeeseeeeesseessaeeseaes B 7 RJ 45 10 Pin Connector for Hitless SyStEMS cceccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeseneeeseaeeesaeeseneeesaees B 8 Wayside Channel Connector Pin OUuts ccccccceeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeaeeeeneeceeeeseaeeeeaaeseeneeseaeeeseaeseenees B 9 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Contents Appendix C Antenna Information cccccccccccecccecceceeeeeeseseseeeeeeseseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeees C 1 Appendix D Frequency Information cccccccsseessseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeenees D 1 FCC Channel A
237. ns Each icon in the Toolbar is described in the table below Operation System Information used to view and define system information such as contact personnel and system up time Trap Forwarding Configuration used to designate managers to which traps will be forwarded Current Alarms used to view current active alarms Alarm Log used to view hisorical alarm records External Alarms used to configure alarms sent to from external sources Transport Configuration used to configure the communication protocol Trail Configuration used to configure the tributaries Loopback used to configure and run loopbacks for testing and troubleshooting Online Help used to view the online help file A physical view of the FibeAir unit is displayed in the Main window The view provides a real time virtual display of the IDU front panel Queen oat et 5 118 om fl i ee Sos oS OEF Figure 5 2 Physical View in Main Window The LEDs that appear on the left side in the physical view indicate the actual real time status of the LEDs on the front panel of the IDU LED changes on the actual front panels of the units will be updated in the physical views after a slight delay FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation The LEDcolors are as follows Physical View Green indicates proper operation Yellow indicates a warning Red indicates a major alarm or sev
238. ns represent the Virtual Container mapping for the E1 T1 tributary lines 6 In the Protection column mark the box if you want the tributary line to run in Protected mode whereby traffic will be delivered in both directions 7 The Active Path column shows the current active path 8 In the West and East sections of the window select the payload type for each K number 9 For each VC box you can right click the mouse to change the bi directional connection of the line as follows Clear No connection the channel is not in use No low order path LP alarms and TU alarms TU LOP and TU AIS will be reported and no PM Performance Monitoring logs will be generated for the channel FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 129 Chapter 5 Operation 5 130 Menus Map Trail A tributary signal is connected to a specific channel TU in the STM 1 signal For non protected connections the tributary is connected to one of the aggregate ports For protected connections the tributary is connected to two aggregate ports for path protection Note that for protected connections the same channel number must be used for the two aggregates Pass Through Matching channels are connected from one aggregate to the other 10 Click Apply to save the changes 11 Click Close to close the window Synchronization Synchronization configuration enables you to set values for the network s clock synchronization 1 SS
239. nt for other FibeAir products FibeAir 1500P 1500AL but the specifications are the same Main channel interfaces include the following Optical SC MM 13 Wavelength Connector Used with Protocols supported Timing mode Coding method Optical output to 62 5 125 fiber Receiver sensitivity Maximum input power FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Multi Mode 155 Mbps SC Optical Connector 1300 nm SC Multi mode fiber STS 3c STM 1 OC 3 STS 1 FDDI TAXI and Fast Ethernet Retimed 4B 5B NRZ 18 dBm 31 dBm 14 dBm 8 1 Chapter 8 Line Interfaces 8 2 ST MM 13 Main Channel Interfaces Multi Mode 155 Mbps ST Optical Connector Wavelength Connector Used with Protocols supported Timing mode Coding method Optical output to 62 5 1 25 fiber Receiver sensitivity Maximum input power SC SM 13 1300 nm ST Multi mode fiber STS 3c STM 1 OC 3 STS 1 FDDI TAXI and Fast Ethernet Retimed 4B 5B NRZ 18 dBm 31 dBm 14 dBm Single Mode 155 Mbps SC Optical Connector Wavelength Connector Used with Protocols supported Timing mode Coding method Maximum output to 9 125 fiber Receiver sensitivity Maximum input power ST SM 13 1300 nm SC Single mode fiber STS 3c STM 1 OC 3 STS 1 FDDI TAXI and Fast Ethernet Retimed 4B 5B NRZ 8 dBm 31 dBm 8 dBm Single Mode 155 Mbps ST Optical Connector Wav
240. nual Chapter 3 Installation XPIC Installation and Comissioning 10 If the XPI is less than 25dB adjust the feed polarization by opening the polarization screw and gently rotating the feed to minimize the RSLypot Note that polarization alignment is not always possible since the RSLxpo might fall below the sensitivity threshold of the ODU Individual Link Verification Before operating in XPIC configuration each one of the links V and H should be commissioned individually in order to verify their proper operation 11 Power up the V drawers on both ends and verify the frequency channel and Tx power configuration 12 Verify that the RSL is no more than 4dB from the expected level 13 Runa BER stability test on the link for at least 15 minutes to ensure error free operation of the link 14 Power up the H drawers on both ends and verify the frequency channel and Tx power configuration 15 Verify that the RSL is no more than 4dB from expected level 16 Runa BER stability test on the link for at least 15 minutes to ensure error free operation of the link XPIC Configuration 17 Using the XPIC cable connect the two ODUs at each end to the TNC connectors Make sure that the cable is no longer than 3 meters 18 Configure the drawers to work in XPIC mode 19 Verify that the RSL at all four ODUs is no more than 4dB from the expected level 20 Verify that no alarms were raised if an STM 1 line is connected XPI
241. o save the changes Click Close SNMP Configuration 1 Select Configuration Management System SNMP Configuration The SNMP Configuration window appears SNMP Configuration 10 10 10 170 MIE Eg Read Community public rite Community hetman Trap Community ubiic Apply Refresh Close Help Figure 5 20 SNMP Configuration Window 2 For Read Community enter the community name for read only access For Write Community enter the community name for read write access For Trap Community enter the community name for trap forwarding Click Apply to save the settings Click Close to close the window Note Changes to community settings will take effect only after the unit is reset FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus NTP Configuration NTP Network Time Protocol configuration is performed when an NTP server is used to synchronize network activity 1 Z KTP Comigurabion 0000001 FO BEE ATP Sirei P Aiki fo 10 10 1760 NTF Unedsteirierent fin af nutes fest bon cht p S a0 T Hour theutee Derbini Saving Tree ottset fi d Hars Dih Seeing Tree Saat 1i dme Ha Configure Digi Saving Trem End 18 oee Tt Centiar Erabi WIP Auiherdicagon F iuhenicaion Puii Key fiosa mamma e eE Select Configuration Management System NTP The NTP Configuration window appears Figure 5 21 NTP Configuration Window 9 Enter the IP of the NTP serve
242. od 1 22 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir Family System Overview gt E1 N CeraView E 7 o we 10 BaseT RING E1 for Management Example of Ceragon s Out of Band Management Implementation In the illustration above the STM 1 ring uses In Band Management while the STM 4 ring uses Out of Band Management FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 23 Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir Family System Overview Interfaces The following interfaces are common to some FibeAir systems Consult the relevant FibeAir interface description below for specific availability Wayside Channel Interface Plug in 1 544 2 048 Mbps interface module with standard connectors TI1 E1 ITU T G 703 supports either balanced or unbalanced interface BNC connector V 35 X 21 RS 530 V 36 relevant connectors Ethernet bridge RJ 45 connector User Channel Interface 64 Kbps interface module with an RS 232 V 25 9 pin interface or Ethernet bridge RJ 45 Order Wire Analog Interface Analog audio interface for use with a supplied headset microphone and earphone through a standard mini audio jack A buzzer and a panel switch for far end signaling are also included External Alarms FibeAir supports 13 programmable floating contacts for external alarms 8 for input and 5 for output Protected Configuration FibeAir can be configured for pr
243. of range ODU Minor TX LEVEL OUT OF RANGE RAISED CLEARED RX out of range ODU Minor RX LEVEL OUT OF RANGE RAISED CLEARED ODU EXTEREME ODU Warning ODU TEMPERATURE OUT TEMP OF RANGE RAISED CLEARED ODU LOOPBACK IS LOOPBACK Major ODU LOOPBACK NOT ACTIVE ACTIVE TX Mute ODU Warning TX MUTE ON OFF LOS on IF cable from IDU Major ODU n LOS on IF cable IDU from IDU RAISED CLEARED ODU XPIC cable failure ODU Major XPIC cable failure only when all 3 RAISED CLEARED synthesizers have unlock indication 1 2 3 for current ODU ODU_Reset ODU Event ODU reset event ODU XPIC share clock ODU Event ODU n GENERAL problem HARDWARE FAULT 1 RAISED CLEARED FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 25 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FibeAir 1500P Alarm Messages MUX Name LED Default Text Severity Fiber LOS Online Critical LOS ON Drawer n FIBER k interface LED RAISED CLEARED Fiber LOF Online Critical LOF ON Drawer n FIBER k interface LED RAISED CLEARED Radio LOF Radio Critical LOF ON RADIO n INTERFACE k RAISED CLEARED TIM Online Minor TIM ON Drawer n FIBER k interface LED RAISED CLEARED Radio SD Radio Minor BER SD ON RADIO n INTERFACE k RAISED CLEARED Radio EXC Radio Major BER EXC ON RADIO n INTERFACE k RAISED CLEARED Fiber SD Online Minor BER SD ON Drawer n FIBER k interface LED RAISED CLEARED Fiber EXC On
244. ogies provide the highest data security level Encryption is a process that inverts the sensitive source information plain data to a pseudo random series encrypted data before transmitting it to the target This pseudo random series is completely meaningless for all parties that don t share the common secret encryption keys while those who do can use it to decrypt the data back to meaningful information Due to the growing demand to enhance information security over the PTP wireless link Ceragon Networks implemented the solution of adding another layer of protection against eavesdropping on the wireless signal and unauthorized access to the rooftop Our proprietary solution is known as EncryptAir which is a system that enables the highest level of information security over the wireless medium without degrading link performance The unique EncryptAir solution was integrated in our FibeAir family of products introducing the first carrier class encrypted PTP wireless link Encryption Technology Modern encryption techniques are based on several crucial elements as shown in the following illustration Cipher q Data Plain i a A Data Plain Encryption Algorithm Encryption Keys The encryption algorithm is a uni directional algorithm that randomizes information so that it cannot be deciphered without having the encryption keys An example of an encryption algorithm is DES Data Encryption Stand
245. on Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Versions The Versions window displays current software versions and relevant serial numbers It also displays software versions that will take effect after the unit is reset 1 Select File Local Remote System Versions The Versions window appears Yersions 192 168 1110 Mial EJ Versions 206000 MEE Software Versions Serial Numbers Current Software Versions IDC faba au MUX M4 209035 Post Reset Software Versions DC j 82 MUX fu 20qdD35 Figure 5 13 Versions Window 2 Click the Serial Numbers tab for a list of component serial numbers Configuration Report This option generates a report that includes various parameters and their values such as system description software versions and Tx Rx frequencies 1 Select File Local Remote Configuration Report The Local Remote Configuration Report window appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 21 Chapter 5 Operation 5 22 Menus Figure 5 14 Configuration Report Window 2 Click Save to save the report in a file for analysis or downloading Configuration File Upload Download This option enables you to upload a configuration file from a FibeAir unit to the management module or download a file from the management module to the FibeAir unit 1 Select File Local Remote Configuration File Upload from Element Download to Element The Upload Confi
246. on cable Ok e Master slave disconnect FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration Protected System 1 1 Installation LEDs In the normal alarm state the LEDs display the following colors Master All LEDs are green QyceRAGON Fibebie SOOT Qi 9 6 OZEE ee Figure 7 6 Master LEDs Slave STBY yellow RMT gray Others green Cycrmcon Finedies007 Figure 7 7 Slave LEDs Protected System 1 1 Installation 1 Install one link according to the instructions in chapters 3 amp 4 Set the frequency transmit power and align the antennas 2 Shut down the power to the link 3 Install the second link set all parameters and align antennas 4 Turn on each pair of terminals IDU and ODU confirm antenna alignment for all four possibilities the other pair must be shut down as shown in the following figure Lz Sa er i Po gt a 7 Ni Tala meal Po arali cb 3 tal Figure 7 8 Redundant Configuration Possibilities FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 7 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500A 1528A System Protection Connect the protection cable between the two IDU s The protection cable will connect to protection ports RJ 45 or 25 Pin D type connector This depends on the type of FibeAir system in use Connect the interfaces through the interface splitters In some cases the CPE equipm
247. on message to copy the configuration Request Switch Select Protection 1 1 Protection Commands Request Switch if you want to request a switch between the active and standby units After you select this option click Yes in the confirmation message to copy the configuration Trail Protection 1 Select Protection Trail to activate the protected path mechanism for the desired ports The Trail Protection window appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 145 Chapter 5 Operation 5 146 Menus Tradl Probectaen 0008 NEFFI 141 Ei X AFI E ji Lai EE auf WC 115 iy Ei X vetia adi mf g x Prosar Gweith Crier I Reverie _ tay Pewen cone Hee Figure 5 24 Trail Protection Window In the Trail List area select a row and click Manual Switch Direction if you want to switch the traffic direction of the active path This is a one time operation that will be cleared after the current trail configuration session ends Select Enable Auto Protection if you want the system to automatically switch the traffic direction upon detection of a fault in the current active path To deactivate Auto Protection select the relevant row and click Inhibit Auto Protection Note To select more than one row in the trail list hold down the Ctrl key on the keyboard Select Revertive if you want normal traffic on the protection path to be switched back to the original path after it is recovered from a f
248. onfiguration Local IDU Auxiliary Channel The Auxiliary Channel Configuration window appears Auxiliary Channel LAB 88 172 24 m 4 Auxiliary Channel JV Eo JV User Channel IV WaySide Channel Apply Refresh Close Help Figure 3 26 Auxiliary Channel Configuration Window 2 Mark the EOW option 3 Click Apply to save the changes 4 Click Close 5 Repeat this procedure for the remote side FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 29 Chapter 3 Installation Installation Verification Checking the ODU Configuration ey 1 Click the Local or Remote ODU Configuration icon The Local or Remote ODU Configuration window is displayed Ti oal DO Cospr ent ine 010 OTTO TL U0 Teim D GS ete Chipo Mtr tomeg GWO TREN Mtr Cupia Precumncy TOD WHr Firquatatiy Carina aor DESERET i hte ff 4 TaFeemency faze HIE Eu Frapar oi MH E Looe Ont Tanne Conngurstion p Rice Corehgua mor F lowe f are Sai 1x Level DE Figure 3 27 ODU Configuration Window 2 Verify that the Monitored Rx Level is at the level previously measured by the DVM Unfaded RSL If any problems were encountered during the verification refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting amp Diagnostics 3 30 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System Installation of the ODU for a 6 7 8 GHz FibeA
249. onfigured with a 2 x Fast Ethernet port for Bandwidth Allocation select Dynamic Fast Ethernet for dynamic load balancing Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 97 Chapter 5 Operation 5 98 E1 T1 Radio BER Bi Eror Rata fen Menus Select Configuration Interfaces Left Right E1 T1 or click the E1 T1 interface area in the physical view of the CeraView main window T a aj Trib Thresholds Excessive Ero fis 03 Signal Degrade fien Ei Ports Check or clear ine check boves to enable or disshte poris Figure 5 15 El T1 Interface Configuration Window In the Trib Thresholds area for Excessive Error select the level above which an Excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link For Signal Degrade select the level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link In the E1 T1 Ports area select the ports you want to enable Click Apply to save the settings Click Close Select Configuration Interfaces Left Right Radio or click the Radio or East or West area in the physical view The Radio Configuration window appears pi elt Radio Contiipiration 10 110 12 Radio Thresholds Lini Parameters Excessre Error fiez Rado Direction O West East Signal Degrade 1s Link D f perun coe re Figure 5 16 Radio Configuration Window In the Radio
250. onitoring window were exceeded 2 To view daily RSL values over a one month period click History Gy Aslar HSL ei EP ar POL be Babe hrama nna fa mena Far menetet fr mesana e Figure 5 23 RSL History Window The values shown in the window are values that were received over the last 30 days Note Since the current day s data is not complete until the end of the day its partial data is presented above the main table area Click Save to save current values in the table to a file FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 71 Chapter 5 Operation 5 72 Menus The TSL Performance Monitoring window displays details about the transmitted signal level measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours Select Performance Radio TSL The TSL Monitoring window appears kin His ma aia Od fe ee od iw EE iig ints a E a T tesa eure 11K TAR IEE DAFT 10 E uns ta Wi Fi Pedr ie ede jiji m at x a 5i al ot pata bat Lat Lah Fh ih TATH LIK B Figure 5 24 TSL Monitoring Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes The Threshold Exceeded counter at the top of the window displays the number of seconds the threshold value was exceeded during the current interval Current Min TSL values are the minimum transmitted level measured during the interval Current Max TSL values are the maximum transmitted level measured during the inte
251. ontact 13 GND Ground 14 EXT IN2 Input 2 normally open 15 EXT IN4 Input 4 normally open 16 EXT IN6 Input 6 normally open 17 EXT IN8 Input 8 normally open 18 RELAY 1NO Relay Output 1 normally open contact 19 REALY 2NC Relay Output 2 normally closed contact 20 REALY 2C Relay Output 2 common contact 21 RELAY 3NO Relay Output 3 normally open contact 22 RELAY 4NC Relay Output 4 normally closed contact 23 RELAY 4C Relay Output 4 common contact 24 RELAY 5NO Relay Output 5 normally open contact 25 Not Connected B 2 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Connector Pin Outs External Alarms Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500P External Alarms Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500P The External Alarms connector for FibeAir 1500P is a D type 15 pin connector EXT_IN_1 External input alarm 1 EXT_IN 2 External input alarm 2 EXT_IN 3 External input alarm 3 EXT IN 4 External input alarm 4 EXT IN 5 External input alarm 5 Relay 3 C Output Relay 3 common pin 14 Relay 1 C Output Relay 1 common pin Relay 1 NO Output Relay 1 normally open pin EXT _IN1 EXT _IN2 EXT INS EXT_IN4 EXT INS RELAY Ie RELAY 3 NO RELAY 2 NO w0 O ND A e a ae RELAY 2 C RELAY 2 NC RELAY 1 C RELAY 1 NO D TYPE_15P_RA NJ 0026 0 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual B 3 Appendix B Connector Pin Outs Protection Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500P Protection Connecto
252. ontrol Panel gt Network Select Protocols then select TCP IP protocol and then click Properties On the IP Address tab select Specify an IP Address and enter the appropriate IP address and mask 5 To verify connectivity ping the IDU s Ethernet IP address and make sure you have a reply as follows Select Start gt Run Type ping followed by the IP address and click OK 6 Run the CeraView management application Connecting Via the Serial Port Using PPP SLIP 1 Connect an RS 232 9 pin cable to the serial port of the IDU 2 Install a PPP or SLIP driver Refer to Appendix A for details Set the serial IP address and mask of the IDU using the Hyper Terminal The default serial IP address is 192 168 10 1 and the serial IP mask is 255 255 255 0 Make sure that the serial IP address of your PC is on the same sub net as the IDU s serial IP address and that the masks are identical Windows 98 2000 3 Check and change the serial address of the PC as follows Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Network Select the TCP IP Dial up Adapter component that was installed on the PC and click Properties On the IP Address tab select Specify an IP Address and enter the IP address and mask that are on the same sub net as the IDU you want to connect to Make sure that the serial IP address of the PPP SLIP driver you have installed is on the same sub net as the IDU s serial IP address and the masks are identic
253. opback STBY X X Yellow Protected configuration The unit Standby is currently passive or Tx mute is operating IDU X X X Red modem unlocked Yellow high temperature fan problem ODU X X X Red no link ODU power ODU unlocked Yellow radio interference high temperature Rx Tx out of range CBL Cable X X Red RF cable open RF cable short RMT x x x Red no link remote unit problem red Remote LED is lit in the remote unit it Yellow warning in remote unit yellow LED is lit in the remote unit 8xE1 T1 x Green Connected E1 T1 tributary FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Menus The following sections describe the CeraView window menus File Menu System Information This option allows you to view and define information for the FibeAir system 1 fej orstem Information 10 1000069 REE Trani Tms Conbact im Eiir Select File System Information or click the System Information icon The System Information window appears Tue Sep 02 1481 29 DT 2003 ua IT nes Description Feear 15004 agent Pime Ear Rogers Locaton Ete 1 Lin Tima anys 4 hows N mmber 18 seconds on nom oe me Figure 5 3 System Information Window 2 In the Current Time area click Date Time Configuration and set the date and the time in the format HH MM SS The read only Description field provides infor
254. option will not be operational for that side of the link FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 5 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration LEDs Management Event Log To provide separate remote management configuration maintenance and monitoring for all four units in the link each unit has its own IP address Both Master and Slave may be accessed via a TCP IP based network management system SNMP CeraView since their Ethernet SLIP ports are always active Manual changes of IP address and Tx Mute are performed separately for Master and Slave Other parameters may be changed as follows This allows for configuring the two units with different parameters if necessary e Any manual change in the Master will update the Slave frequency E1 wayside transparency antenna size Tx level etc e Any manual change in the Slave is unit specific and does not update the Master The Master and the Slave units report the following parameters separately to the network management system e Configuration data e Traps on Master Switch events and Change Transmitter messages e Performance monitoring data The following messages can be written to the Event Log list for protection configuration management and monitoring e Change remote transmitter if sent to the remote side e Change to master e Change to slave e Protection cable disconnect e Protection cable error e Protecti
255. orizontal polarization This enables double capacity in the same spectrum bandwidth A cost effective STM 1 ring configuration is achieved using a single FibeAir 1500P IDU located at each of the nodes with one ODU providing the West connection and another providing the East connection For upgrading to a 311 Mbps ring the built in CCDP mode can be activated to use the same single 28 MHz channel and equipment FibeAir 1500P can also be configured as an STM 1 1 1 hot standby terminal in a 1U IDU shelf with either a single or double antenna installation FibeAir 1500P is equipped with an internal SNMP agent for easy integration with standard network management systems and can also be managed via CeraView Ceragon s network element manager and PolyView Ceragon s network management platform FibeAir 1500P also provides an internal Ethernet hub for in band transmission of third party management information As with other FibeAir Family products FibeAir 1500P can operate together with any industry standard ADM FibeAir 1500P features include the following 311 Mbps over a single 28 MHz channel Cost effective 155 Mbps ring solution providing single 1U IDU for East West connectivity Modular design for easy capacity upgrade Cost effective 155 Mbps hot standby protection system Built in Ethernet hub for in band transmission of third party management information Operates in the 6 38 GH
256. ote Unit RMT LED Check alarms and see warning failure if there is a Color is same as most connectivity severe LED indications in problem the remote unit If a connectivity Red may also indicate a alarm exists check disconnected link remote unit alarms General Standby Mode STBY LED The STBY LED None normal Protection illuminates to indicate operation Configuration that the link is operating FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 7 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Interface Troubleshooting Guide IDU Loopback LPBK LED The LPBK LED You can cancel illuminates when loopback in the LPBK RMT LEDs loopback is run for Loopback window testing purposes or by turning the system off and on If loopback is run on the remote unit both LPBK and RMT will illuminate Interface Troubleshooting Guide This section provides solutions to problems caused by input interface equipment If after radio link is installed the payload is not received there may be a problem either with the line interface connection to FibeAir or with external equipment In such cases the table in this section may assist in determining the problem Prior to performing line interface troubleshooting check the following items which are common causes of line interface failures External equipment Tx is connected to FibeAir Rx External equipment Rx is connected to FibeAir Tx Both external equipment and FibeAir are using the s
257. otection 1 1 which is applicable for ring topologies All traffic in the ring is fully protected Path protection guarantees end to end protection down to the tributary level The Path Protection mechanism can operate on either the HO High Order or LO Low Order level The same TU signal is transmitted in both directions of the ring east and west to the receiver on the tributary interface The tributary interface normally receives both signals and chooses the signal from the main path defined in the NMS In case of fiber or radio link disconnection failure or individual trail failure a switch to the protected path will occur in less than 50 msec The criteria for automatic switch to the protection path incudes the following AIS AU MS TU Alarm Indication Signal all signals LOS Loss of Signal LOP AU TU Loss of Pointer LOF Loss of Frame LOM TU Loss of Multiframe UNEQU HP LP Unequipped Signal PLM HP LP Path Label Mismatch TIM HP LP trace ID mismatch EXC MS HP LP Excessive Bit Error Rate Note High priority events appear in bold Automatic switching will occur if the selected path failed and Protection Lockout inhibit function is not active If the current active path reports one of the events listed above but the protection path does not report any of the events or some events with lower priority switching will occur Manual switching is possible via the management system Traffic protected ri
258. otection based on inter connection between two or more terminals see Chapter 7 Protected Configuration 1 24 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir Family System Overview FibeAir 1500 1528 Interfaces FibeAir 1500A 1528A provides the following interfaces STM 1 OC3 Multi Mode Optical Modules 1300 nm ST connector STM 1 0C3 Single Mode Optical Modules 1300 nm or 1500 nm normal or extended range ST FC or SC connectors STM 1 0C3 Electrical Coax Modules CMI coding 75Q BNC connector FibeAir 1500A 1528A Interfaces FibeAir 1500A 1528A provides the following aggregate interfaces STM 1 OC3 multi mode optical modules 1300 nm ST connector STM 1 OC3 single mode optical modules 1300 nm or 1500 nm normal or extended range ST FC or SC connectors RF N type TDM E1 T1 tributary 120 100 Ohm balanced Note FibeAir 1500A 1528A does not include a Wayside Channel option FibeAir 1500P Interfaces FibeAir 1500P provides the following interfaces STM 1 OC 3 Electrical CMI BNC STM 1 OC 3 Optical SM MM Fast Ethernet 100BaseTx Fx TDM 8 x El T1 Note FibeAir 1500P does not include a User Channel option FibeAir 1500AL Interfaces FibeAir 1500AL provides the following interfaces STM 1 Electrical CMI BNC STM 1 Optical SM MM TDM 8 x El T1 Note FibeAir 1500AL does not include a Wayside Channel option FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual
259. oup if you want to delete the group you selected Note that you cannot delete the Admin group For each group to configure access rights for specific CeraView components double click the key icon beside the component name The Access Rights window appears bnabin ae E F z z F E E FF F J z F F F H Figure 5 5 Example of Security Application Access Rights Window Mark the checkboxes of each CeraView component you want the group to have access to and click OK FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 11 Chapter 5 Operation Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility This utility is used to configure Trap Forwarding from Ceragon s NMS to other NMS systems To configure traps sent from a Network Element to the NMS system see the Trap Forwarding section in the Management System menu description To start the utility click Start on the desktop and select Programs CeraView Trap Forwarding Config The Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility main window appears LT lrag forame Dongarra Lela LE Figure 5 6 Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility General Parameters Window The following sections are available by clicking on the appropriate icon on the left side of the window iire Used to set general trap forwarding parameters such as the forwarding mode trap listening port number and others Oroith fons Netact Specie Used to set trap forwardi
260. ower on No communications to ODU RF cable open short Loopback not operated Radio connected If the LED display is not as described above refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting amp Diagnostics IDU Initialization The IDU initialization and basic configuration is performed via the Terminal interface on the IDU front panel using the standard Windows HyperTerminal at 19200 bits per second The basic configuration includes setting IP addresses for the Ethernet and serial ports These are needed for running the CeraView software The system configuration can be completed either by using the HyperTerminal or by using the CeraView application The recommended way to start is by running the Quick Setup Procedure using the HyperTerminal and continue to install the CeraView software FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 9 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Setting IP Addresses for Ethernet and Serial Ports In addition to this section refer to Chapter 4 System Setup Setting IP Addresses for Ethernet and Serial Ports FibeAir includes two IP interfaces an Ethernet interface and a serial interface Each interface has its own IP address and IP mask The IP address is a four digit number separated by decimal points Each IP address is a pair netid hostid where netid identifies a network and hostid identifies a host on the network The IP mask separates between the netid and hostid For example if the IP addr
261. pact E T xj E i com i Figure 5 1 Input Output External Alarms Window The microcontroller in the IDU reads alarm inputs dry contact and transmits them to the CeraView management system This allows FibeAir to report external alarms that are not related to its own system For each alarm on the left side of the window do the following 2 Click on the box next to the alarm number to enable disable the alarm If you enable an alarm enter a description of the alarm in the text field 4 Select the alarm s severity level from the drop down list Major Minor Warning Critical or Event 5 FibeAir 1500P provides three alarm outputs that can be used by other systems to sense FibeAir alarms The outputs are configured in the Alarm Outputs Relay Type area The alarm outputs are Form C Relays Each output relay provides three pins as follows Normally Open NO Normally Closed NC Common C Output alarms can be defined as Major Minor Warning External Power BER Line Loopback LOF IDU ODU Cable or Remote The default alarm output setting for all relays is Power FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus The relays may be connected to customer specific applications Refer to Appendix B for details concerning the alarm connector pin assignments 6 Click Apply to save the settings 7 Click Close Wayside Channel appears only if the channel is included 1 Select Con
262. pecifications General 155 Mbps 16 128 QAM Single Carrier FibeAir Family System Specifications 6 18 GHz Specification 6 GHz 7 8 GHz 11 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz Standards FCC ETSI ETSI FCC ETSI ETSI ETSI FCC ETSI Canada Operating 5 925 6 425 7 1 8 5GHz 10 7 11 7 12 75 14 5 15 35 17 7 19 7 Fequency GHz 6 425 GHz 13 25 GHz GHz GHz Range 7 1 GHz Tx Rx 240 252 04 119 154 500 520 266 MHz 315 420 1010 1560 Spacing 260 266 161 168 530 490 475 728 MHz 340 MHz 182 196 MHz MHz 245 311 32 MHz RF Channel 128 QAM 128 QAM 128 QAM 128 QAM 128 QAM 16 QAM Spacing 28 30 40 28 29 65 28 30 40 28 MHz 28 MHz 50 55 80 16 QAM MHz MHz MHz MHz 128 QAM 128 QAM 40 27 5 MHz 23 38 GHz Specification 23 GHz 26 GHz 28 GHz 32 GHz 38 GHz Standards FCC ETSI ETSI FCC ETSI ETSI ETSI FCC Canada Operating 21 2 23 6 GHz 24 5 26 5 GHz LMDS A1 A2 31 8 33 4 GHz 37 38 4 38 6 Fequency B LMCS ETSI 40 37 39 5 Range GHz Tx Rx 1008 1200 1008 MHz 350 500 1008 812 MHz 700 1260 Spacing 1232 MHz MHz MHz RF Channel 16 QAM 16 QAM 16 QAM 128 QAM 16 QAM Spacing 50 56 MHz 56 MHz 50 56 MHz 28 MHz 50 56 MHz 128 QAM 128 QAM 128 QAM 128 QAM 30 28 MHz 28 MHz 28 MHz 28 MHz For additional Tx Rx schemes please contact your Ceragon representative All Frequencies Capacity 155 Mbps Modulation Type 16 QAM 128 QAM Frequency Sta
263. pled on rising edge 8 9 Appendix A PPP SLIP Driver Installation Installation for Windows 98 PPP SLIP driver installation for Windows 98 requires the CeraView installation CD The installation procedure involves the following steps Installing the nullmdm file Configuring the TCP dial up adapter Adding the SLIP protocol to the dial up adapter only for SLIP users Configuring PPP Insert your CeraView CD in the CD drive and perform the procedures described in the following sections Installing nullmdm 1 Click Start on the desktop and select Settings Control Panel Modems 2 Click Add and choose Other for modem type 3 Click Next Note If a modem was not installed in your system Windows will skip automatically to step 4 4 Inthe Install New Modem window mark Don t detect my modem and click SO MNADY Next Click Have Disk Click Browse and choose your CD drive Double click the SLIP98 directory Select nullmdm inf Click OK and OK again Direct Connection appears Click Next Select Communication Port COM1 or COM2 and click Next The message Your modem has been set up successfully appears Note If a modem was not installed in your system Windows asks for additional area code information 11 Click Finish and then OK FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual A 1 Appendix A PPP SLIP Driver Installation Installation for Windows 98 Configuring TCP Dial Up Adapter 1 2
264. r For NTP Update Interval use the up down arrows to select the amount of time minutes between synchronization updates For Offset from GMT use the arrow buttons and the drop down list to select the amount of time required to compensate for offset from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time For Daylight Saving Time Offset click the arrow buttons to set the amount of time required to compensate for daylight saving For Daylight Saving Time Start click Configure to set the beginning of the daylight saving time period For Daylight Saving Time End click Configure to set the end of the daylight saving time period Select Enable NTP Authentication for secure access to the NTP server If you enable NTP enter the Authentication Public Key and the Authentication Secret Key numbers Click Apply to save the settings 10 Click Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 103 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Alarms Menu Current Alarms F A 1 Select Alarms Current Alarms or click the Current Alarms icon The Current Alarms window appears Current Alarms 10 10 10 170 Severity Source Critical Major Minor AV Warning Event eft Side Temperature Celsius ight Side Temperature Celsius Refresh Close Help Figure 5 22 Current Alarms Window Each line in the window describes a different alarm The source of the alarm appears in th
265. r 5 Operation Toolbar 5 82 If you select Force Switch a switch will occur between the active and standby shelfs and there will be no further switching until you select Clear Force In addition note the following if If you select Lockout you cannot perform a Force Switch or Request Switch If you select Force Switch you cannot perform a Request Switch Commands that you cannot perform will be disabled in the menu Indicates that the system is in the Internal Protection mode with the green arrow indicating the active shelf The Toolbar includes several icons that you can click to perform different operations Each icon in the Toolbar is described in the table below P l ls pO 3 E El i E E S Operation System Information used to view and define system information such as contact personnel and system up time Trap Forwarding Configuration used for trap configuration such as designating managers to which traps will be forwarded Current Alarms used to view current active alarms Alarm Log used to view historical alarm records Input Output External Alarms used to configure alarms sent to from external sources ODU Configuration used to configure the left and right ODUs When XPIC is enabled an x will appear in the icon Loopback used to configure and run left and right unit loopbacks for testing and troubleshooting Refresh used to update the front pan
266. r Pin Out for FibeAir 1500P The Protection connector for FibeAir 1500P is an Rj 45 8 pin male type connector ne ter mom Function Cable Echo 8 x E1 T1 Connector Pin Out for FibeAir 1500P The 8 x E1 T1 connector for FibeAir 1500P is a 36 pin connector onnector Signals Color onnector Signals Color Pin Pin 11 OUT TIP 1 Brown Red TWISTED 1 IN TIP 4 Blue White TWISTED 29 OUT RING 1 Red Brown foe 19 IN RING 1 White Blue a 12 OUT TIP 2 DarkBlue Red TWISTED 2 IN TIP 2 Orange White TWISTED 30 OUT RING 2 Red DarkBlue PAR 20 IN RING 2 White Orange EaR 13 OUT TIP 3 Blue Black TWISTED 3 IN TIP3 Green White TWISTED 31 OUT RING 3 Black Blue AR 21 IN RING3 White Green Ar 14 OUT TIP 4 Orange Black TWISTED 4 IN TIP 4 Brown White TWISTED 32 OUT RING 4 Black Orange ak 22 IN RING 4 White Brown EAR 15 OUT TIP 5 Green Black TWISTED 5 IN TIP5 DarkBlue White TWISTED 33 OUT RING 5 Black Green eR 23 IN RING5 White DarkBlue Ai 16 OUT TIP 6 Brown Black TWISTED 6 IN TIP 6 Blue Red TWISTED 34 OUT RING 6 Black Brown Gi 24 IN RING6 Red Blue CAR 17 OUT TIP 7 DarkBlue Black TWISTED 7 IN TIP 7 Orange Red TWISTED 35 OUT RING 7_ Black DarkBlue PAR 25 IN RING 7 Red Orange oE 18 OUT TIP 8 Blue Yellow TWISTED 8 IN TIP 8 Green Red TWISTED 36 OUT RING 8 Yellow Blue PAR 26 IN RING8 Re
267. r facing down to avoid water accumulation around it e It is recommended to use Coax Seal tape to tape and seal all connection points of the flexible waveguide and diplexer antenna FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 37 Chapter 3 Installation Flange Mating 3 38 ODU Installation for a 6 7 8 GHz System Figure 3 38 Diplexer Tx Low Figure 3 39 Diplexer Tx High Note that the assembly is not sealed when the diplexer is not connected to the ODU During installation or disassembly for maintenance purposes ensure that the ODU and the diplexer are not exposed to dampness or liquid CPR G CPR F Half Thick Gasket Full Thick Gasket CPR G with CPR F Use half thick gasket CPR G Use full thick gasket PDR Use half thick gasket with PDR gasket CPR F with CPR F Mating cannot be pressurized using gaskets Use a different sealing method PDR Use PDR gasket FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation 6 8 GHz Frequency Diversity and 2 0 System Installation 6 8 GHz Frequency Diversity and 2 0 System Installation Note This section refers to 2 0 systems although it is also relevant for N 0 systems The Frequency Diversity method uses two FibeAir links with two active transmitters and receivers on each side of the link connected to one or two antennas The description in this section relates to an installation with one antenna The two transmitters on
268. rail Table Window The table lists up to 16 E1 tributary lines The VC map section of the table displays 63 VCs entire STM 1 capacity and the status of each represented by different colors Gray represents an unused VC Green represents a VC used by an E1 trail and blue represents a VC designated as pass through passes the relay frame as is Note that VC 3 trails can only be configured as pass through 2 For each trail select or deselect the Enable Port box Deselecting the box will block all traffic on that E1 T1 line 3 Inthe Name column click in the text box and enter the name you want for that E1 T1 line 4 In the Main Path column click in the box and select either east or west for the main path 5 The VC and K L M columns are read only The values in those columns represent the Virtual Container mapping for the E1 T1 tributary lines 6 In the Protection column mark the box if you want the tributary line to run in Protected mode whereby traffic will be delivered in both directions 7 The Active Path column shows the current active path 8 In the West and East sections of the window select the payload type for each K number 9 For each VC box you can right click the mouse to change the bi directional connection of the line as follows Clear No connection the channel is not in use FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
269. ration window appears Divers yy Coniagurathan Pi Diversty Tipa I done Spece C Frequency Revere F Enabled Holdattime 3 Seconds Figure 5 33 Diversity Configuration Window For systems in which the Hitless feature was configured select Enabled to activate the feature For systems in which the Hitless feature was configured in the Diversity Type area select either Space or Frequency diversity For Revertive select Enabled if you want normal traffic on the protection path to be switched back to the original path after it recovers from a fault Revertive mode may be required to support specific services whereby the shortest physical route offers better performance If you don t select Revertive no switching to the original fault cleared path will be performed to prevent unnecessary traffic hits and management event reports If you selected Enabled for Hold off Time use the arrow buttons to set the delay period between fault detection and path switching The value can be from 0 to 10 seconds The default is 0 seconds The Receiver Status area shows the last radio from which data was received Click Apply to save the settings Click Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 115 Chapter 5 Operation Menus 5 116 Protection Commands Copy Configuration This option causes the configuration of one unit left or right to be copied to the other 1 Select P
270. ration window appears W in band Configuration 10 10 10 169 PEI V In band Management Enabled Element Type Network element In band Channel Radio Line ecr PPPoE z Time To Live TTL 64 4 Gateway Ring Subnet Address 92 168 1 0 Gateway Ring Subnet Mask Network ID Refresh Close Help Figure 5 27 In band Configuration Window Select In band Management Enabled to activate In band management For Element Type click the drop down list and select the desired element Network Element or Gateway For In band Channel click the drop down list and select the channel you want to use FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus For Time To Live TTL use the up down arrows to select the desired value 6 The Gateway Ring Subnet Address and Gateway Ring Subnet Mask fields are read only 7 For Network ID use the arrow buttons to select the desired value 8 Click Apply to save the settings 9 Click Close to close the window SNMP Configuration 1 Select Configuration Local Remote Management System SNMP Configuration The SNMP Configuration window appears Local SNMP Configuration eUBUBUIB I O xi Read Community public Write Community fretman Trap Community public Apply Refresh Close Help Figure 5 28 SNMP Configuration Window 2 For Read Community enter the community name for read only access For Write Co
271. re protection for FibeAir 1500P in Chapter 5 Operation go to CeraView for FibeAir 1500P and then to Protection 7 20 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration FibeAir 1500P Protected 2 2 Configuration FibeAir 1500P Protected 2 2 Configuration The FibeAir 1500P 2 2 configuration involves the following components e 2 IDUs main and standby with 2 IDCs e For each IDU 2 x STM 1 optical or electrical I O with electrical or optical splitters e 4 ODUs each pair connected to its own antenna polarisation feeder via a PORAM Protected ODU Remote Antenna Mount 1 6 dB coupler This protected configuration delivers 311 Mbps over 28 MHz using 128 QAM modulation 8 MHZ Y The following illustration shows how FibeAir 1500P is set up for a 2 2 XPIC Hot Standby protected configuration Each pair of ODUs connected to its own antenna polarisation feeder via a PORAM 1 6 dB coupler Protection Cable he Electrical or Optical 2 x STM 1 Optical or Splitters Electrical I O FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 21 Chapter 8 Line Interfaces General This chapter provides a description of the FibeAir main channel wayside channel and user channel interfaces The interfaces are located on the FibeAir IDU front panel Main Channel Interfaces Note Pictures shown beside each interface specification are for FibeAir 1500 The appearance is slightly differe
272. rection of the other site 2 Install the two ODUs on a dual polarization antenna using appropriate mounting kit and mark the ODUs with V and H respectively IDU ODU Cable Installation 3 Install two cables between the ODUs and the drawers Note that the cable length difference should not exceed 10 meters 4 Mark the cables with V and H respectively and make sure that V is connected to the right drawer and H is connected to the left drawer Mark the drawers respectively Antenna Alignment 5 Power up drawer V on both ends of the link and configure it to the desired frequency channel and maximum power 6 Align the antennas one at a time until expected RSL is achieved Make sure achieved RSL is no more than 4dB from the expected level Polarization Alignment Polarization alignment is required in order to verify that the antenna feeds are adjusted ensuring that the antenna XPD Cross Polarization Discrimination is achieved Polarization adjustment should be done on one antenna only 7 Disconnect the V cable from the V ODU and connect it to the H ODU 8 Check the RSL achieved in the H ODU and compare it to the RSL achieved by the V ODU 9 Verify that the XPI Cross Polarization Interference is at least 25dB whereby XPI RSI po RS Lyros RSL o LinkRSL with thesamepolarizaton usedat bothsites RSL po LinkRSL withorthogonabolarizatons usedat bothsites 3 46 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Ma
273. rhead bytes including PM bytes B1 B2 B3 management DCCR DCCM Media Specific APS channel bytes K1 K2 trace identifiers JO J1 user channel F1 order wire E1 synchronization status message S1 path signal label C2 path status G1 and others The module also handles AIS and RDI detection and generation Handles insertion and extraction of payload envelopes within VC4 VC3 containers AU pointers H1 H2 H3 processing generation and interpretation accommodation of phase and frequency differences between incoming and outgoing frames via pointer adjustment multi frame alignment TU pointer processing V1 V4 LOP and LOM detection and generation of all traffic control signals Maps PDH signals to VC12 VC11 VC3 virtual containers handles TU pointers V 1 V4 generation and interpretation and TU Overhead V5 J2 N2 K4 termination and processing Handles PDH line termination clock and data recovery decoding encoding and line performance monitoring ADM synchronization module with very accurate internal source clock The module receives different clock sources and re synchronizes network elements It also performs tasks required by hitless switching holdover function jitter and wander attenuation and others User Channel 64 Kbps RS 232 data channel and Order Wire 64 Kbps audio channel FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation FibeAir Family System S
274. ri anhs i DU Serial Pharibes ui Ger OE ar au i he Tans ramhar prii ip rama evel i Zai Tx Larai fi ohidin Franina i Fea a rec Pumber parnm liiir reire i Fem Fix Freq Tiri iced hanin TF enos i Me Te Freq Number eri lin Ta reyinion i ow Tx Freq Murabes j r k Tei 1 ae Ta Level pa sprut anmha 1 ondoned Tx Lewes a piu aceleye i Monitored Rx keel aa mrih ariHaahl 1 Cimen m oa Breni au j EN i current ihn receren ieee Lis sna ES fE Figure 5 7 Configuration Report Window 2 Click Save to save the report in a file for later analysis Configuration File Upload Download This option enables you to upload a configuration file from a FibeAir unit to the management module or download a file from the management module to the FibeAir unit 1 Select File Configuration File Upload from Element Download to Element The Upload Configuration File or Download Configuration File window appears Uoliad Cofiguration Fike 000 107 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 89 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Dowrlsad Configuration Pile 00 00 007 Figure 5 8 Upload Download Configuration File Windows 2 When uploading click Browse and select the directory and name of the file you want the configuration to be uploaded into Then click Upload When downloading click Browse and select the configuration file you want to download Then
275. roller Left Right Drawer Performs a hardware reset of the right left drawer Left Right ODC Performs a hardware reset of the right left Outdoor Unit Controller 5 112 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Clear PM Select this item to reset Performance Monitoring in the unit the number of available intervals will be 0 The options include Entire PM Data clears the performance monitoring log files for both the left and right units Left PM Only clears the performance monitoring log files for the left shelf only Right PM Only clears the performance monitoring log files for the right shelf only Set Default Configuration Select this item to reload the default system configuration The options include Entire Configuration sets default values for the IDC ODC and MUX IDC Configuration sets default values for the IDC only Left Mux Configuration sets default values for the left unit MUX only Right Mux Configuration sets default values for the right unit MUX only Force Far End Tx Level Select this item to force the remote Tx level to the value set for the local IDU Force Far End Mute Off Select this item to enable remote ODU transmission FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 113 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Protection Protection Type 1 Select Protection Protection Protection Type The Protection Type window appears Protection Tre
276. rom out of band management in which the network management software uses a different network overlay network in order to communicate with the managed elements FibeAir 1500P allows you to choose one or two channels for in band management as follows e One channel of any type e One PPPoE channel virtual management channel one other channel of any type e Two radio channels e One radio channel and one fiber channel Note You cannot choose two fiber channels To configure In Band Management 1 Select Configuration Management System In band The In band Configuration window appears ain hand Conhigursithon 410 10 10 160 mie E Bement Type Pieiwort tenent Tine To Live TTL f d AEE nwo My Figure 5 19 In Band Configuration Window 2 Select In Band Management Enabled to activate this management method FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 101 Chapter 5 Operation 5 102 5 6 7 8 Menus If you enabled In Band Management select the channels you want to use for in band management data transfer and select the communication method DCCR DCCM or Proprietary Click the Element Type drop down list and select the type of element If you selected Gateway specify the Gateway Ring Subnet Address and the Gateway Ring Subnet Mask For Time To Live use the up down arrows to select the desired value For Network ID use the up down arrows to select the ID Click Apply t
277. rotection Commands Copy Configuration IDU to Mate Left to Mate Right to Mate IDU to Mate will copy the IDU configuration to another IDU Right to Mate will copy the right drawer configuration to the left drawer Left to Mate will copy the left drawer configuration to the right drawer 2 Inthe confirmation message that appears click Yes Request Switch This option requests a switch between the active and standby radios 1 Select Protection Commands Request Switch 2 Inthe confirmation message that appears click Yes Force Switch This option forces a switch between the active and standby radios 1 Select Protection Commands Force Force Switch Clear Force 2 Inthe confirmation message that appears click Yes 3 To disable the Force Switch option select Clear Force Lockout This option prevents protection switching from occurring 1 Select Protection Commands Lockout Lockout Clear Lockout 2 Inthe confirmation message that appears click Yes 3 To disable the Lockout option select Clear Lockout Diversity Protection Commands Request Switch This option requests a switch between the active and standby radios 1 Select Protection Diversity Commands Request Switch 2 Inthe confirmation message that appears click Yes Lockout This option prevents protection switching from occurring 1 Select Protection Diversity Commands Lockout Lock to Left Radio Lock to Right Radio 2 Inthe confirma
278. rs and perform monitoring activities FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 3 13 Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU Setting the Local Tx Frequency Channel If the Tx frequency was previously defined using the Hyperterminal use this screen only to verify that the correct frequency was set 1 Select Configuration gt Local Remote gt ODU The ODU Configuration window is displayed je a OO Contig aie PL Ey DU Pemer Teie 3 o OR He Gene Spec S MH Aa Penge SO S650 HE Depia Fripe MD WHE Prequenoy Coit amaa EES Tuim fi 4 Ts Frequency BEETS iHe Fa Fiery f WHE F baay Figure 3 7 ODU Configuration Window At the top of the window the system displays Tx Rx ranges the gap between them according to the ETSI standard and the channel bandwidth 2 Inthe Frequency Control section set the Tx Channel to the required channel By default it is set to the first channel If you are unsure of the required channel refer to Appendix E for ETSI channel allocations The frequency of the selected Tx channel appears in the Tx Frequency field 3 Ifyou prefer you may set the Tx frequency by entering a frequency in MHz in the Tx Frequency section If the frequency is not available a warning message appears to enable the entered frequency or to change it to the next available channel 4 For FibeAir 1500P select the XPIC option which appears under the ODU illustration to activate
279. rval TSL Threshold is a value that you can set When a TSL value exceeds the threshold you set the Threshold Exceeded counter at the top of the PM window will register and display the number of seconds the threshold value was exceeded Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The format of the monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above To view daily TSL values over a one month period click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus SDH The SDH Performance Monitoring window displays the number of radio UAS unavailable seconds measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours 1 Select Performance Radio SDH The SDH Monitoring window appears i ma wo oe i i By ne he he nai Figure 5 25 SDH Monitoring Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes Current UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above 2 To view historical SDH values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received ov
280. s describe the CeraView application for FibeAir 1500P For information about system requirements and the CeraView installation procedure see the section General at the beginning of this chapter For information about the CeraView Configuration utility see the section CeraView Configuration at the beginning of this chapter For information about logging in to CeraView see the section Logging in to CeraView at the beginning of this chapter After you log in to CeraView the Main window appears The Main window is your starting point for all operations Below is a description of the menus toolbars and other features of the Main window matie Hinan LN LAN 90 1722 I8 LAB Bi 172 ai bap 77AN ajaajesaala sa Figure 5 1 CeraView for FibeAir 1500P Main Window The Title Bar displays the CeraView version the agent s system name and the agent s IP address The Menu Bar contains menus and menu items used to perform CeraView operations The protection icons indicate the status of the protection system as follows 8 Indicates that the system is in the Lockout or Forced Switch mode The lock icon appears as a result of either a Force Switch or Lockout option selection from the Protection menu If you select Lockout protection switching will not occur even if switch criteria is met until you select Clear Lockout FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 81 Main Window Chapte
281. s similar to the RSL table described above To view Historical RSL values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus SDH The SDH Performance Monitoring window displays the number of radio UAS unavailable seconds measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours 1 Select Performance Radio Left Right SDH The SDH Monitoring graphic window appears of 6 0 2 7 Le aD Be eo ON a ha iii kindi iiaa TETEE i u t Figure 5 27 SDH Monitoring Graphic Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes Current UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the RSL table described above FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 109 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Line The Line Performance Monitoring window displays the number of line UAS unavailable seconds measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours 1 Select Performance Line Left Right The Line Monitoring graphic window appears a Bo OF Bo Oe 97 0 Se eee ee eo ee pa hh al Fal le 1 TEAN CIN anit Dli Cif bare h Dh oA Be Figure 5 28 Line Monitoring Graphic Window Time Elapsed is the
282. same rate is defined in your network manager s dial up connection 7 In 3 The Modem Initialization String leave the default string Note Normally the default should be used unless the modem is connected through a PABX or in any other special case In these cases consult Ceragon Technical Service department 8 Select 4 The Modem Dial Number and enter a number if necessary Note This is the telephone number to which the network manager s modem is connected 9 Select 5 The Modem Inactivity Timer and enter the value 0 Note This parameter states how long should the phone call will remain active when no data is transferred on the line A value of 0 zero disables this inactivity timer 10 Select S Save amp Return to save the settings and return to the Full Configuration menu 4 8 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A Configuring PPP Security Settings The PPP protocol adds security to the communication and therefore additional parameters need to be configured in the system This screen is not relevant for a SLIP connection To configure the PPP Security settings perform the following operations 1 Connect to the Terminal 2 From the Main Configuration menu select Full Configuration 3 From the Full Configuration menu select 3 Serial Configuration 4 From the Serial Configuration menu select 2 PPP Security The P
283. seeeeessaeeseaeeeeees 3 44 XPIC Installation and COMISSIONING ccc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeceaeeesaeeesaeeseeeeessaeeetaeenenes 3 46 Ghapter 4 Systemi SCtup sass cccsscsisnasinatensaaiciccieaianinaiaiientanctnsahninvsuadusaveuereniatenancaaen 4 1 PLCLEQUISILES aiei r or aE AE E EEES EE E I Gadeane A E 4 1 The Setup Prosed r ir simanaiiarans iiair aa eanan annia iea aae tne octet iea aatan neiii 4 1 GETING StaMed E E EEE A A E TE 4 2 Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A eeccececeeeceeeeeeneeeeeeee seas eeeaaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseeeeeeeees 4 4 setup for FibeAir 500P4 ken atads poh atin tla ian ie ie aia iad 4 15 Post Setup ProGOGUure skissata arai aeaa a Arni aeaa Meld a a AE araa a anaa ia aaia sh 4 26 Chapter 5 Operation s nnssnnsssnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn nnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 5 1 ETETE EE EATE A E AE E E E E E EEE AE 5 1 stallati Ms aena a E a te E A a SM ee dae A eee eR 5 2 CeraView Configuration ccccccsceeeececeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaaeseaeeeseaeeseaaesseaeeseeeeesaeseeaesseneeees 5 5 Cera Vie W S CC rMY a a A a a a a aaa 5 8 Trap Forwarding Configuration Utility cceeceeeseceneeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaaeseeaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseaeeeeees 5 12 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Contents EOG GING INTO COLAVIOW i eirin etna a aaraa aaa a a e E e a a aE aa E aT aaas 5 15 CeraView for FibeAir 1500 1528 oe eeecececeeceeneeeeneeeeeeeeceaaeeeeaeeseeee
284. side channel interfaces The pinouts provided include Dual 10BaseT FibeAir 1500P Dual E1 T1 FibeAir 1500P EITI 10BaseT RS 530 V 24 RS 232 X 21 Dual 10BaseT Connector Pin Out FibeAir 1500P Pin Function 1 Ch1_Tx Ch1_Tx Ch1_Rx Ch2_Tx Ch2_Tx Ch1_Rx Ch2_Rx CO N OD oO BI Ww PP Ch2_Rx Dual E1 T1 Connector Pin Out FibeAir 1500P Pin Function _h Ch1_Rx Ch1_Rx Ch2_Rx Chi_Tx Ch1_Tx Ch2_Rx Ch2_Tx CO N OD oO BI Ww PP Ch2_Tx FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual B 9 Appendix B Connector Pin Outs Wayside Channel Connector Pin Outs E1 T1 Connector Pin Out RJ 45 Male Connector Signal Pin A 1 Receive Positive Primary 2 Receive Negative Primary 3 Receive Positive Secondary 4 Transmit Positive Primary 5 Transmit Negative Primary 6 Receive Negative Secondary 7 Transmit Positive Secondary 8 Transmit Negative Secondary 10BaseT Connector Pin Out FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Signals Pin Signals Pin TWISTED Out Tx Ch2 1 TWISTED Out Ch1 Tx 4 PAIR Right 2 PAIR Left 5 TWISTED In Rx Ch2 3 TWISTED In Chi Rx 7 PAIR Right 6 PAIR Left 8 Appendix B Connector Pin Outs RS 530 Pin Out
285. ssion When you select this item the CeraView login window appears for you to specify the IP address of the FibeAir unit you want to access Remote Session Exit Select this item to log in for a new CeraView remote session The new session will appear in addition to the current session When you select this item the CeraView login window appears for you to specify the IP address of the FibeAir unit you want to access Select this item to exit the CeraView application You can also exit by clicking on the Close icon x in the title bar If you select Exit and a continuous logging operation is still active you will be prompted to confirm the exit Note It is recommended to use this option if you need to manage more than one FibeAir unit simultaneously FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 91 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Configuration Menu 5 92 External Alarms The procedure detailed in this section is required only if alarms generated by external equipment are connected to the IDU or if the IDU alarm outputs are connected to other equipment using the alarms I O connector 1 Select Configuration IDU External Alarms or click the External Alarms icon or click the Alarms In Out area in the physical view The External Alarms window appears lignit Chiljut External Aberin ey External Maar puis Aam Exaile Teed Sever 4 E Poo mpera Eus a Alarm Cupis Bea Type rl Ll rm po
286. st Click the upper button in the trail list tl to select an external trail loopback test Click the lower button in the trail list al to select an internal trail loopback test 3 Set the LoopBack Clear Timeout scale to the amount of time you want the test to run When a radio or line loopback test is running a pie display to the right of the timeout scale shows how much time is left for the test see the figure above The Timeout scale is used only for radio and line loopbacks 5 76 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus 4 Click Apply to run the test When you are done with loopback testing click Close to close the window Note that closing the window will not stop the loopback test To stop a test unmark it by clicking on the relevant arrow button and then click Apply Software Reset Select Maintenance Software Reset to reset the IDU agent software for maintenance purposes Clear PM Select this item to clear the Performance Monitoring log files Force Far End Tx Level Select this item to force the remote Tx level to the value set for the local IDU Force Far End Mute Off Select this item to mute remote ODU transmission This setting will override the setting in the Local ODU Configuration window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 77 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Protection Radio Protection 1 Select Protection Radio Protection Configuration
287. st have grounding points on the AC and DC sides Power supply grounding should be in accordance with the following illustration AC Outlet O GND C AAA 1 AC cord GND to the rack and to Earth c E SU connector P chassis 4 DC Output GND to the rack the PSU s CAUTION tthe rack chassis Shorting the to the GND and and to Earth will damage the IDU s internal to Earth PSU Please Note It is most important not to short the 48 VDC to GND This will damage the IDU s internal power supply module and terminate its operation 3 8 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation Setting Up the IDU IDU Power On Setting Up the IDU 1 Turn the IDU power switch to ON The LED display for FibeAir 1500 15281500A 1528A should appear as follows LED PWR EER LFER STBY LINE IDU LOF ODU BER CBL LBK RMT Color Green Green Red Green Red Red Red Red Green Red Explanation Power on Normal operation No input to main channel High Ber IDU operating and no IDU alarm Loss of Frame detected no radio connection No communications to ODU Excessive bit error rate detected RF cable open short Loopback not operated Remote unit not connected The LED display for FibeAir 1500P should appear as follows DRMR LED DDU DRWR ODU CBL LPBK RADIO Color Green Red Red Green Green Explanation P
288. stributor IDU POWER 5V OK Power Supply Power supplies are checked periodically If a failure occurs or during unit power up when the power supply is OK this message is issued IDU POWER 8V Power Supply Problem in the IDU 8V power supply FAILURE To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Power supply alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU POWER 8V OK Power Supply Power supplies are checked periodically If a failure occurs or during unit power up when the power supply is OK this message is issued IDU POWER 3 3V Power Supply Problem in the IDU 3 3V power supply FAILURE To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Power supply alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU POWER 3 3V OK Power Supply Power supplies are checked periodically If a failure occurs or during unit power up when the power supply is OK this message is issued 6 20 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Alarm Log File Messages Message Trap Issued Cause Corrective Action IDU POWER 5V FAILURE Power Supply Problem in the IDU 5V power supply To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Power supply alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor IDU POWER 5V OK Power Supply Power supplies are checked periodically If a failure occurs or during unit power up when th
289. tandby unit becomes active FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 7 1 Chapter 7 Protection Configuration Configuration Options Theory of Operation The system protects the main link from an IDU or ODU unit failure on the local side the remote side or both sides However simultaneous failures in both units on the same side cannot be protected A failure in the main data channel triggers the protection mechanism After protection switching all channels are transferred through a new active unit Four backup combinations are possible as shown in the following figure Main channel rg ie i MBE d Wayside channel _ E a o a Da i t E User channel 7 wi Ls J j i F Pie a Bias EC Figure 7 2 Hot Standby Backup Combinations 7 2 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 7 Protection Configuration Configuration Options Configuration Options The system provides two configuration options for protection fully redundant link and shared antenna Fully Redundant Link The fully redundant link consists of two complete links as shown below af La J Figure 7 3 Fully Redundant Link Configuration If no management connection exsts between the sides the following configuration is recommended This configuration enables all four units to be managed from a single connection on one side I Ethernet lt gt Ethernet User Channel _ Etherh
290. tem In addition status alarms and indicators are provided on the front panel meee Ce ma ae See g The main IDU modules include e Network Interfaces e Multiplexer MUX e Modem e Manager Card e Cable Interface e Power Supply The MUX module functions as a Sonet SDH Regenerator On the line side it interfaces the OC 3 STM 1 stream and on the radio side the Modem module As a regenerator the MUX either terminates or regenerates the OC 3 STM 1 RSOH In one direction the OC 3 STM 1 stream interfacing through the MUX Rx line input terminates and the resulting stream is transmitted to the Modulator in the Modem module In the opposite direction the stream coming from the Modem s Demodulator undergoes OC 3 STM 1 Regeneration in the MUX and transmitted through the MUX Tx line output In addition the MUX module uses the OC 3 STM 1 SOH bytes to support other services 1 544 2 048 Mbps Wayside channel and management 64 Kbps User Channel and Order Wire channel The MUX module may be configured via software for transparency of most of the SOH bytes for maximum system transparency and non intervention at the cost of reduced functionality and services The multiplexer module enables to integrate different interfaces and services into the SDH payload to converge Datacom and Telecom applications FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation In Door Unit IDU Modem FibeAir 150
291. tes UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes The format of the UAS monitoring table is similar to the Line UAS table described above 2 To view historical UAS values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days 5 142 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Maintenance Loopback Select Maintenance Loopback or click the Loopback icon a The Loopback window appears Loopieck LAFA 000010 REE Figure 5 22 Loopback Window 2 Click the upper button on the west side Bl select an external radio loopback test Click the lower button on the west side to select an internal radio loopback test Click the upper button on the east side a to select an external line loopback test Click the lower button on the east side to select an internal line loopback test Click the upper button in the trail list tH to select an external trail loopback test Click the lower button in the trail list 1 to select an internal trail loopback test 3 Set the LoopBack Clear Timeout scale to the amount of time you want the test to run When a radio or line loopback test is running a pie display to the right of the timeout scale shows how much time is left for the test 4 Click Apply to run the test
292. th ends The connectors have the following pin outs i a oo N OD Oo BF WO YD oOo nN OD HO BF OD L o E CON J 45 CON J 45 SELF MASTER ECHO OUT TXD SELF OK MATE OK GND RXD FU_PROG MATE MASTER ECHO IN PO DMNA UO BWNH EP ovrvrvrveveVv Ve Y LY B 6 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix B Connector Pin Outs Impedance Cable Pin Out 8xDS1 100 ohm Impedance amp 8xE1 120 ohm Impedance Cable Pin Out The DB 44 connectors provide balanced 120 Ohm impedance for E1s and 100 Ohm balanced impedance for T1s It is not recommended to connect the cable shield to the chassis GND of the other side unless there is no chassis GND on the other side Twisted Pairs Signals ai lu Color IN RING 1 2 Dark Blue White Tvisied Parr IN TIP 1 1 White Dark Blue l IN RING 2 17 Orange White Tivisted Farr IN TIP 2 16 White Orange IN RING 3 32 White Green Twisted Pair IN TIP_ 3 31 Green White IN RING 4 4 Brown White Taed Pal IN TIP 4 3 White Brown IN RING 5 19 Light Blue White Twisled Pair IN TIP 5 18 White Light Blue IN RING 6 34 Dark Blue Red Twisted Pair IN TIP_ 6 33 Red Dark Blue l IN RING 7 5 Orange Red PaSed Par IN TIP 7 20 Red Orange i IN RING 8 21 Green Red EE ea Fa
293. the channel will operate but no alarms will be generated 6 In the Regenerator Section Trace Identifier area select JO Operation to use the JO byte as a trace identifier in the SDH RSOH If you activate JO use the Transmitted JO and Expected JO fields to define the IDU identifier string Select Send AIS on RS TIM if you want Alarm Indication Signals to be sent in the event of RS TIM Trace Identification Mismatch 7 Click Apply to save the settings 8 Click Close to close the window FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Radio 2 1 Select Configuration Local Remote Interfaces Radio The STM 1 Configuration window appears al foal Radio Conhiqeiration 10 1010 n Radio Thresholds Link Parameters Excessvecror IEA uno Sgn Degrade free BER ie Error Rate fema E Ea E Figure 5 23 Radio Interface Configuration Window alarm is issued 3 Inthe Signal Degrade field select the level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued 4 The BER field is read only For Link ID enter the ID of the link you are working with Menus In the Excessive Error field select the level above which an Excessive BER Note When working with an IDU that has the LINK ID feature on one end and an IDU that does not have this feature on the other end set the LINK ID to 1 6 Click Apply to save the settings 7 Click Close to close the window Management System
294. the modem appears 9 Click Finish 10 In the window that appears select the required port 11 Select Properties and set the Maximum speed rate to the rate of the FibeAir serial port default is 19200 12 Select Connection and set the following parameter values Data bits 8 Parity NONE Stop bit 1 13 Mark Cancel the call if not connected within 1 sec 14 In the Advanced area unmark Use error control and Use flow control 15 Click OK and OK again 16 Click Close 17 Click Yes and restart the computer FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual A 5 Appendix A PPP SLIP Driver Installation Installation for Windows NT 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Click Start on the desktop and select Settings Control Panel Network Services Click Add Select Remote Access Server Click OK Click Continue RAS drivers are installed and the Remote Access Setup window appears Click Add In the window that appears click OK Click Network Verify that only TCP IP dial out protocol is marked Click OK Click Configure In Port Usage verify that DIAL OUT ONLY is marked Click OK Click Continue Click Close Click Yes to restart your computer Configuring the TCP Dial Up Adapter A 6 a OW Oe Ne 10 11 Double click My Computer and then Dial up Networking Enter a new name In the Dial using area select the required COM Unmark Use
295. thernet and DS3 E3 combines wireless Fast Ethernet and DS3 E3 interfaces for various applications such as the corporate and campus environment Fast Ethernet and 8xE1 T1 combines wireless Fast Ethernet and 8xE1 T1 interfaces for various applications that require E1 T1 tributary lines 3XE3 3XDS3 broadband wireless solutions for Wide Area Networks WANs Metropolitan Area Networks MANSs and Corporate Campus applications 2XFast Ethernet wireless Fast Ethernet applications for the Corporate and Campus environment and Internet Service Providers ISPs The following figure illustrates a Telecom and Datacom Convergence wireless network Telecom Datacom Convergence 1 6 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Applications LMDS Backhaul LMDS Backhaul The high capacity FibeAir 1500 1528 is the ideal wireless building block for the LMDS Backhaul network Operating in the LMDS frequency bands the system offers a wireless SONET SDH ring solution delivering high spectral efficiencies The system can also provide 155Mbps link from a hub to a large customer and additional connections can be made to the PSTN and ISP FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 7 Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir 1500A 1528A FibeAir 1500A 1528A Ceragon s FibeAir Family includes FibeAir 1500A 16 QAM modem and FibeAir 1528A 128 QAM modem FibeAir 1500A 1528A is Ceragon s SDH IDU with a
296. tinuously lights to indicate the existence of input voltage Out Door Unit ODU The ODU is designed to be fastened to the antenna using four latches The antenna is mounted on a standard mounting pole The ODU is enclosed in a compact weather proof enclosure and connects to the IDU via a single coaxial cable that can extend up to 300m 1000 ft The ODU major modules include e T R Module A high sensitivity RF circuitry with full band frequency tuning range e Controller Controls the ODU and provides ODU status signals and accurate received signal level RSL reading in dBm e Cable Combiner e Power Supply FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 2 5 Chapter 2 Theory of Operation Out Door Unit ODU Latches Figure 2 5 ODU Mounted on the Antenna Note For FibeAir systems operating at 6 7 or 8 GHz the ODU is connected to an external diplexer via an adapter plate See the end of Chapter 3 Installation for details concerning the dipelxer 2 6 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 2 Theory of Operation FibeAir 1500A 1528A FibeAir 1500A 1528A FibeAir 1500A 1528A is Ceragon s SDH IDU with a built in Add Drop Multiplexer The built in ADM increases system reliability and reduces overall system cost Using FibeAir 1500A 1528A saves the network planner a substantial cost of installing stand alone ADMs If site expansion is necessary at a later time beyond 32 Els FibeAir 1500
297. tion you can configure the following VC Calculation from KLM Use Metric Display SNMP Default Write Community Select Interface Language FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual For ADM tributary paths Defines the formula used to calculate the VC Virtual Container from the KLM values Select True if you want values to be displayed in metric units The default SNMP write community Leave this field blank if you didn t change the SNMP write community value in the network element configuration The language in which the CeraView application will appear 5 7 Chapter 5 Operation CeraView Security CeraView Security This section explains how to set up Cera View security Starting the Security Application To start the CeraView Security Application in the Start menu on your desktop select Programs CeraView CeraView Security The Security application main window appears 0 rravirw Seam Apphicataan Beliase Lii Fis Edi Finis A Cary nw s Sanri ein veered a Grom Aiki Obrer Figure 5 2 CeraView Security Application Main Window Using the Security Application 5 8 Security for CeraView is obtained by creating users and user groups with designated access rights to the different CeraView components Note that upon installation two users and two groups are created as follows Users Admin Always placed in the Admin group Viewer Initially placed in the Observer group
298. tion message that appears click Yes 3 To disable the Lockout option select Clear Lockout FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation CeraView for FibeAir 1500AL CeraView for FibeAir 1500AL Main Window Title Bar Menu Bar The following sections describe the CeraView application for FibeAir 1500AL For information about system requirements and the CeraView installation procedure see the section General at the beginning of this chapter For information about the CeraView Configuration utility see the section CeraView Configuration at the beginning of this chapter For information about logging in to CeraView see the section Logging in to CeraView at the beginning of this chapter After you log in to CeraView the Main window appears The Main window is your starting point for all operations Below is a description of the menus toolbars and other features of the Main window DereView Poelegsr Bi LA TA J0 00001 20 mE Ef Figure 5 1 CeraView for FibeAir 1500AL Main Window The Title Bar displays the CeraView version and the IP address of the IDU being accessed The Menu Bar contains menus and menu items used to perform CeraView operations FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 117 Chapter 5 Operation Toolbar Physical View Physical View The Toolbar includes several icons that you can click to perform different operatio
299. tive you will be warned about the active file FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 35 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Performance Menu Radio RSL The RSL Performance Monitoring window displays received signal level values measured over the past 24 hours 1 Select Performance Local Remote Radio RSL The RSL Monitoring window appears Lore HSL Acorn LUE rar Cumina o ea fer ea fi rekes a Local R bMnrinirg qe a ah oh poet ud ao ima iai 1 48 Teas ines pa BE uia risso RSL ehki OREL Teeehold 1 EAF LA o E x Eb Fri4 oe E Ga y Bidari ijah i H m x rr LL E Maii l a Deter Li E Hi E iy y merer ii bi El my m Ari Lm o mai y tei Wd 5 aii F iiai 1h a j k i Figure 5 31 RSL Monitoring Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes The Threshold Exceeded counters at the top of the window display the number of seconds threshold values were exceeded during the current interval Current Min RSL values are the minimum received level measured during the interval Current Max RSL values are the maximum received level measured during the interval Unfaded RSL is the theoretical expected RSL value not the actual value which can be calculated by the user as a function of distance frequency etc The value is used only for reference purposes RSL Threshold 1 and RSL Threshold 2 are values that you can set When a
300. too strong 2 Hardware failure To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe radio alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor ODU RX LEVEL IS IN Radio Previous error is cleared RANGE ODU ATPC IS NOT Radio Future use only ACTIVE ODU ATPC IS ACTIVE Radio Future use only ODU EXTREME Temperature ODU temperature is either above 67 C TEMPERATURE 152 F or below 37 C 34 F CONDITIONS To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Temperature alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor ODU NORMAL Temperature ODU temperature was restored to normal TEMPRATURE operating conditions 33 C 27 F lt T lt CONDITIONS 63 C 145 F ODU LOOPBACK IS Maintenance Future use only NOT ACTIVE ODU LOOPBACK IS ACTIVE Maintenance Future use only MUX LINE LOSS OF SONET SDH After three consecutive SONET SDH main FRAME LLOF channel only frame losses this alarm is issued To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Sonet alarm is still active contact your Ceragon distributor MUX NO LINE LOSS SONET SDH Issued when a valid frame is recognized OF FRAME following an LLOF state MUX LINE LOSS OF Line Main channel does not receive a valid input SIGNAL LOS signal To correct 1 Check current alarm status 2 Ifthe Line alarm is still active contact FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Alarm Log File Messages
301. traffic protection without the need for redundant equipment as is required for protected 1 1 configurations The system supports path protection and synchronization mechanisms and implements In Band Management for seamless integration in the network The following are features of the 1500AL system e Optimized carrier class wireline solution for cellular and service providers e Complies with SDH standards e Provides up to 16 El tributaries or an STM 1 tributary interface and an electrical optical aggregate e Path protection and network synchronization e External synchornization inputs outputs e Unique SNMP based element and network management supports path protection clock synchronization NTP server connection and in band management e Up to 4 FibeAir 1500AL IDUs can be stacked to provide connections for up to 63 Els Or alternatively FibeAir 1500AL can be configured with an STM 1 tributary and an STM 1 to 63 E1 Access Mux e Provides remote software download for Ceragon units in the system FibeAir 1500AL supports ring and chain topologies with full add drop functionality and path protection in the ring As a standard ADM it can easily be integrated in the network with other vendor equipment FibeAir s standard in band management capability enables management of external equipment and FibeAir products within the SDH network External clock signals can be input for precise synchronization with other equipment in the
302. trap meachnism is working 8 Click Apply to save the settings Click Close NTP Configuration NTP Network Time Protocol configuration is performed when an NTP server is used to synchronize network activity Select Configuration Management System NTP The NTP Configuration window appears EuT Configuration 0 00 1800 ME E HIFP Sever P Adirasss i oo NIP Uessie interval f Minutes O fsel trom GMT h afo cir mnie Dagi Smig meed N Enable NTP Authentication 7 nananet gt 1 p gt fo fc fps Figure 5 15 NTP Configuration Window Enter the IP of the NTP server For NTP Update Interval use the up down arrows to select the amount of time minutes between synchronization updates For Offset from GMT use the arrow buttons and the drop down list to select the amount of time required to compensate for offset from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time For Daylight Saving Time Offset click the arrow buttons to set the amount of time required to compensate for daylight saving For Daylight Saving Time Start click Configure to set the beginning of the daylight saving time period For Daylight Saving Time End click Configure to set the end of the daylight saving time period Select Enable NTP Authentication for secure access to the NTP server If you enable NTP enter the Authentication Public Key and the Authentication Secret Key numbers FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter
303. ts The SDH path overhead includes signal label information that indicates the composition of the signal For FibeAir1500A 1528A the signal labels are automatically set according to the traffic on off status as defined in the table below If the received signal label is not as expected a PLM alarm is generated FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Trail fa Signal Label Data Menus VC Level Value Traffic On Traffic Off VC 12 bits 5 7 of V5 Transmit Value Expected Receive Value 010 asynchronous floating 010 asynchronous floating or 001 equipped non specific 000 unequipped 000 unequipped VC 3 C2 byte Transmit Value Expected Receive Value 041 asynchronous mapping of 34 45 Mbit s 044 asynchronous mapping of 34 45 Mbit s or O14 equipped non specific 00 unequipped 001 unequipped The Trail Table maps the VCs Virtual Containers representing the E1 lines Using this table you can set several parameters for each line such as the path name and protected configuration 1 Select Configuration IDU Trail or click the Trail Configuration icon The Trail Configuration window appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 55 Chapter 5 Operation 5 56 Menus Tae Tradl Contig adion 10 Ses F fe E E F a b a E R F F a E Figure 5 9 T
304. tting data FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 8 5 Chapter 8 Line Interfaces 8 6 Pin Function e Power Sippy Tavos Ce ec o Main Channel Interfaces FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Line Interfaces Wayside Channel Interfaces Wayside Channel Interfaces Note Pictures shown beside each interface specification are for FibeAir 1500 The appearance is slightly different for other FibeAir products FibeAir 1500P 1500AL but the specifications are the same The Wayside channel delivers 1 544 2 048 Mbps via the following interfaces 10Base T Ethernet Connector Shielded RJ 45 Used with UTP Cat 5 Protocols supported Ethernet 10Base T half or full duplex Timing mode Retimed Range 100m Impedance 100 Q 10Base T LED Indicators LED Indication LINK Normal operation COLL Collision occurred RX LAN receiving data TX Yellow LAN transmitting data 10Base T Connector Pin Out Pee FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 8 7 Chapter 8 Line Interfaces 8 8 E1 G 703 Option 1 Connector Used with Protocols supported Timing mode Range calculation Impedance Option 2 Connector Used with Protocols supported Timing mode Range Impedance G 703 E1 Connector Pinout Wayside Channel Interfaces BNC Coax cable E1 G 703 Retimed 12 7 dB at 78 MHz according to square root of freq
305. uency law 150 m is attainable when using RG 59 B U cables cable length varies in accordance with type 75 0 Shielded RJ 45 UTP Cat 5 E1 Retimed 100 m 1200 T1 Connector Used with Impedance Type Impedance RJ 45 UTP Cat 5 Balanced 100 Q T1 Connector Pinout FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 8 Line Interfaces Order Wire Channel Interface o Order Wire Channel Interface The Order Wire is used for audio transmission for testing or maintenance purposes The specifications for this channel are as follows Termination type Frequency band KHz Input output impedance ohms Input output backside signal attenuation dB out of frequency band Input signal level dBm Output signal level dBm Signal level vs frequency dB Output noise input short circuit dB Perfect idle channel noise dB Single tone interference level dBm User Channel Interface USER 6NKb 5 The User channel delivers 64 Kbps Headset stereo plug 0 3 3 4 600 symmetrical For 300 600 KHz not less than 16 For 600 3400 KHz not less than 20 1 1 In accordance with ITU T G 712 60 63 Up to 50 The specifications for this channel are as follows Protocol Frequency Data to Clock Rise Fall Clock Trigger FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual RS 232 64 KHz Rx data from radio transmitted on falling edge Tx data to radio sam
306. ues that you can set When an RSL value exceeds the thresholds you set the Threshold Exceeded counters at the top of the PM window will display the number of seconds the threshold values were exceeded 5 70 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Tene Mane ifaw AOL Tertanokt 1 Eaneeaied Tew eeehced Ente ETIE i m E JE TETEN is a i ji ey ET a i i mabey 7a a j othe fa Ty za 1 T Bee 13 is I 1 a L TI 4 i ial sen a ore A Menus Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The monitoring table displays RSL values over the last 24 hours The values are the same as those that appear in the graph only in table format The Min RSL column shows the minimum received level measured during the interval The Max RSL column shows the maximum received level measured during the interval The Integrity column indicates whether or not the values received at that time and date are reliable A red x icon in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure event that occurred at that time This column corresponds to the Doubtful indication in the graphic window Click Advanced for the additional Threshold 1 Exceeded and Threshold 2 Exceeded columns which list the number of times RSL thresholds specified in the main RSL M
307. uipment and the loop is confirmed 101101110 Equipment iooi gt Radio Link Figure 6 1 Loopback FibeAir is capable of performing loopback testing at several points in the link The test is run from the CeraView management software or via the SNMP protocol During the loopback test an alarm indication will appear to remind you to cancel the test when you are done The following loopback tests can be performed from the window Local 155 MB s Line Interface Wayside Channel 64 KB s User Channel Local IDU 101101110 Eguiprent LocalIDU f Modem amp to ODU gt eee eer K Interfaces a IF Figure 6 2 Local Loop Full IDU all three inputs through the IDU modulator and looped in the IF Remote 155 MB s Line Interface Wayside Channel 64 KB s User Channel FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 6 11 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Fault Isolation Using Loopbacks Local IDU 101101110 Eadem gt LocalIDU Modem amp 401101110 Interfaces IF Figure 6 3 Remote Loop Full Radio Link Loopback local external equipment through the radio link to the remote line interface module back through the radio link to the local external equipment Local Terminal Remote Terminal 101101110 pee UE Modem N A Local Local Remote Line Equipment amp J TSON IDU opu
308. unit to reset after the software is successfully downloaded 5 Inthe Software Download window click Apply The software file you chose is downloaded and a progress report appears in the Download Log area New Session Select this item to log in for a new CeraView session The new session will appear in addition to the current session When you select this item the CeraView login window appears for you to specify the IP address of the FibeAir unit you want to access Exit Select this item to exit the CeraView application You can also exit by clicking on the Close icon x in the title bar When you exit CeraView you will be prompted to confirm the exit Click OK to confirm the operation 5 24 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Configuration Menu IDU External Alarms The procedure detailed in this section is required only if alarms generated by external equipment are connected to the IDU or if the IDU alarm outputs are connected to other equipment using the alarms I O connector 1 Select Configuration Local Remote IDU External Alarms or click the External Alarms icon The Local Remote External Alarms window appears IDE al bout jihat External Alarma 11 10 1 0 108 Bill FS External Alison noe Alarm outpubs Sern Enable Teed Caas Fari Type t p Frema bia 1 Fa Sy ICT rrr e e E 3 fF bere fem 1 es 4 of Fresas Evert il a fesi EP Emas e oe
309. uration 3 From the Full Configuration menu select 6 ODU Configuration The ODU Configuration menu appears FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 5 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A g Cen Hepes i fna Ele kat Yew Gat unis nolej alz cles a Connected 1 25 15 ah VEG HH 1 Figure 4 5 ODU Configuration Menu 4 Select 1 Transmit level 5 Enter the desired transmit level The acceptable values are between 10 dBm and 15 dBm Take into account the received level you expect the default received level is 15 dBm 6 Select S Save amp Return to save the settings and return to the Full Configuration menu For frequencies other than 38 GHz the transmit level can be higher than 15 dBm Refer to Appendix E for more details Setting the IP Addresses To set the IP Addresses perform the following operations 1 Connect to the Terminal 2 From the Main Configuration menu select Full Configuration 3 From the Full Configuration menu select 1 IP Configuration The IP Configuration menu appears 4 6 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500 1528 1500A 1528A p Deron Hee Teil Es Ext Yew Dall Trercter Gein Die alg elal E Connected 126 7 AGI 13a Figure 4 6 IP Configuration Menu For Ethernet Configuration 6 Select 1 Agent Ethernet IP Address and enter the IP address 7 Select
310. urrent interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes UAS is the Un Available Seconds value of the current interval The value can be between 0 and 900 seconds 15 minutes Doubtful values are values that were not generated during normal system operation For example the values may have been generated during a system reset or failure The monitoring table displays UAS values over the last 24 hours The values are the same as those that appear in the graph only in table format The Integrity column indicates whether or not the values received at that time and date are reliable A red x icon in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure event that occurred at that time This column corresponds to the Doubtful indication in the graphic window 2 To view historical UAS values click History The values shown in the window that appears are values that were received over the last 30 days 5 140 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus Tributaries The Tributaries Performance Monitoring window displays the UAS number of Unavailable Seconds per interval measured every 15 minutes over the last 24 hours on the E1 T1 interface 1 Select Performance Tributaries E1 The Tributary Monitoring graphic window appears Leial El Motion cere SS Le be Kia a MA Oh he ok MH MO M hi
311. ut the different software versions currently used in the system Maintenance 3 used to perform software upload download and reset Diagnostics 4 used to perform loopbacks and obtain system information Logs 5 used to view alarm and configuration logs Configuration To configure FibeAir 1500P 1 In the main menu shown in the section Getting Started at the beginning of this chapter select 1 Configuration The Configuration menu appears Liter aie fi FIBEADA CERNGOM HETH lenf iguratinn D theft Drawer hight rauer Corsia OCT 116 ARS VW HT Esgin Cari MUM Figure 4 10 Configuration Menu 2 Select the module you want to configure by typing the number beside it 3 In the screen that appears select either Basic or Advanced parameters FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 4 15 Chapter 4 System Setup Setup for FibeAir 1500P The following screen appears for IDC Basic Ed Waw al Jrarcter bein Dice alg alej Hain Manu CFG 1b CFG 0 bC Barde Ceat iparat ion SUPER USER nterface I FIBERIA CERAGOH HETWORKS LTD 172 168 1 121 BG Bazic Conf igurat ion Fuit F n band iConecied Dr EnO TST KH Figure 4 11 IDC Basic Configuration The following screen appears for IDC Advanced sain Panu HFG LEG GFU ch yaratilsa mie LTD 72 1694 igi ED Adyangad Ilac k Guit aua amp Baturn bao Se eee ta latm L 3 7 E Standard protocol DHf0HET
312. ut the need for redundant radio equipment as is required for protected 1 1 radio configurations The system supports path protection and synchronization mechanisms and implements In Band Management for seamless integration in the network Ceragon s management concept involves Ceragon management applications integrated with existing network management platforms 1 8 FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Features Applications Features FibeAir network management is controlled by Ceragon s network management software CeraView Ceragon s SNMP based GUI element manager and Poly View Ceragon s open interface network management software run on Windows 98 2000 NT and over HP OpenView Windows or UNIX CeraView and PolyView extend HP OpenView functionality for Ceragon elements in the network The following are features of the 1500A 1528A systems Optimized carrier class wireless wireline solution for cellular and service providers Provides up to 31 E1 T1 tributary interfaces per site optical and or radio aggregate Path protection and network synchronization in accordance with SONET SDH standards External synchornization inputs outputs Unique SNMP based element and network management supports path protection and in band management FibeAir 1500A 1528A supports ring and chain topologies with full add drop functionality and path protection in the ring
313. uts Alarm mips 1 e Premam fe d TEN ara n sor fe Pe oll e y TE ot Sos oo l Figure 5 1 Input Output External Alarms Window The microcontroller in the IDU reads alarm inputs dry contact and transmits them to the CeraView management system This allows FibeAir to report external alarms that are not related to its own system For each alarm on the left side of the window do the following 2 Click on the box next to the alarm number to enable disable the alarm If you enable an alarm enter a description of the alarm in the text field 4 Select the alarm s severity level from the drop down list Major Minor Warning or Event 5 FibeAir provides five alarm outputs that can be used by other systems to sense FibeAir alarms The outputs are configured on the right side of the window The alarm outputs are Form C Relays Each output relay provides three pins as follows Normally Open NO Normally Closed NC Common C Output alarms can be defined as Major Minor Warning External Power Line or Loopback The default alarm output setting for all relays is Power The relays may be connected to customer specific applications Refer to Appendix B for details concerning the alarm connector pin assignments FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Menus 6 Click Apply to save the settings 7 Click Close Auxiliary Channel In the Auxiliary Channel window you c
314. veEror frema F Ji pension Signe Degrade ie BER EA Error Rate fe Bka Ti gm o Tonea nea Epsd Fenman Erebled E ae i Send AS on RS TIM Asiy noven cose nes Figure 5 13 STM1 Interface Configuration Window 2 Inthe Excessive Error field select the level above which an Excessive BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link 3 Inthe Signal Degrade field select the level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link 4 The BER field is read only and shows the above which a BER alarm is issued for errors detected over the radio link 5 Inthe STM1 field select Enabled to activate the interface 6 Inthe Regenerator Section Trace Identifier area select JO Operation to use the JO byte as a trace identifier in the SDH RSOH If you activate JO use the Transmitted JO and Expected JO fields to define the IDU identifier string Select Send AIS on RS TIM 7 Click Apply to save the settings 8 Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 61 Chapter 5 Operation Menus El 1 Select Configuration Interfaces E1 or click the 8xE1 area in the CeraView main window FibeAir physical view The E1 Ports Configuration window appears PEFR EEE S PEREFERR Figure 5 14 E1 Ports Configuration Window 2 In the For Low Path Thresholds and Trib Thresholds areas click the drop down lists and select the values which if exceede
315. versity 2 0 upgrading with and without a circulator already installed Upgrading a System without a Circulator When a system is changed to a frequency diversity 2 0 system the link will inevitably fall since a circulator needs to be installed Thus if the system is initially planned for a future second ODU connection always install the circulator of the first ODU with a short Upgrading a System with a Circulator and Short 3 42 Future upgrades to frequency diversity 2 0 systems should be considered when the system is initially planned The circulator should be installed with future upgrading in mind To enable future ODU connection to a frequency diversity 2 0 system that includes only one ODU a short should be installed on the circulator The short can be removed when an additional ODU is connected to the circulator FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 3 Installation 6 8 GHz Frequency Diversity and 2 0 System Installation The following figure shows the circulator with a short ODU A1 Circulator Antenna I ODU B1 Installed after Short is Removed Important A 15 dB degradation of system gain will occur when the short is removed while the system is operating To minimize the 15 dB degredation time install an additional ODU connection as follows 1 2 3 4 5 Set up the ODU Connect the diplexer Connect the flexible waveguide Remove the short quickly Connect the waveguid
316. w appears click Yes Double click My Computer Dial up Networking Make New Connection Enter a connection name required for reference in the following steps In the Select a Device list select Direct Connection and click Next Enter the following values Area code 1 Telephone number 1 Country code leave as is Click Next The following message is displayed You have successfully created connection name Click Finish Right click the Connection Name icon and select Properties In the Dialing properties area unmark Use country area code and Area Code FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Appendix A PPP SLIP Driver Installation Installation for Windows 98 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 In the Configure area select the appropriate maximum speed the default is 19200 bps In the Connection tab unmark Wait for Dial Tone before Dialing and set Cancel the call if not connected within to 1 sec In the Advanced area unmark Use Error Control and Use Flow Control Click OK and OK again Select the Server Type tab In Dial up server select the SLIP Unix PPP connection If it is not listed return to step 2 and start the installation again Make sure TCP IP is marked and unmark all other options Select TCP IP and mark Specify an IP Address Enter the IP address This is the SLIP interface IP address not LAN address you entered in step 7 in the section Configuring the TCP
317. window Yellow radio BER higher than radio signal degrade threshold definition see Sonet SDH configuration window LPBK X X Red loopback is active Loopback STBY X X Yellow Protected configuration The unit Standby is currently passive or Tx mute is operating IDU X X X Red modem unlocked link ID mismatch Yellow high temperature fan problem ODU X X x Red no link ODU power ODU unlocked Yellow radio interference high temperature Rx Tx out of range CBL Cable X X Red IF cable open IF cable short RMT X X X Red no link remote unit problem red Remote LED is lit in the remote unit Unit Yellow warning in remote unit yellow LED is lit in the remote unit FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 5 Operation Physical View LED Indications for Hitless Systems For Hitless systems the following table lists the LEDs and their indications LOF LED Panel LOF LED Color Alarm Explanation Yellow Local unit receives LOF from a receive path currently not in use Red Local unit receives LOF from a receive path currently in use LOF Interface Panel ALRM LED Color Alarm Explanation OFF Hitless mode is disabled Red Local unit receives LOF from the mate unit Green Hitless switching can be performed if necessary Local Receiver Interface Panel Rx ACTV LED Color Alarm Explanation OFF Loc
318. working Click Apply to save the settings Click Close FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 5 65 Chapter 5 Operation 5 66 Menus NTP Configuration NTP Network Time Protocol configuration is performed when an NTP server is used to synchronize network activity 1 10 Select Configuration Management System NTP The NTP Configuration window appears Er Configuration 10 00 18 100 MAE NTP Server P Adirass f 0 NTP Ledie eral i3 4 Mirae Ottaet from OMT Ed Hiri mnie Eraba NTE Autheniicalion M LO l SE EM SE a SC Figure 5 18 NTP Configuration Window Enter the IP of the NTP server For NTP Update Interval use the up down arrows to select the amount of time minutes between synchronization updates For Offset from GMT use the arrow buttons and the drop down list to select the amount of time required to compensate for offset from the GMT Greenwich Mean Time For Daylight Saving Time Offset click the arrow buttons to set the amount of time required to compensate for daylight saving For Daylight Saving Time Start click Configure to set the beginning of the daylight saving time period For Daylight Saving Time End click Configure to set the end of the daylight saving time period Select Enable NTP Authentication for secure access to the NTP server If you enable NTP enter the Authentication Public Key and the Authentication Secret Key numbers Click Apply to s
319. y Installation and Operation Manual 5 69 Chapter 5 Operation Menus Performance Menu Radio RSL The RSL Performance Monitoring window displays received signal level values measured over the past 24 hours 1 Select Performance Radio RSL The RSL Monitoring window appears RS Penning 100011 44 Tomm En caine Tee oa Guina Fis ema fer ea fi raasd ff HS bron coir 1 H H E a oo a Lh e nao ESE O ak w iti wi mma inii ihi tas Bones Beh bna riino RSL Teea REL Theestead 1 re Lo m af fedarit L1 I5 E EH Ga y birti La oo Hi E i Lier AA 1 e F Leis LE ii Gaii y Baap chet Ei y ma Art LL iat FT a Erdarii Iiii b Bj Pr w mara i ea my EJ Figure 5 22 RSL Monitoring Window Time Elapsed is the current interval in seconds The value can be between 0 and 900 15 minutes The Threshold Exceeded counters at the top of the window display the number of seconds threshold values were exceeded during the current interval Current Min RSL values are the minimum received level measured during the interval Current Max RSL values are the maximum received level measured during the interval Unfaded RSL is the theoretical expected RSL value not the actual value which can be calculated by the user as a function of distance frequency etc The value is used only for reference purposes RSL Threshold 1 and RSL Threshold 2 are val
320. ypted Link The plain data passing through the FibeAir IDU is encrypted and transmitted to the ODU The encrypted data protects the information flowing to the rooftop against potential eavesdroppers EncryptAir Ceragon Networks robust encryption mechanism employs the DES algorithm which is more suitable for wireless medium while maintaining the field proven FibeAir system quality performance FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 15 Chapter 1 Introduction EncryptAirTM Ceragon Encryption EncryptAir Ceragon Encryption EncryptAir is based on proprietary Ceragon Networks technology and provides the first high capacity 155 Mbps wireless encryption connection EncryptAir implements the DES Data Encryption Standard algorithm which uses symmetric encryption keys a common secret between source and target in order to encrypt decrypt the data EncryptAir also implements proprietary algorithms that enable the highest level of information privacy Once established each link has a unique set of encryption keys allowing many links to operate in the same area with no link intercepting the data of another link The following figure illustrates Ceragon s DES implementation The standard DES core is empowered with Ceragon proprietary protocols to maintain DES algorithm strength in the wireless connection EncryptAir DES Implementation EncryptAir components include the following FPGA The DES core is
321. z frequency bands Compact single 1U height IDU FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Applications Additional E1 T1 or Ethernet 10BaseT over 2 Mbps Wayside Channel CeraView Java based SNMP element management application and PolyView open interface network management application Supports FCC ETSI ITU R ITU T and IEEE standards Applications FibeAir 1500P can be configured as a cost effective STM 1 ring solution providing a single one rack unit height IDU installation at any ring node Each node on the STM 1 ring consists of a single 1U Indoor Unit providing both East and West connectivity at 155 Mbps connecting to two Outdoor Units East and West FibeAir equipment supports co channel dual polarization CCDP mode for future upgrade to 311 Mbps capacity over a single 28 MHz channel j Wai fy A Ew omw f om an STMATA 4 E Backbone wmo a E 7 FibeAar Hit IH i a Primary Ring Fiber dat ere 0 STM 1 0C 3 eis Backbone z a hi 240 T b T Single IDU Solution FibeAir Family Installation and Operation Manual 1 13 Chapter 1 Introduction FibeAir 1500S 1528S FibeAir 1500S 1528S In this modern age data security is becoming more and more important for many organizations and service providers Data security is required to protect the customer s privacy and the confidentiality of their businesses Encryption technol

FibeAir Family - Meridian Microwave

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents